AMS Valvelink Software Users Manual by RMC Process Controls & Filtration, LLC.

Form 5636 July 2000

1 2

Introduction Quick Start

Working with ValveLink Software

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Installation and Use Customizing ValveLink HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections Multiplexer Networks Tag Management

VL2000 Series User Guide

Automation Tools Reports Database Synchronization ValveLink Software License Changes

Initial Setup and Calibration Detailed Setup Detailed Calibration Diagnostics Instrument Level StepUps This manual applies to software version 4.0 .

Solving Problems Glossary Index

12 13 14 15 16 17

D102255X012

Working with FIELDVUE instruments

Draft (do not reproduce) August 11, 1997

Form 5636 July 2000

FIELDVUE, ValveLink, Fisher, and Fisher-Rosemount are marks owned by Fisher Controls International, Inc. or Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Rosemount and Tri-Loop are marks owned by Rosemount Inc. HART is a mark owned by the HART Communications Foundation. FOUNDATION fieldbus is a mark owned by the Fieldbus Foundation. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.

While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Fisher Controls does not guarantee satisfactory results from reliance upon such information. Nothing contained herein is to be construed as a warranty or guarantee, expressed or implied, regarding the performance, merchantability, fitness or any other matter with respect to the products, nor as a recommendation to use any product or process in conflict with any patent. Fisher Controls reserves the right, without notice, to alter or improve the designs or specifications of the products described herein.

Introduction

Introduction11 1.1

Who Should Read This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2

Is This the Right Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2.1 1.2.2

Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.3

What This Manual Contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.4

How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.5

Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.6

Using Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.6.1 1.6.2

1.7

July 2000

1-1

The Windows Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Operating the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

VL2000 Series

1-2

Introduction

This section provides information you use to determine if this is the manual you need. This section also lists related documents and explains the conventions used in this manual.

1.1

Who

Should

Read

This

Manual

This manual is intended for ValveLink software managers who are: Responsible for installing ValveLink software on a Personal Computer (PC) Responsible for establishing user accounts and privileges Or for process control engineers, instrument technicians, or maintenance personnel who are: Responsible for using ValveLink software to configure, calibrate, or diagnose FIELDVUE Instruments To use this manual, you must understand general process control principles and your instruments. If you are installing ValveLink software, you must know how to log on to your PC and issue commands. If you are using ValveLink software to calibrate, configure, or diagnose an instrument, you should be familiar with process instruments and their operating parameters.

1.2

This

the

Right

Manual?

This manual contains the information needed to install and use the VL2000 Series ValveLink software. ValveLink software is a Windows-based software package which allows easy access to the information available from FIELDVUE instruments. Version 4.0 of the software is compatible with both HART (with firmware revisions 3 through 6) and FOUNDATION fieldbus instruments. Table 1-1 lists the ValveLink software types this manual applies to and the functions available for each. This manual describes how to install and use VL2000 Series ValveLink software, which requires the hardware and software listed in the following subsections. For a description of related documentation, refer to subsection 1.7. VL2000 Series

July 2000

1-3

Introduction

Table 1-1. VL2000 Series ValveLink Software Compatibility Product Type

Capability Initial Database Tags(1) Communication

Modem

HART

VL2005H

VL2021f

VL2021H

VL2021fH

VL2031H

125

FOUNDATION fieldbus H1

Modbus Interface

Trending

Valve Signature Test

Step Test Analysis

Overlay Step Test Graphics

Performance Step Test Step Response Test Max No. of Steps Step Response Test Capabilities

X X(2)

Multiplexer

Dynamic Error Band Test

Drive Signal Test

Output Signal Test

X(3)

DataSync Batch Runner

X indicates capability available 1. Number of database tags may be increased to as many as 2500. Type VL2005H may be increased to 75 tags. Requires ValveLink software StepUp, see section 11. 2. With one RS232-to-RS485 converter and one serial port on the PC , Type VL2031H and VL2041H software can communicate with up to 1024 FIELDVUE DVC5000 Series instruments. Adding a second serial port and converter permits communicating with an additional 1024 instruments. 3. HART only

1.2.1

Hardware Requirements ValveLink software runs on any IBM-compatible personal computer or notebook computer equipped with the following: 150 MHz, or faster, Pentium class computer running Windows 95, 98, or NT (version 4.0 or later) ValveLink software is not compatible with Windows 2000. CD-ROM Drive A minimum of 16 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM)

July 2000

VL2000 Series

1-4

Introduction

40 MB of disk space for the ValveLink software. Additional space is required for the number of instruments you configure and the amount of diagnostic data you save. SVGA or better monitor, (800 x 600 pixel screen resolution) Parallel printer port Hardlock for VL2000 Series ValveLink software; required for installation only For Type VL2021f or VL2021fH 16-bit ISA slot for NI-FBUS board or PCMCIA compatible computer for NI-FBUS card For VL2005H, VL2021H, VL2021fH, VL2031H, or VL2041H Nine pin serial port for connecting HART modem or HART multiplexer network. Second serial port required for communicating on second multiplexer network or on a Modbus network. HART multiplexer and RS232-to-RS485 converter, if the ValveLink software has multiplexer capability and you are planning to communicate to the instruments over a HART multiplexer network HART modem, if you are not going to communicate with HART instruments over a HART multiplexer network When using a HART modem, the computer RS232 port must have at least 7.0 Vdc on the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) line, pin 20, with a 1000 Ohm load to ground. For HART instruments (DVC5000 Series), ValveLink software communicates using a HART modem or HART multiplexers. For FOUNDATION fieldbus instruments (DVC5000f Series), ValveLink software communicates over an H1 segment. These devices must be connected to the PC and have access to the field instrument wiring. ValveLink software works with: DVC5000 Series digital valve controllers DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers VL2000 Series

July 2000

1-5

Introduction

1.2.2

Software Requirements ValveLink software requires: Microsoft Windows software—Windows 95, 98 or NT (version 4.0). Windows 2000 is not an option. For Type VL2021f or VL2021fH NI-FBUS software, version 2.3

1.3

What

This

Manual

Contains

This manual contains the following sections. See the Table of Contents for a complete listing of the subsections. Section 1—Introduction: describes the manual, its intended audience, and related documents. Section 2—Quick Start: explains how to install and set up the software to communicate to instruments with a HART modem. Section 3—Installation and Use: detailed description of VL2000 Series ValveLink software. Section 4—Customizing ValveLink: provides a detailed explanation of how to customize the ValveLink software. Section 5—HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Connections: explains how to connect to and communicate with FIELDVUE HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus instruments. Section 6—Multiplexer Networks: explains how to setup a HART multiplexer and add instruments and multiplexers to it. Also explains how to scan for alerts and setup a Modbus network. Section 7—Tag Management: explains how to create, open, and modify a ValveLink database tag. Section 8—Automation Tools: explains how to setup and use the Batch Runner tool. Section 9—Reports: explains how to view and create reports using audit log, and how to create tag reports. Section 10—Database Synchronization: explains how to setup and use the DataSync program. July 2000

VL2000 Series

1-6

Introduction

Section 11—ValveLink Software License Changes: explains how to StepUp the ValveLink software and how to remove, restore, and update licenses. Section 12—Initial Setup and Calibration: explains how to use the Setup Wizard to perform initial setup and calibration of FIELDVUE Instruments. Section 13—Detailed Setup: explains how to configure your FIELDVUE Instruments. Section 14—Detailed Calibration: explains how to calibrate your FIELDVUE Instruments. Section 15—Diagnostics: explains how to run diagnostics on FIELDVUE Instruments and contains some troubleshooting tips. Section 16—Instrument Level StepUps: explains how to use ValveLink software to StepUp the FIELDVUE instrument level. Section 17—Solving Problems: provides hints for overcoming problems that may occur while using ValveLink software. Glossary—Contains definitions, acronyms, and abbreviations of terms.

1.4

How

Use

This

Manual

To use this manual effectively: Read sections 1 through 11 to familiarize yourself with ValveLink software. Read sections 12 through 16 to use ValveLink software with FIELDVUE instruments Use section 17 for information on solving problems Use the glossary to look up acronyms, abbreviations, and terms.

1.5

Conventions

Used

This

Manual

The manual uses several conventions to convey information. VL2000 Series

July 2000

1-7

Introduction

Abbreviations and acronyms are explained the first time they are used and are also defined in the glossary. In instructions, the word enter means that you must type the command shown and press the Enter or Return key to process the command. Typographic conventions are shown in table 1-2. Table 1-2. Typographic Conventions Used in This Manual Text That Appears This Way...

Indication...

turn off the power ...to click on a... the manual Using ValveLink... press the Enter key press the F12 key click the Start button

Emphasis, A new term, or The title of a manual A named keyboard key or button on a display. The key or button name is shown exactly as it appears. Shortcut keys. Hold down the Ctrl key while pressing the N key.

use the Ctrl+N keys

Maintenance tips, notes, cautions, and warnings appear as follows:

Maintenance Tip Maintenance Tips help you apply information learned from a previous section of text.

Note Notes contain extra information that may make your tasks easier or increase your understanding.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

1-8

Introduction

CAUTION Cautions contain information that you must know to avoid damaging equipment or losing data.

WARNING Warnings contain information that you must know to avoid personal injury and loss of life!

1.6

Using

Windows

1.6.1

Using the Microsoft Windows Interface Before using ValveLink software, familiarize yourself with navigating through the software using a mouse and the Microsoft Windows interface. ValveLink software has all the typical elements found in most Windows applications. You can size, close, move, minimize, and maximize ValveLink windows. Some ValveLink windows contain more information than can fit on a single screen. These windows contain scroll bars that allow you to scroll through information.

1.6.2

Operating the Mouse The mouse is the device connected to your personal computer that enables you to move the mouse pointer, select options from pulldown menus, and select items from the windows displayed by ValveLink software. The following table describes some of the terms referred to throughout this guide. For more information on setting up and using the mouse, see your Microsoft Windows User Guide.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

1-9

Introduction

Term Click Right Click Double-click Drag Point

1.7

Meaning To quickly depress and release the left mouse button To quickly depress and release the right mouse button To click the mouse button twice in rapid succession To press and hold down the mouse button while you move the mouse To move the mouse until the mouse pointer on the screen points to the item of choice

Documents

This subsection describes related documentation for FIELDVUE ValveLink software. Other documents you may wish to refer to when using ValveLink software are: FIELDVUE DVC5000 Series Digital Valve Controller Instruction Manual – Form 5335 (part number D200442X012) FIELDVUE DVC5000 Series Digital Valve Controllers QuickStart Guide - Form 5626 (part number D102700X012) FIELDVUE DVC5000f Series Digital Valve Controllers for FOUNDATION fieldbus Instruction Manual - Form 5445 (part number D102634X012) FIELDVUE HF200 Series HART Filters Instruction Manual – Form 5380 (part number D102232X012) Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer Instruction Manual – Form 5407 (part number D102237X012) The following manuals are available from National Instruments. Getting Started with Your AT-FBUS and the NI-FBUSt Software for Windows 95 Getting Started with Your AT-FBUS and the NI-FBUSt Software for Windows NT Getting Started with Your PCMCIA-FBUS and the NI-FBUSt Software for Windows 95 Getting Started with Your PCMCIA-FBUS and the NI-FBUSt Software for Windows NT July 2000

VL2000 Series

1-10

Introduction

Note Documents are revised periodically. Before using any manual, be sure that its revision level matches the product revision level. Contact your Fisher Controls sales office or sales representative for the latest copies of the manuals.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

2-1

Quick Start

Quick Start22 Step 1: Attach the ValveLink HardLock Parallel Printer Port

ValveLink Hardlock

FV031â&#x20AC;&#x201C;M

Step 2: Install the ValveLink Software

Note To install ValveLink software on a computer running Windows NT, you must have Administrator privileges.

Start Windows 95/98/NT. For Windows NT users, log in as Administrator or as a user that has Administrator privileges. July 2000

VL2000 Series

2-2

Quick Start

Insert the ValveLink CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

Right click the Start button and select Explore Double click on the CD-ROM Drive. Double click on the file Setup.exe. Follow the on-line installation instructions.

Note When installation is complete, remove the ValveLink hardlock and store it in a safe place. It provides your backup license.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

2-3

Quick Start

Note If you are using a HART Multiplexer or FOUNDATION fieldbus communication, proceed to section 5 of this manual.

Step 3: Attach the HART Modem to the Computer

Note If you do not have a HART modem or FIELDVUE instrument available, proceed to Step 5.

Attach the HART modem to the serial port (COM port) selected during installation.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

2-4

Quick Start

Step 4: Attach the HART modem to the FIELDVUE Instrument Connect to PC Serial Port

Modem

E0350 / IL

Clip the HART modem leads to the FIELDVUE instrument TALK terminals. Apply 4–20 mA power to the FIELDVUE Instrument LOOP + and – terminals.

Step 5: Start ValveLink

Click the Start button. From the Start menu select Programs& ValveLink & ValveLink.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Quick Start

2-5

Step 6: Log In

Step 7: Add a New Security Group

From the ValveLink menu bar, select Customize ValveLink& Security Groups.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

2-6

Quick Start

Click the Add New Group button.

Type a name for the new security group, then click the OK button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Quick Start

2-7

Select the privileges accessible to this group and click OK.

Step 8: Add a New User Account

From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink& Users. July 2000

VL2000 Series

2-8

Quick Start

Click the Add New User button.

Type in a user name and password. Then type the password again to verify it. Click OK.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

2-9

Quick Start

Click on the new user name to highlight it. Click the list box arrow to the right of the Security Group box and select the desired security group. Click OK.

Step 9: Log Out

From the ValveLink menu bar, select Tag& Exit/Log Out. July 2000

VL2000 Series

2-10

Quick Start

Click the Log Out button.

Step 10: Log In as a New User

Click the ValveLink Log In button.

Enter your user name and password. Click OK.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

2-11

Quick Start

CLICK TO CLOSE WINDOW AND EXIT VALVELINK

TITLE BAR

CLICK TO MINIMIZE

MODEM SYMBOL VALVE SYMBOL

When the ValveLink software starts up, it displays the connected devices in the left pane of the window (Explorer View).

Step 11: Double click on the valve symbol.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

2-12

Quick Start

TITLE BAR DISPLAYS INSTRUMENT TAG

STATUS BAR DISPLAYS TAG INFORMATION

Step 12: Click the Start Monitoring button to begin monitoring instrument and valve parameters.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-1

Installation and Use

Installation and Use33 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.1.5 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.2.4 3.2.2.5

3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3

3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.3.1 3.4.4 July 2000

Installing the ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Attaching the ValveLink Hardlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Installing and Setting Up the NI-FBUS Hardware and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Computers with Windows 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NI–FBUS Driver Software for Windows 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NI–FBUS PCMCIA Card for Windows 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the NI–PCMCIA Card for Windows 95/98 . . . . . Installing Device Descriptions (DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computers with Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing NI–FBUS Driver Software for Windows NT . . . . . Installing the NI–FBUS PCMCIA Card for Windows NT . . . Configuring the NI–PCMCIA Card for Windows NT . . . . . . . Installing Device Descriptions (DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12 3-12 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-22 3-24 3-24 3-30 3-31 3-35 3-37

Setting Up ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Running ValveLink Software for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Automatic Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Exiting and Logging Out of ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

About ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 The ValveLink Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ValveLink Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ValveLink Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ValveLink Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-49 3-51 3-51 3-52 3-54

VL2000 Series

3-2

Installation and Use

3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2

VL2000 Series

ValveLink Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 Using the On-Line Help Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 The Help Window: Search, Navigation and Other Help Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

July 2000

3-3

Installation and Use

3.1

Installing

ValveLink

Software

Installation of ValveLink software requires the following steps: 1. Attaching the hardlock to the parallel printer port. You must attach the hardlock before installing the ValveLink software. 2. Installing the ValveLink software. ValveLink software contains a setup program that automatically creates a suitable operating environment for the application. Installation of the hardlock and software is explained in the following subsections. For information on connecting the HART modem, see section 5.1.1. For information on installing the Type 2530H1 HART Interchange multiplexers, and connecting field devices to the multiplexers, refer to the Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer Instruction Manual and the HF200 Series HART Filters Instruction Manual. For information on connecting other multiplexers, refer to the appropriate instruction manuals. For information on setting up the ValveLink software to communicate with a HART multiplexer network, see section 5.1.2. For information on connecting to a FOUNDATION fieldbus instrument or H1 segment, see section 5.2. If you wish to install a copy of the ValveLink software on another computer, you must first remove the license from the installed program and return it to the hardlock using the VLADMIN program. After the license is removed, the installed program will no longer run unless the hardlock is installed or until the license is restored. See Section 11 for information on using the VLADMIN program. To use ValveLink software with DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers (FOUNDATION fieldbus) requires the installation of the NIFBUS PCMCIA card and driver software. If you are planning to use ValveLink software with these instruments, install the NI-FBUS components before installing the ValveLink software. Information for installing the NI-FBUS hardware and software is found in section 3.2. VL2000 Series ValveLink software is compatible with Windows 95, 98 and Windows NT 4.0 or later. ValveLink software is not compatible with Windows 2000. July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-4

3.1.1

Installation and Use

Attaching the ValveLink Hardlock To install ValveLink, you must have the ValveLink hardlock attached to your PC. You attach the hardlock to the parallel printer port on the back of your computer. If the hardlock is not installed, a message will appear as in figure 3â&#x20AC;&#x201C;1. To install the hardlock, complete the following steps:

3.1.2

Step 1:

If a printer is connected to your computer, disconnect the printer cable connector from the parallel printer port.

Step 2:

Attach the hardlock to the parallel printer port as shown in figure 3â&#x20AC;&#x201C;2.

Installing the Software You must install the ValveLink software from the distribution CDROM using the setup program. You cannot copy the installed program files to another computer or to another directory or hard disk. Make sure you fill out the registration form that comes with your software and fax it to Fisher Controls. This will insure that you are informed when the software is updated or when a new release becomes available.

Figure 3-1. No hardlock attached

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-5

Installation and Use

Parallel Printer Port

ValveLink Hardlock

FV031â&#x20AC;&#x201C;M

Figure 3-2. Attaching the ValveLink Hardlock

Note To install ValveLink software on a computer running Windows NT, you must have Administrator privileges.

Step 1:

Start Windows 95, 98, or NT. For Windows NT users, log in as Administrator or as a user that has Administrator privileges. ValveLink software cannot be installed on computers with Windows 2000. If necessary, refer to the documentation accompanying your Windows application for more information about starting a session and running in enhanced mode.

Step 2: July 2000

Insert the ValveLink CD into the CD-ROM drive. VL2000 Series

3-6

Installation and Use

Figure 3-3. ValveLink Setup Exit Screen

Step 3:

Before starting installation, close all open applications on your desktop.

Step 4:

Right click the Start button and select Explore. Double click on the CD-ROM Drive. Double click on the file Setup.exe.

Step 5:

After setup is initialized, the setup program displays the ‘‘Welcome’’ window. Click Next to continue the installation. During the installation you can always click the Cancel button to cancel the installation. An ‘‘Exit’’ window, shown in figure 3-3, is then displayed prompting you to confirm your exit request. This screen also allows you to resume the installation (if you selected cancel by mistake). You can also cancel the installation with the ESC or F3 keys.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-7

Figure 3-4. Selecting the Type of Installation

July 2000

Step 6:

After you click Next, the system requests you to select the type of installation, as shown in figure 3-4, a hard lock is required for a full installation.

Step 7:

Setup displays the license information screen, shown in figure 3-5. This screen indicates the ValveLink software features that will be available after installation. Setup notifies you if a hardlock is required to run the ValveLink software. For more information about the installed configuration, see section 3.4. Click Next to continue the installation.

VL2000 Series

3-8

Installation and Use

Figure 3-5. ValveLink Setup License Information Screen

VL2000 Series

Step 8:

The default destination path is C:\Program Files\Fisher-Rosemount\ValveLink as shown in figure 3-6. If the default path is not where you want to install the ValveLink software, simply click Browse to select the drive and folder where you wish Setup to install the ValveLink software. When the path is correct, continue the installation by clicking Next. If the selected folder does not exist, Setup asks if it should create one. Click Yes to create the folder and continue.

Step 9:

The installation setup program searches the specified path for an existing database. If one is found, the message shown in figure 3-7 appears. If you want the newly installed ValveLink software to use the existing database, click the Keep Old Database button. If you want Setup to create a new database, click the Replace Old July 2000

3-9

Installation and Use

Figure 3-6. ValveLink Installation Path Screen

Figure 3-7. Installation Message when Existing Database is Found

Database button. When you select Replace Old Database, the existing database is stored in the file July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-10

Installation and Use

VLINKDB.BKP in the ValveLink program directory (see Step 8). To restore this database, after the installation is complete, rename the file VLINKDB.BKP to VLINK.MDB. If you are not planning on using the existing database, you may delete the file VLINKDB.BKP. Click the Next button to continue the installation. Step 10:

Enter the required information for the installation on the registration information screen. When all information is correct, click Next.

Step 11:

Setup next prompts you for the serial port (COM ports). If you have already installed the HART modem or multiplexer, select the port where the modem or multiplexer network is attached. If a modem or multiplexer network has not been installed, select an available port that is not used by another software application.

Step 12:

The Setup program displays the current installation settings. If all settings are correct, click the Finish button to continue the installation. If you wish to change any of the settings, click the Back button until you see the appropriate screen. Make any necessary changes, then click the Next button.

Note If the setup program detects a problem during the file copying process, it displays an error message stating that the setup failed and advising you to contact product support services. Contact your sales office for more information.

If you have insufficient disk space (40 megabytes required), you can switch from the Setup program to free VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-11

Figure 3-8. Status Copied Screen

some disk space, then continue with the installation, or you can click Cancel and correct your system or configuration problem before installing the ValveLink software. If no errors are found, the setup program begins copying ValveLink files to the directory specified by the path. The setup program displays the status bar shown in figure 3-8 while copying the files to your hard-disk drive.

You may cancel the copying process at any time by clicking the Cancel button. If you choose to cancel the installation, the setup program displays a message advising you that the ValveLink software will not be properly installed if you exit. Step 13:

When installation is finished, remove the hardlock and store it in a safe place. You will need the hardlock as a backup.

Step 14:

Setup creates a program group in Windows that contains five icons: one for the VL2000 Series ValveLink software, one for the ValveLink License Administration program, one for the ValveLink Audit Log Viewer, one for the ValveLink DataSync program, and one for ValveLink Help.

If you just installed the ValveLink software and you are using a HART modem, proceed to section 5 and install the modem. If you just installed ValveLink VL2000 Series software and you are using a network, refer to the appropriate instruction manuals for installing the RS232-to-RS485 converter and the HART multiplexers. July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-12

3.2

Installation and Use

Installing Hardware

and and

Setting Up Software

the

NIÄ&#x2020;FBUS

Connecting to a FOUNDATION fieldbus instrument requires National Instruments Fieldbus (NI-FBUS) Interface and Driver Software. The installation procedure depends on the operating system installed on your computer. If the operating system is Windows 95 or Windows 98, perform the procedures in subsection 3.2.1 to install the NI-FIBUS interface and driver software. If the operating system is Windows NT, perform the procedures in subsection 3.2.2.

3.2.1

Computers with Windows 95/98 The following is a guide for setting up and installing the National Instruments Fieldbus PCMCIA Type ll card and driver software on your computer with Windows 95/98 operating system. For a complete installation description and procedures, refer to the National Instruments manual titled Getting Started with Your PCMCIA-FBUS and the NI-FBUS Software for Windows 95.

What you need to get started: PCMCIA-FBUS card Installation disks for NIFBUS communications manager version 2.3 Windows 95/98 installed on your computer

3.2.1.1

Installing the NI-FBUS Driver Software for Windows 95/98

Note Before starting installation, close all open applications on your desktop.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-13

The following procedures require you to have available the National Instruments NI-FBUS Communications Manager for Windows NT/98/95 version 2.3. This software is provided on two 3-1/2 inch diskettes. This section presents screen captures from an actual installation. As you proceed with the installation, compare the screens on your computer to the screen captures in this section to confirm that you are correctly installing the software. If you encounter a problem or are presented with a different screen, note the differences and proceed.

Note You must have a licensed copy of the NI-FBUS driver software. If you purchased this software from Fisher Controls or one of its authorized representatives, you have a licensed copy and are free to install it now.

Step 1:

Start Windows 95/98.

Step 2:

Insert Disk 1 of the NI-FBUS Communication Manager software into the diskette drive on your computer.

Step 3:

Click the Start button and select Run. In the Run... dialog box, type x:\setup where x is the letter of the drive containing the diskette (usually a or b). After the setup program initializes, a Welcome window (figure 3-9) appears. It includes a copyright statement and reproduction or distribution warning. Click the Next button to proceed.

Step 4:

July 2000

The next screen, shown in figure 3-10, shows the default location of C:\NIFBUS for the driver software. If the default location is not where you want to install the driver software, click Browse to select the drive and directory where you wish setup to install the software. If you are VL2000 Series

3-14

Installation and Use

Figure 3-9. NI-FBUS Disclaimer and Licensing Agreement

Figure 3-10. Driver Software Destination Location Screen

unclear, choose the default location. There are some advantages of using the default location (e.g., common VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-15

Figure 3-11. Assigning the NI-FBUS Icons to a Program Group

location aids troubleshooting). When the destination location is correct, click Next to continue the installation. If the selected directory does not exist, setup asks if it should create one. Click Yes to create the directory and continue. Step 5:

July 2000

Create a program folder where all of the NI-FBUS icons are added. If you choose the default folder, shown in figure 3-11, all of the program files can be accessed under Programs& National Instruments NIFBUS. Typically the default location is accepted. Click Next to continue.

VL2000 Series

3-16

Installation and Use

Figure 3-12. Copying Files Screen Showing Directory and Folder to Which Setup Will Copy Files

VL2000 Series

Step 6:

The setup program is ready to begin copying files. The screen shown in figure 3-12, shows the directory to which the files will be copied (target directory) and the program folder where the icons will be located. If you have any questions or concerns about any settings that you have chosen, click the Back button to correct or make changes. Once you are satisfied that you have everything correct, click the Next button to start copying the files.

Step 7:

When the Setup program prompts you to insert Disk 2 of the NI FBUS program, remove Disk 1 from the A:\ drive and insert Disk 2 in its place. Click OK to proceed to the next step.

Step 8:

After a few moments the screen shown in figure 3-13 should appear. The setup program has finished and you have installed the NI FBUS driver software onto your computer. July 2000

Installation and Use

3-17

Figure 3-13. Screen Showing Installation of NI-FBUS Driver Software Complete and NI-FBUS Icon

The small dialog box shows the icons that the setup program installed into the program group you specified earlier. All of the icons in this example might not be the same as you have installed. However, if the installation completed correctly you should see an icon for the NI-FBUS driver (Blue File Cabinet). Because of this icon the program is sometimes referred to as the â&#x20AC;&#x153;Blue Box.â&#x20AC;?

3.2.1.2

Installing the NI-FBUS PCMCIA CARD for Windows 95/98 Your computer must support a PCMCIA Type II card and have the Windows 95/98 operating system installed. To install the PCMCIAFBUS card, complete the following steps: Step 1:

Shut down your operating system and turn off your computer.

Step 2:

Insert the card into a free PC Card (PCMCIA) socket.

Step 3:

Turn on your computer.

The card has no jumpers or switches to set. One PCMCIA-FBUS cable is included in your kit. July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-18

3.2.1.3

Installation and Use

Configuring the PCMCIA-FBUS Card for Windows 95/98

Note When using ValveLink software with a dual-port PCMCIA-FBUS/2 card, only one of the ports is used. The ValveLink software will use the port configured as NI-FBUS. To prevent the ValveLink software from attempting to use the second port, configure it as Bus Monitor.

To configure the PCMCIA-FBUS card to work with ValveLink software, perform the following:

VL2000 Series

Step 1:

Start the NI-FBUS Configuration utility by selecting Start& Programs& NI-FBUS& Interface Config.

Step 2:

In the Interface Config window, select PORT0 and click the EDIT button.

Step 3:

Select NI-FBUS in the Usage area. See figure 3-14.

Step 4:

Click the OK button.

Step 5:

Select PORT1 in the Interface Config window and click on the EDIT button.

July 2000

3-19

Installation and Use

CONFIGURE AS NI-FBUS

Figure 3-14 Configuring the NI-FBUS PORT0

Note Port0 here is associated with Port 1 on the cable that connects to the fieldbus segment or instrument. Port1 here is associated with port 2 on the second connecting cable. See figure .

3.2.1.4

Step 6:

Select Monitor in the Usage area. See figure 3-15.

Step 7:

Click the OK button.

Step 8:

Close the Interface Config window by clicking the OK button.

Installing Device Descriptions (DD) For ValveLink to communicate with DVC5000f Series instruments, the instrument device descriptions must be installed on the computer. Use the NI-FBUS configuration utility to setup a location for the DDs. Install the DDs as follows:

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-20

Installation and Use

CONFIGURE AS MONITOR

Figure 3-15 Configuring the NI-FBUS PORT1

Step 1:

Create a directory named x:\DD. Where x is the drive where you want the DDs to be located, preferably on the same drive as the NI-FBUS program and where the ValveLink sofware will be located. For example if you installed the NI-FBUS software in C:\NIFBUS, then create a directory named C:\DD You may load new DD information from the latest CDROM titled Device Description DVC5000f. This CDâ&#x20AC;&#x201C; ROM contains new device descriptions and the instruction manual for the FIELDVUE DVC5000f digital valve controller for FOUNDATION fieldbus. You may also locate this information at the following internet address: http://www.frco.com/fisher/products/ddiagree.html

VL2000 Series

Step 2:

On the CD-ROM or from the downloaded internet files, locate the folder called \RELEASE.

Step 3:

Open this folder and select the folder named \005100. The number 005100 is the FOUNDATION fieldbus code for Fisher Controls products. July 2000

3-21

Installation and Use

Figure 3-16. NI-FBUS Interface Configuration Utility DD Info Dialog Box

July 2000

Step 4:

Copy folder 005100 and all its contents, including subfolders, to the directory you created in Step 1. If this is an update (the folders already exist), the system informs you that the folders already exist and asks if they should be replaced. Select OK so the existing folders are properly updated.

Step 5:

Start the NI-FBUS configuration utility by selecting Start& Programs& NI-FBUS& Interface Config.

Step 6:

Click the DD Info button.

Step 7:

From the DD Info dialog box, shown in figure 3-16, rename the base directory from C:\Nifbus\Data to the directory you created in Step 1. (For example, C:\DD)

VL2000 Series

3-22

Installation and Use

Figure 3-17. Example DD Info Dialog Box with Path to Installed DDs and Standard Dictionary

3.2.1.5

Step 8:

The standard dictionary provides instructions for NIFBUS to look up specific instrument parameters. This dictionary is in a file named Standard.dct in the \005100 folder. Therefore, on the DD info dialog box, rename Your standard text dictionary by browsing to the standard.dct file in the directory you created in Step 1. For example, C:\DD\005100\Standard.dct.

Step 9:

When you finish, the DD info box should appear similar to the example shown in figure 3-17. Click the OK button.

Step 10:

Click the OK button on the Interface configuration Utility screen. The new support files are now installed.

Checking for Conflicts To make sure that your NI-FBUS software is installed correctly and is working properly, perform the following: Select Start& Programs& National Instruments NIFBUS& Nifb.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-23

Installation and Use

On successful startup, the NI-FBUS Communications Manager displays a message saying that the process started up successfully, and the title bar of the nifb window changes to NIFB (running). Once you have determined that NI-FBUS starts and is working properly, shut it down and install the ValveLink software as described in section 3.1. If the NI-FBUS software does not start up successfully, note any error messages that may appear. The base address, the interrupt request (IRQ), or your network address may be incorrect. Start the NI-FBUS Interface Configuration utility by selecting Start& Programs& National Instruments NIFBUS& Interface Config, and make sure that your network address is unique.

Note You should not normally need to modify the resources that Windows 95/98 assigns to your software. But if you have conflicts, change your base address or IRQ settings using Windows 95/98 Device Manager.

You can also check the Windows 95/98 Device Manager to see if Windows 95/98 has detected any problems or conflicts. The Device Manger displays an exclamation mark (!) on the icon that has resource conflicts. To view the Device Manager: 1. Select Start& Settings & Control Panel. 2. Double click on System and select the tab for Device Manager and find the board under Fieldbus Adapters. 3. Click on Properties and edit the resources. 4. Run Nifb again by selecting Start& Programs& National Instruments NIFBUS& Nifb. For additional troubleshooting help, visit our website at www.FIELDVUE.com July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-24

3.2.2

Installation and Use

Computers with Windows NT Connecting to a FOUNDATION fieldbus instrument requires National Instruments Fieldbus (NI–FBUS) Interface and Driver Software. The following is a guide for setting up and installing the National Instruments Fieldbus PCMCIA Type ll card and Driver Software on your computer, with Windows NT operating system. The following provides brief procedures for installing the NI–FBUS Hardware and driver software. For a complete installation description and procedures, refer to the National Instruments Manual title, Getting Started with Your PCMCIA–FBUS and the NI–FBUS Software for Windows NT.

What you need to get started: PCMCIA-FBUS card Installation disks for NIFBUS communications manager version 2.3 Windows NT version 4.0 with service pack 3, or later, installed on your computer

3.2.2.1

Installing the NI-FBUS Driver Software for Windows NT

Note Before starting installation, close all open applications on your desktop.

July 2000

3-25

Installation and Use

This section presents screen captures from an actual installation. As you proceed with the installation, compare the screens on your computer to the screen captures in this section to confirm that you are correctly installing the software. If you encounter a problem or are presented with a different screen, note the differences and proceed.

The following NIâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;FBUS software default settings are suitable for most PCMCIA systems, but if these default settings conflict with another device in your system, you must locate conflictâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;free resources. NI-FBUS software Setting Memory Base Address (hex) = D0000 (physical) NI-FBUS Board Setting Interrupt Request Line (IRQ) = 11 To select conflict-free resources, you can use the Windows NT Diagnostics utility, which displays a list of the I/O port addresses, interrupt levels, and DMA channels that are currently being used in your system. 1. Select Start& Programs& Administrative Tools (Common)& Windows NT Diagnostics. 2. Select the Resources tab. 3. Write down the free IRQ and Memory locations. 4. Click OK to close the Windows NT Diagnostics window. Assign resources this utility does not list to your fieldbus interface. If you cannot find a free IRQ line, you can configure the PCMCIAFBUS card to operate in polled mode, without an IRQ line. In polled mode, NI-FBUS polls your board periodically. See section 3.3.2.5. July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-26

Installation and Use

CAUTION If you reinstall the NI-FBUS software over an existing version, you lose any existing board and port configuration data. Before you reinstall the NI-FBUS software, write down your board configuration. Also, if you changed any port configuration parameters from their defaults, write down the new parameters.

Note To install NI-FBUS software on a computer running Windows NT, you must have Administrator privileges.

To install the NI-FBUS software, perform the following: Step 1:

Start Windows NT. Log in as Administrator or as a user that has Administrator privileges.

Step 2:

Insert Disk 1 of the NI-FBUS Communication Manager software into the diskette drive on your computer.

Step 3:

Click the Start button and select Run.

Step 4:

In the Run... dialog box, type x:\setup where x is the letter of the drive containing the disk (usually a or b). After the setup program initializes, a Welcome window (figure 3-18) appears. It includes a copyright statement and reproduction or distribution warning. Click the Next button to proceed.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-27

Installation and Use

Figure 3-18. NI-FBUS Welcome window with Copyright Statement and Reproduction or Distribution Warning

July 2000

Step 5:

As the licensing agreement states you must have a licensed copy of the NI-FBUS driver software. If you purchased this software from Fisher Controls or one of its authorized representatives you have a licensed copy and are free to install it now.

Step 6:

The next screen, shown in figure 3-19, shows the default location of C:\NIFBUS for the driver software. If the default location is not where you want to install the driver software, click Browse to select the drive and directory where you wish setup to install the software. If you are unclear, choose the default location. There are some advantages of using the default location (e.g., common location aids troubleshooting). When the destination location is correct, click Next to continue the installation. If the selected directory does not exist, setup asks if it should create one. Click Yes to create the directory and continue. VL2000 Series

3-28

Installation and Use

Figure 3-19. Driver Software Destination Location Screen

VL2000 Series

Step 7:

Create a program folder where all of the NI-FBUS icons are added. If you choose the default folder,shown in figure 3-20, all of the program files can be accessed under Programs& National Instruments NIFBUS. Typically the default location is accepted. Click Next to continue.

Step 8:

The setup program is ready to begin copying files. The screen shown in figure 3-21, shows the directory to which the files will be copied (target directory) and the program folder where the icons will be located. If you have any questions or concerns about any settings that you have chosen, click the Back button to correct or make changes. Once you are satisfied that you have everything correct, click the Next button to start copying the files.

Step 9:

When the Setup program prompts you to insert Disk 2 of the NI FBUS program, remove Disk 1 from the A:\ drive and insert Disk 2 in its place. Click OK to proceed to the next step. July 2000

Installation and Use

3-29

Figure 3-20. Assigning the NI-FBUS Icons to a Program Group

Figure 3-21. Copying Files Screen Showing Directory and Folder to Which Setup Will Copy Files

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-30

Installation and Use

Figure 3-22. Screen Showing Installation of NI-FBUS Driver Software Complete and NI-FBUS Icon

Step 10:

After a few moments the screen shown in figure 3-22 should appear. The setup program has finished and you have installed the NI FBUS driver software onto your computer.

3.2.2.2

Installing the NI-FBUS PCMCIA Card for Windows NT Your computer must support a PCMCIA Type II card and have the Windows NT operating system installed. To install the NI-FBUS PCMCIA card, complete the following steps: Step 1:

VL2000 Series

Shut down your operating system and turn off your computer. July 2000

3-31

Installation and Use

Step 2:

Insert the card into a free PC Card (PCMCIA) socket. The card has no jumpers or switches to set. One PCMCIAâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;FBUS cable is included in your kit.

Step 3:

3.2.2.3

Turn on your computer.

Configuring the NI-PCMCIA Card for Windows NT Configuring the NI-PCMCIA card to operate with the Windows NT operating system requres setting the interrupt request line (IRQ), setting the ports for a dual port card, and setup the system to automatically reserve hardware resources (memory and an IRQ) whenever Windows NT starts. To set the IRQ, perform the following: Step 1:

Start the NI-FBUS Configuration utility by selecting Start& Programs& NI-FBUS& Interface Config.

Step 2:

On the NI-FBUS Interface Configuration Utility dialog box, click the board icon to highlight it; click the Edit button.

Step 3:

On the Interface dialog box, shown in figure 3-23, click the down arrow on the IRQ list box and select an unused IRQ noted at the start of the NI-FBUS software installation.

Step 4:

Click the OK button.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-32

Installation and Use

Figure 3-23. Setting the NI-FBUS Board IRQ

To configure the card ports proceed as follows:

VL2000 Series

Step 1:

In the Interface Configuration Utility window, select PORT0 and click the EDIT button.

Step 2:

Select NI-FBUS in the Usage area. See figure 3-24.

Step 3:

Click the OK button.

Step 4:

Select PORT1 in the Interface Config window and click on the EDIT button.

Step 5:

Select Monitor in the Usage area. See figure 3-25.

Step 6:

Click the OK button.

Step 7:

Close the Interface Config window by clicking the OK button. July 2000

Installation and Use

3-33

CONFIGURE AS NI-FBUS

Figure 3-24 Configuring the NI-FBUS PORT0

CONFIGURE AS MONITOR

Figure 3-25 Configuring the NI-FBUS PORT1

To setup the system to automatically reserve resources for NI-FBUS whenever the system starts, perform the following:

July 2000

Step 1:

Select Start& Settings& Control Panel.

Step 2:

Double click the Devices icon.

Step 3:

On the Devices dialog box, scroll through the devices to find the NIFBUS adapter and click on it to highlight it. VL2000 Series

3-34

Installation and Use

Figure 3-26. Setting NI-FBUS for Automatic Startup

VL2000 Series

Step 4:

Click the Startup button. On the Device dialog box, shown in figure 3-26, click the Automatic option button. Click the OK button.

Step 5:

On the Devices dialog box, click the Start button. The Nifb device status should change from Stopped to Started. Click the Stop button then click the OK button.

Step 6:

Close the Control Panel. July 2000

3-35

Installation and Use

3.2.2.4

Installing Device Descriptions (DD) For ValveLink to communicate with a DVC5000f Series instruments, the instrument device descriptions must be installed on the computer. Use the NI-FBUS configuration utility to setup a location for the DDs. Install the DDs as follows: Step 1:

July 2000

Step 2:

On the CD-ROM or from the downloaded internet files, locate the folder called \RELEASE.

Step 3:

Open this folder and select the folder named \005100. The number 005100 is the FOUNDATION fieldbus code for Fisher Controls products.

Step 4:

Step 5:

Start the NI-FBUS configuration utility by selecting Start& Programs& National Instruments NIFBUS& Interface Config.

Step 6:

Click the DD Info button. VL2000 Series

3-36

Installation and Use

Figure 3-27. Folder on the host system to hold all DD capabilities files

VL2000 Series

Step 7:

From the DD Info dialog box, shown in figure 3-27, rename the base directory from C:\Nifbus\Data to the directory you created in Step 1. (For example, C:\DD)

Step 8:

Step 9:

When you finish, the DD info box should appear similar to the example shown in figure 3-28. Click the OK button.

Step 10:

Click the OK button on the Interface configuration Utility screen. The new support files are now installed. July 2000

3-37

Installation and Use

Figure 3-28. Example DD Info Dialog Box with Path to Installed DDs and Standard Dictionary

3.2.2.5

Checking for Conflicts To make sure that your NI-FBUS software is installed correctly and is working properly, complete the following steps: Step 1:

After you configure your installation, restart Windows NT. You must restart your computer before you can use the NI-FBUS software.

Step 2:

Select Start& Programs& National Instruments FBUS.

Step 3:

Double click the NIFB icon (the blue box).

On successful startup, NI-FBUS displays a message saying that the process started successfully, and the title bar of the nifb window changes to NIFB (running). Once you have determined that NI-FBUS starts and is working properly, shut it down and install the ValveLink software as described in section 3.1. If the NI-FBUS software does not start up successfully, note any error messages that may appear. The base address, the interrupt request (IRQ), or your network address may be incorrect. Restart the computer again and assign new IRQ/Memory locations again. July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-38

Installation and Use

3.3

Setting

ValveLink

software

3.3.1

Running ValveLink software for the First Time Before you can operate your newly installed ValveLink software, follow the procedure below to authorize access to ValveLink software functions and establish a connection to the FIELDVUE instrument. Step 1:

Start ValveLink

Click on the Windows Start menu, then Programs& ValveLink & ValveLink

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-39

Installation and Use

Step 2:

Add a New Security Group

From the ValveLink menu bar, select Customize ValveLink & Security Groups. See section 4.2 for more detailed information.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-40

Installation and Use

Click the Add New Group button.

Type a name for the new security group, then click the OK button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-41

Installation and Use

Select the privileges accessible to this group and click OK. For detailed information on adding security groups, see section 4.2.

Step 4:

Add a New User Account

From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink& Users. See Section 4.3 for detailed information.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-42

Installation and Use

Click the Add New User button.

Type in a user name and password. Then type the password again to verify it. Click OK.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-43

Click on the new user name to highlight it. Click the list box arrow to the right of the Security Group box and select the desired security group. Click OK. For detailed information on adding a user, see section 4.3.

Step 5:

Log out

From the ValveLink menu bar, select Tag& Exit/Log Out. July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-44

Installation and Use

Click the Log Out button.

Step 6:

Click the ValveLink Log In button.

Enter your user name and password. Click OK.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-45

Installation and Use

Step 7:

Double click on the valve symbol.

TITLE BAR DISPLAYS INSTRUMENT TAG

STATUS BAR DISPLAYS TAG INFORMATION

Click the Start Monitoring button to begin monitoring instrument and valve parameters. For detailed information on the Instrument Status window, see section 15.2.1.

Note If you do not see a valve symbol, you may not be connected to a FIELDVUE instrument. Go to section 5 for information on connecting a HART modem, HART multiplexer, or FOUNDATION fieldbus segment.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-46

3.3.2

Installation and Use

Automatic Startup (VL2031) During installation, a ValveLink program icon is put into the Windows startup folder. When Windows is started, ValveLink opens the window which was on the screen when ValveLink was closed. If power to the computer is lost while the ValveLink program is scanning for alerts, the program will resume scanning once power and the operating system are restored. However, if the program detects a change in the network list after restoration, any missing tags will be removed from the Alert Scan list. Although the program automatically resumes scanning for alerts after a power outage (or any improper shutdown), you must log in to manipulate any tags or tag data, such as opening a tag, performing configuration and calibration, or running diagnostics. The log-in window indicates that the program has recovered from a power outage or computer reboot, and advises you to verify that all HART network connections are still intact. To enable the ValveLink program to recover automatically after a power outage, the installation program places the ValveLink icon in the Windows StartUp group or StartUp folder and adds the word AUTORECOVER to the ValveLink icon command line. Without the word AUTORECOVER in the command line, the ValveLink program will still recover after a power outage, but will also start every time Windows starts. To modify the ValveLink software automatic startup behavior, click the Start button on your Windows taskbar. From the Start menu, go to Programs, then click Windows Explorer. Open the Windows folder then the Start Menu folder. Open Programs. Find StartUp and open it. Click the ValveLink icon once to highlight it. From the File menu, select Properties. Click the Shortcut tab. Remove or add the word AUTORECOVER from the Target line. Click the OK button. To disable ValveLink automatic startup, remove the ValveLink icon from the Windows startup folder.

3.3.3

Exiting and Logging Out of ValveLink software To quit the ValveLink program, you may exit or log out. If you exit, the program no longer runs. Therefore, the software will not scan for alerts or communicate on the Modbus network.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-47

Installation and Use

When you log out, the application continues to run so that it can continue to scan for alerts and communicate alert data over the Modbus network. However, you do not have an active interface with any tags. This means once you log out you cannot manipulate the instrument tag (open, close, copy, or delete) nor can you work with tag data. For example, you cannot configure or calibrate an instrument or run diagnostics. In order to manipulate tags and tag data you must again log in as a user with the required privileges. For more information on setting up ValveLink software to scan for alerts and to communicate over a Modbus network see subsections 6.2 and 6.3.

3.4

About

ValveLink

Software

ValveLink software is a Windows-based software package which allows easy access to the information available from FIELDVUE instruments. The term ‘‘instrument” as used in this manual, refers to either DVC5000 Series digital valve controllers or DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers for FOUNDATION fieldbus. ValveLink software communicates with DVC5000 Series Instruments through the computer’s serial port either through a HART modem or over an RS485 network using HART multiplexers. ValveLink software communicates with DVC5000f Series instruments over the H1 segment of the fieldbus. Depending upon your installed configuration of ValveLink software, you can calibrate, configure, monitor performance, and troubleshoot the Instruments. To determine your software configuration, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink shown in Figure 3-29. The following define the levels available: HART Communication—When YES, enables communicating with a DVC5000 Series digital valve controller with a HART modem or over a HART multiplexer network. Fieldbus Communication—When YES, enables communicating with a DVC5000f Series digital valve controller over a FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 segment. Lite—When YES, you cannot copy tags or create reference tags by creating a tag or modifying an existing tag. Calibration—When YES, allows using ValveLink software to calibrate the instrument, when the user has the calibrate instrument July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-48

Installation and Use

privilege; see subsection 4.2 for information on setting privileges. See Section 14 for details on calibrating instruments. Std Diagnostics—When YES, enables running any of the diagnostic tests except step response and valve signature. Step response and valve signature tests can be run only if these features are enabled. To run any diagnostic test, the user must be assigned the diagnostic privilege. See subsection 4.2 for information on setting privileges. This level does not affect instrument information. Instrument information is always available. Trending—When YES, enables trending parameters such as input current, actuator pressure, travel, and temperature. You can trend live data or review archived data. You can also view a travel histogram to determine where the valve spends the most of its time. Trending requires a HART multiplexer network. Diag Tools—When YES, enables running a Step Response test with greater than 8 steps, Step Response test analysis and overlay, Performance Step test, and DataSync. Step Response—When YES, allows running a step response diagnostic test, when the user has the diagnostic privilege; see subsection 4.2 for information on setting privileges. See subsection 15.3.6 for details on running a step response test. The availability of this level is not dependent upon the availability of the standard diagnostics level. Valve Signature—When YES, allows running a valve signature diagnostic test, when the user has the diagnostic privilege; see subsection 4.2 for information on setting privileges. See subsection 15.3.7 for details on running a valve signature test. The availability of this level is not dependent upon the availability of the standard diagnostics level. Multiplexer—When YES, allows communicating with FIELDVUE Instruments over a serial port through HART multiplexers. With this product level, ValveLink VL2000 Series software can support up to 32 multiplexers per network and up to two networks. This product level software also can support communication on a Modbus network. ValveLink software can communicate through a HART modem whether or not this level is available. VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-49

Installation and Use

Figure 3-29. Example About ValveLink Help Screen

Batch Runnerâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;When YES, enables setting up batches to automatically run diagnostic tests, perform instrument calibration, run the performance tuner, upload setup data, or set the instrument clock. See section 8 for details on setting up and running a batch. Tag Limitsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Indicates the number of instrument tags or reference tags that can be created in the ValveLink database. For more information on working with tags, see Section 7. For information on increasing the tag limit, see section 11.

3.4.1

The ValveLink Window When you first open ValveLink software, you see a window with a title bar, menu bar, and toolbar near the top of the screen and a status bar near the bottom as shown in figure 3-30. The left pane of the window, the Explorer View, shows the devices connected to the computer and communicating with the ValveLink software. The right pane is the working area. Here is where you will see instrument and

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-50

Installation and Use

CLICK TO CLOSE WINDOW AND EXIT VALVELINK

TITLE BAR

CLICK TO MINIMIZE

MENU BAR TOOL BAR

DRAG DOUBLE-HEADED ARROW TO RESIZE PANES INSTRUMENT DATA, RIGHT PANE

EXPLORER VIEW, LEFT PANE STATUS BAR

Figure 3-30. ValveLink Window

database information while performing functions such as setting up the instrument, calibrating the instrument, and running diagnostics. You can resize either pane of the window by positioning the mouse cursor on the bar between the two panes until you see a doubleheaded arrow, as shown. Once you see the double-headed arrow, drag the bar to the desired position. To reset the pane size, from the menu bar select Network then select Explorer View from the dropdown menu. To begin working with ValveLink software, you can click any toolbar button or select any menu option that is not dimmed. If a button or option is dim, it is not a valid choice. For example, options to run calibration, configuration, and diagnostic tests are dim until you open a tag. To begin working with an instrument and valve, open a tag by double clicking the instrument symbol in the Explorer View. As shown in VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-51

TITLE BAR DISPLAYS INSTRUMENT DATABASE TAG

STATUS BAR DISPLAYS TAG INFORMATION

Figure 3-31. Tag Open to Status Window

figure 3â&#x20AC;&#x201C;19, the title bar, toolbar and status bar change to show information about the tag you opened. For information on opening a tag and tag management see section 7.

3.4.2

The ValveLink Menu Figure 3-32 shows an example of a ValveLink menu. Menus provide quick and easy access to all of the ValveLink software features. To select from a menu, click an item to open a list of options. Click an option to select it.

3.4.3

The ValveLink Toolbar Figure 3-33 shows the ValveLink toolbar. The ValveLink toolbar allows quick and easy access to many of the ValveLink software features. To select from the toolbar, click a button.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-52

Installation and Use

CLICK A MENU NAME TO OPEN A LIST OF SELECTIONS

CLICK A MENU ITEM TO SELECT IT

GRAY ITEMS ARE NOT AVAILABLE

Figure 3-32. Example ValveLink Menu NETWORK SCAN

TAG

CONTROL MODE

INSTRUMENT MODE

DETAILED SETUP

SETUP WIZARD

INSTRUMENT STATUS

VALVE SIGNATURE TRENDING

DYNAMIC STEP TRAVEL CALIBRATION ERROR RESPONSE BAND

BATCH RUNNER

Figure 3-33. ValveLink Toolbar

3.4.3.1

Toolbar Buttons Tag Button—Opens the Tag Management window for locating a specific tag. From the Tag Management window you can open, modify, copy, or delete a selected tag. You can also print a report containing information from the listed tags. Print Button—Prints information from the active window.

Network Scan Button—Opens the Network Scan window and allows you to scan selected tags. Using the Setup button you can select which tags to scan and which alerts to scan for. Network Scan is only available on ValveLink software setup to communicate through HART multiplexers. Instrument Status Button—Displays the Instrument Status window for the open tag. Provides device monitor, alert, and device information for an open tag. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-53

Dynamic Error Band Button—For DVC5000 Series instruments, opens the Dynamic Error Band window for the open tag. Plots TRAVEL versus INPUT. For DVC5000f Series instruments, opens the Total Scan window. Available only on software with standard diagnostics enabled. See the ValveLink software Help screen, About ValveLink. Step Response Button—Opens the Step Response window for the open tag. Plots TRAVEL versus the TIME it takes to move the valve through the specified steps. Available only on software with step response enabled. See the ValveLink software Help screen, About ValveLink. Valve Signature Button—For DVC5000 Series instruments, opens the Valve Signature window for the open tag. Graphically depicts PRESSURE versus TRAVEL of an instrument. For DVC5000f Series instruments, opens the Total Scan window. Available only for digital valve controllers with Advanced Diagnostics. Available only on software with Valve Signature enabled. See the ValveLink software Help screen, About ValveLink. Calibration Button—Opens the Auto Travel Calibration window for the open tag. Available only on software with calibration enabled. See the ValveLink software Help screen, About ValveLink. Detailed Setup Button—Opens the Detailed Setup window for the open tag. Provides options for defining an instrument’s operating parameters. You can retrieve information from the ValveLink database or from the instrument. You can also modify this data and save changes in the database or download them to the instrument. Instrument Mode Button—For DVC5000 Series instruments, allows changing the instrument mode between In Service and Out of Service. For DVC5000f Series instruments, allows changing the Analog Output block, Resource block, and Transducer block target mode to another of the permitted modes. To change a setup parameter, or to run a calibration procedure or diagnostic test may require the mode to be Out of Service. Control Mode Button—(For DVC5000 Series instruments only) Changes the instrument control mode between Analog (RSP) and Digital. Control mode defines where the instruJuly 2000

VL2000 Series

3-54

Installation and Use

ment reads its set point. Choose Analog (RSP) if the instrument is to receive its set point over the 4–20 mA loop. Choose Digital if the instrument is to receive its set point digitally via the HART communications link. Setup Wizard Button—Starts the Setup Wizard to permit automatic setup and travel calibration of the instrument using specified actuator information. Trending Button—(For instruments connected to a HART multiplexer network only) Displays operating parameter trends as they occur (live data), a parameter trend history (trend archive), and a valve travel histogram. Trend is setup from the Network Alert Scan window. Available only on software with trending enabled. See the ValveLink software Help screen, About ValveLink. Batch Runner Button—Opens the Batch Runner dialog box to permit defining a batch process. With Batch Runner you can automate a user-selected group of operations to run on one or more instruments. Available only on software with batch runner enabled. See the ValveLink software Help screen, About ValveLink.

3.4.4

The ValveLink Status Bar A status bar at the bottom of the ValveLink window provides important information as you work with the application. See figure 3-34.

3.5

ValveLink

Help

3.5.1

Using the On-line Help Resource ValveLink software provides a comprehensive on-line help resource that includes a full-text search function, a graphical help browser, and a glossary. You can access unique help topics from specific areas within the ValveLink software by clicking the Help button or you can open Help by clicking the Help menu title in the menu bar at the top of the ValveLink window.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

3-55

Installation and Use

Control Mode Analog (RSP) Digital Configuration Changed

Test

ValveLink communicating with instrument when flashing

Instrument Mode

Instrument Tag

Not connected Reference only

D Instrument, Network List, and Database key data match D Instrument communication ok

Communication Protocol

HART FOUNDATION fieldbus

Figure 3-34. Status Bar Information

Note Click green, underlined text in Help to make a hypertext jump to an associated help topic. The ValveLink on-line help resource displays individual help topics in a special window that appears over ValveLink when you request help. Within a topic, you may find a word or phrase displayed in green, underlined text. Click the green text for more information.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-56

Installation and Use

When you click the Help menu title, a pull-down menu appears. Select from the following four functions: ContentsSelect Contents from the pull-down menu to display the help resource table of contents. Contents is a good starting point for a tour of ValveLink software help topics. Use the scroll bar at the right edge of the Help window to view the entire Contents topic. Click the green underlined text to view more information. Search For Help OnSelect this pull-down menu item and the Help keyword search function appears. The ValveLink on-line help resource allows you to search all topics using specified key words. Help also allows you to search the text of all Help topics using a function called Find-Plus. Find-Plus is described below. Using HelpWhen you select Using Help, the Windows operating system that is running ValveLink displays a simple help resource describing basic functions such as navigating from topic to topic in Help. Review the information in this help resource if you are not familiar with using Help in a Windows program. About ValveLinkSelect this pull-down menu item to display a unique window containing a description of your ValveLink software. This window lists available features, the software version number, and registration information.

3.5.2

The Help Window: Search, Navigation, and other Help Functions When you access the ValveLink on-line help resource, the Help window appears over the ValveLink program window. At the top of the Help window are menu titles and function buttons that allow you to control Help functions such as searching, browsing, and printing. From the menu bar you can also select: File—to print information on a help topic and to exit Help Edit—to copy selected text to the clipboard and to add your own notes to a help topic Bookmark—to create bookmarks for specific help topics. Once a list of bookmarks is created, you can click on a bookmark to go directly to a specific help topic.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Installation and Use

3-57

Help — to get additional information about using Help, to have the Help screen always on top, and to get information about Windows and your system. Below the menu bar are the Help function buttons. The function buttons allow you to quickly access important Help functions while you are reading information in Help topics. ContentsClick Contents to return to the Contents topic from anywhere in Help. SearchClick Search to open the keyword search dialog box. In the Search dialog box, you can search for specific help topics using keywords that have been assigned to each topic. BackUse the Back button to return to Help topics that you previously displayed. With the Back button, you can retrace the path that you have taken through the on-line help resource. HistoryClick History to view a complete, sequential list of every help topic you have viewed while using Help. << (Browse Button)The on-line help resource features related topics that can be sequentially browsed while in Help. Click this button to return to the previous topic in a specified series of related topics. When you reach the first topic in a series, this button turns gray. >> (Browse Button)Click this button to display the next topic in a specified series of related topics. When you reach the last topic in a series, this button turns gray. GlossaryClick the Glossary button to display a glossary of terms related to ValveLink software. If you seek a brief explanation of a term or function, begin by clicking the appropriate letter button at the top of the Glossary window. Then, scroll the list of words and phrases until you find the word you are seeking. Click the green, underlined text to display the explanation. HyperviewClick the Hyperview button to display a graphical listing of all Help topics. The first time you use the Hyperview button, the software must create a topic database. Creating the database July 2000

VL2000 Series

3-58

Installation and Use

takes a few seconds and when this process is completed, the graphical listing appears in a new window on the left side of the screen. Click on a topic and the topic will be displayed in the Help window on the right side of the screen. Print one Help topic, a series of topics, or all Help topics by clicking in the graphical listing to check topics for printing. Then, click the File menu title in the Hyperview window and highlight Print. Find-Plus鵃低lick the Find-Plus button to open a full-text search of all Help topics. Enter a word or phrase and click the Find button. A list of all Help topics containing the word or phrase will be displayed.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

4-1

Customizing ValveLink

Customizing ValveLink4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10

4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3

4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4

4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2

July 2000

Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Communication Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 HART Modem Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Multiplexer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Network Alert Scan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Config Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Diagnostics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Monitors Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Modbus Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Audit Log Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Units Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Security Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Adding a New Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Modifying a Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Deleting a Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

User Names and Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Adding a User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a User’s Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13 4-15 4-16 4-16

Tag Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Adding and Changing Tag Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Adding and Changing Group Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

VL2000 Series

4-2

Customizing ValveLink

Figure 4-1. Preferences Window Communication Page

4.1

Setting

Preferences

To set preferences log in as a user with the Application Setup privilege. From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink& Preferences. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the OK button to save your changes. Click OK to close the confirmation message.

4.1.1

Communication Page ValveLink software communicates with instruments through a HART modem, HART multiplexers, or a FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 segment. To select the method of communication, open the Preferences window and select the Communication page, shown in figure 4-1, by clicking on the Communication tab. Click the HART modem option button if communicating via a HART modem. Click the HART multiplexer option button if communicating over a HART multiplexer network. For communication with HART instruments, click the appropriate COM check box to select the serial port (COM port) to which the

VL2000 Series

July 2000

4-3

Customizing ValveLink

Figure 4-2. Preferences Window, HART Modem Page

HART modem or an RS232-to-RS485 converter (for multiplexer networks) is attached. For multiplexer communication, up to two serial ports may be selected to permit the computer to communicate on up to two multiplexer networks. If you are communicating with FIELDVUE instruments over a HART multiplexer network, also click the appropriate options button to select the communications baud rate. If FOUNDATION fieldbus communications is available with the ValveLink installation, you will see a check in the Enable fieldbus Communications checkbox. You may disable fieldbus communication by clicking the checkbox to remove the check. The ValveLink fieldbus Address may be changed. Select an address that is available for the intended H1 segment.

4.1.2

HART Modem Page ValveLink software supports both point-to-point and multidrop operation. You can set the highest device address to scan for. You also can establish whether the ValveLink software functions as the primary master or the secondary master. To set these values, open the Preferences window and select the HART Modem page, shown in figure 4-2, by clicking on the HART Modem tab. For the Highest Device Address to Scan For, enter a value (0 to 15) corresponding to the highest device address. If the instruments are connected as point-to-point, set this value to 0. If the instruments are

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-4

Customizing ValveLink

connected in a multidrop configuration, set this value to the highest polling address configured in the instruments. If the ValveLink software is configured for multidrop and is connected to a point-to-point instrument, the ValveLink software will treat the situation as a multidrop loop with one device at address 0. Specify whether the modem is a primary master or secondary master by clicking on the appropriate option button. Typically a primary master is a communicating device permanently connected to the field wiring, such as a HART-capable control system. In contrast, a secondary master is often not permanently connected to field wiring. ValveLink software used with a HART modem typically communicates as a secondary master. HART protocol provides for up to two master communicating devices, one designated as the primary master and the other as the secondary master. Typically a primary master is a communicating device, such as a HART-capable control system, permanently connected to the field wiring. In contrast, a secondary master is often not permanently connected to the field wiring. A hand-held communicator or a HART modem communicating with a computer running ValveLink software typically communicates as a secondary master.

Note If one type of master takes a FIELDVUE instrument Out Of Service, the same type must put it In Service. For example, if ValveLink software setup as a primary master takes a FIELDVUE instrument Out Of Service, ValveLink software setup as a primary master must be used to place it back In Service.

4.1.3

Multiplexer Page ValveLink software can support up to 32 multiplexers on each network. If you have fewer multiplexers wired to the network, however,

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Customizing ValveLink

4-5

you can tell the ValveLink software to scan for a lesser number of multiplexer addresses when doing a network scan. You also can establish whether the ValveLink software functions as the primary master or the secondary master. To set these values, open the Preferences window and select the Multiplexer page by clicking on the Multiplexer tab. Enter a value (0 to 31) corresponding to the highest multiplexer address. The multiplexer address is determined by the settings of the address switches on the HART multiplexer. Refer to the appropriate multiplexer instruction manual for instructions on setting multiplexer addresses. Specify whether the multiplexer should communicate as a primary master or secondary master by clicking the appropriate option button. HART protocol provides for up to two master communicating devices, one designated as the primary master and the other as the secondary master. Typically a primary master is a communicating device, such as a HART-capable control system, permanently connected to the field wiring. In contrast, a secondary master is often not permanently connected to the field wiring. A hand-held communicator or a HART modem communicating with a computer running ValveLink software typically communicates as a secondary master. A multiplexer communicating with a computer running ValveLink software can be either a primary or secondary master. If the multiplexer is used in conjunction with a HART-capable control system, select secondary master. If the control system is not capable of communicating via HART, select primary master.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-6

Customizing ValveLink

4.1.4

Network Alert Scan Page If the ValveLink software is communicating over a HART multiplexer network, you can run Network Alert Scan to scan the instruments on the network for current alert conditions. For information on setting up an alert scan and scanning for alerts, see section 6.2.2. To set alert options, open the Preferences window and select the Network Alert Scan page by clicking on the Network Alert Scan tab. The Network Alert Scan page is shown in figure 4-3. Audible Alerts—Check this box if you wish to have ValveLink software notify you with an audible tone and system messages when alerts occur. Acknowledge Alerts—Check this box if you wish to have acknowledgment messages appear on your screen when an alert is detected while running the Network Alert Scan. Maximum Alert Events—Enter the maximum number of alert events to be stored in the Alert Log. Valid entries are a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 1,000. Pause Interval in seconds—Enter the amount of time, in seconds, to pause between scans for alerts. Valid entries are a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 99 seconds. Clear Alert Log upon leaving Preferences—Check this box if you wish the alert log to be cleared when you close the Preferences window.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

4-7

Customizing ValveLink

Figure 4-3. ValveLink Preferences Network Alert Scan Page

4.1.5

Config Page The Cycle Counter and Travel Accumulator parameters are not downloaded when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters unless you set a system preference requesting it. To set a system preference to automatically download the Cycle Counter parameter when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters, open the Preferences window and select the Config page by clicking the Config page tab. Click the Download checkbox to place a check in it. See section 13 for information on changing the cycle counter and travel accumulator parameters.

4.1.6

Diagnostics Page To set the collection interval for diagnostic tests, open the Preferences window and select the Diagnostics page by clicking on the Diagnostics tab. Enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, between collecting data points for graphing while the ValveLink software polls for data during diagnostic tests. Lower values will cause more points to be gener-

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-8

Customizing ValveLink

ated. However, too low a value may cause communication errors to occur. A typical collection interval is 250 milliseconds.

Note For ValveLink software communicating via multiplexer, gaps may occur in the data from dynamic error band, drive signal, output signal, step response, and valve signature diagnostic tests if alert scanning is also running during the test. To avoid this problem, either stop alert scanning while running these diagnostic tests or select a collection interval greater than 350 milliseconds.

4.1.7

Monitors Page This function not used with ValveLink software version 4.0.

4.1.8

Modbus Page ValveLink software communicates with a Modbus master over the Modbus interface. The Modbus page, shown in figure 4-4, provides selections that allow you to: Select the Modbus Transmission Mode and Delayâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;ValveLink software supports both ASCII or RTU serial transmission modes. Select the transmission mode and Modbus parameters to match the settings in the Modbus master. You can also specify a delay in milliseconds between the time ValveLink software receives a request and the time the software begins to prepare a response. Identify the Communication Portâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;Identifies the communication port on your personal computer to which the null modem adapter or RS232-to-RS485 converter is attached. Set Modbus Parametersâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;Allows you to set up the Modbus parameters to match the settings in the Modbus master. These parameters include: baud rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

4-9

Customizing ValveLink

Figure 4-4. Preferences Window, Modbus Page

For detailed information on setting up a Modbus network and setting Modbus preferences, see section 6.

4.1.9

Audit Log Page The AuditLog is a separate program installed with the ValveLink group. This program maintains a log that records all the events that occur with ValveLink software. The log is a file VLINK.VLG in the same folder where the ValveLink files are installed. To conserve disk space, the size of the log file is limited. When ValveLink is installed the file is limited to 100 kilobytes, however you may change the file size. To specify the size of the log, open the Preferences window and select the Audit Log page by clicking on the Audit Log tab. Enter a value for the size of the log. Valid entries include 10 to 100 Kbytes. To calculate file size, use the following approximation: 55 bytes per event. Thus, a 100 Kbyte file should hold about 1,818 events. When the file reaches the specified size, ValveLink renames the current audit log file with a name corresponding to the current date (for example, if the day is July 12, 2000, the audit log file will be renamed VL120700.VLG) and creates a new VLINK.VLG file. For detailed information on viewing the audit log, see section 9.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-10

4.1.10

Customizing ValveLink

Units Page To select the units of measure, open the Preferences window and select the Units page by clicking on the Units tab. To select a desired unit of measure, click on the appropriate options button. You can select units of measure from any of the three systems displayed. Not all units need be from the same system. For example, you can specify length in inches, pressure in bar, and torque in kgf meter.

4.2

Security

Groups4

The ValveLink software allows you to define security groups to which you can assign users. A user in a security group may perform only those privileges assigned to that group. There are two types of privileges: Instruments and System.

Note The ability to setup and run alert scans or a modbus interface does not require any privileges.

To open the Security Groups window, select Customize Valvelink from the menu bar. Select Security Groups from the drop-down menu. The software displays the Security Groups window shown in figure 4-5. From the Security Groups window you can add, modify and delete security groups. Assigning Instrument Privileges The Instruments privileges permit the user to directly affect the instrument. Depending upon the privilege assigned to a security group, a user assigned to that group may: Change the Instrument Mode—This privilege permits the user to change an instrument’s mode. Run Diagnostics that Move the Valve—This privilege permits the user to modify certain values that control the operation of the VL2000 Series

July 2000

Customizing ValveLink

4-11

Figure 4-5. ValveLink Security Groups Window

instrument. The user can also start a diagnostics test, which will result in valve movement, to test the instrument’s or valve’s operation. The diagnostics test consists of setting the valve in motion and then displaying this data in the diagnostics display after completion. Calibrate Instruments—This privilege permits the user to calibrate the analog input current, travel, and pressure for a digital valve controller. Configure Instruments—This privilege permits the user to retrieve instrument configuration data from the database and poll data from the instrument. The user is also able to modify the data and save the modifications in the database or download the modifications to the instrument. Change an Instrument’s Protection—This privilege permits the user to change an instrument’s protection.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-12

Customizing ValveLink

Assigning System Privileges The system privileges permit the user to perform administrative functions on the personal computer. Depending upon the privilege assigned to a security group, a user assigned to that group may: Add, Delete, or Modify Database Tags—This privilege permits the user to add an instrument tag to the database, modify an instrument’s database tags, and remove an instrument tag from the database. User and System Administration—This privilege permits the user to define security groups; add, modify, and remove user names and passwords; and add, modify, and remove tag groups and selections. Application Setup—This privilege permits the user to set preferences and adjust the polling and information collection rate of the ValveLink software.

4.2.1

Adding a Security Group To add a new security group, open the Security Groups window. (From the menu bar select Setup, then select Security Groups.) Click the Add New Group button. In the New Security Group window, type a name for the new security group, then click the OK button. You can enter up to 20 characters. From the Privileges options on the right side of the Security Groups window, select the privileges that will be accessible to users assigned to this security group. When finished, click the OK button.

4.2.2

Modifying a Security Group To modify a security group, open the Security Groups window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Security Groups.) From the list in the Security Group list box, click on the security group you want to change to highlight it. Go to the Privileges options on the right side of the Security Groups window and select the privileges you want users assigned to the security group to access. When finished, click the OK button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

4-13

Customizing ValveLink

4.2.3

Deleting a Security Group Before deleting a security group, make sure the group does not have any user names assigned to it. If you delete a security group to which user names are assigned, those users will be able to access the ValveLink program but will not be authorized to perform any of the privileges controlled through security groups.

To delete a security group, open the Security Groups window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Security Groups.)

From the list in the Security Group box, click on the security group you want to delete to highlight it. Click the Delete Selected Group button. To delete the security group, click OK at the confirmation message.

4.3

User

Names

4.3.1

Adding a User Name

and

Passwords

To add a user name, open the Users window, shown in figure 4-6. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Users.) Click the Add New User button. In the New User window, type in a user name and password. Then type the password again to verify it. Click OK. The user name can contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters. The password can consist of between six and twenty alphanumeric characters. The software will reject any password entered with less than six alphanumeric characters. Valid characters for the user name and password include the letters A through Z, the numbers 0 through 9, and the following special characters: single quotation mark (‘), exclamation point (!), at sign (@), number sign (#), dollar sign ($), percent sign (%), caret (^), ampersand (&), asterisk (*), parenthesis (), hyphen (-), underscore (_), plus (+), equal sign (=), semicolon (;), colon (:), apostrophe (’), quotation marks (”), period (.), slash (/), backslash (\), less than and greater than (<>), brackets ([]), and question mark (?). July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-14

Customizing ValveLink

Note The software displays an error message when you save the user name to the database if you entered an unacceptable user name or password (too few characters). The message indicates the type of error so that you can easily correct it.

To assign the new user to a security group, from the User List box, click on the new user name to highlight it. Click the list box arrow to the right of the Security Group box to open a list of security group names. Click on a security group name. The new user is assigned to the selected security group.

Note Be sure a security group is highlighted (the default security group is none). If no security group is assigned, the user will have no privileges.

Once tag group selections are defined, Group 1 tag group selections can be used to restrict user access to tags in only the listed selections. Users that have been restricted to certain tag group selections will not be able to open a tag that does not belong to one of the selections. Also, the user will not be able to copy or modify a tag that does not belong to one of the selections. If no tag group selections are assigned, the user has access to all tags in the database. See subsection 4.4 for information on defining tag groups. To assign tag group selections to a user, from the User List box, click on a user name to highlight it. To assign tag group selections to the user, click on the desired selections in the Group 1 list box to highlight them. The list box is titled with the Group 1 name, if asVL2000 Series

July 2000

Customizing ValveLink

4-15

Figure 4-6 ValveLink Users Window

signed. For example, Plant Area appears as the Group 1 name in figure 4-6. Click the Add button to add the highlighted selections to the Access Restricted To list box. To remove tag group selections from a user, from the User List box, click on a user name to highlight it. In the Access Restricted To list, click on the names you want to remove to highlight them. Then click the Remove button to remove the names from the list. When finished, click the OK button to save changes to the database.

4.3.2

Changing a Userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Password To change a userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s password, open the Users window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Users.) From the User List, click on a user name to highlight it. Click the Change Password button. From the Change Password window, type a new password. The password can consist of between six and twenty alphanumeric characters. In the Verify Password field, type the same new password again. Click Save.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-16

Customizing ValveLink

When finished, click the OK button to save changes to the database.

Note The software displays an error message when you save the password if you entered an unacceptable password (too few characters). The message indicates the type of error so that you can easily correct it.

4.3.3

Changing a Userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Security Group To change a userâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s security group, open the Users window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Users.) From the User List, click on a user name to highlight it. Click the list box arrow to the right of the Security Group box to open a list of security group names. Click on a security group name. The user is assigned to the selected security group. When finished, click the OK button to save changes to the database.

4.3.4

Deleting a User Name To delete a user name from the database, open the Users window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Users.) From the User List, click on the user name you want to delete to highlight it. Click the Delete User button. At the system message, click OK to confirm you want to delete the user name. When finished, click the Save button.

4.4

Tag

Groups

Groups categorize tags, allowing you to sort and filter data when searching the ValveLink database for specific tags. You can establish up to four groups. Example groups might include Plant Area, VL2000 Series

July 2000

4-17

Customizing ValveLink

Figure 4-7. Tag Group Names Window

Fluid, Manufacturer, or Critical Loops, or any names meaningful in your facility. You can also establish selections which further define each group. You assign individual tags to specific group selections when creating and modifying tags. For more information on working with tags, see section 7.

Note The selections in the Group 1 Tag Group appear as folders in the ValveLink database in the Explorer View. See section 7.2.2.2 for assigning a Tag to a Tag Group selection.

4.4.1

Adding and Changing Tag Groups To add a tag group, open the Tag Group Names window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Tag Group Names.) Figure 4-7 shows the Tag Group Names window. Type a group name in any of the Group boxes. To replace an existing name

July 2000

VL2000 Series

4-18

Customizing ValveLink

Figure 4-8. Tag Group Selection Window

with a new group name, select it and type over it. When finished, click OK.

4.4.2

Adding and Changing Group Selections To add or change a group selection, open the Tag Group Selections window, shown in figure 4-8. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Tag Group Selections.) Click the From the Group list box, click on a group name to highlight it. To add a new selection to the group, type its name in the New Selection box then click the Add to Group button. To remove a selection, select it from the Selections in Group box and click the Remove from Group button. When finished, click the OK button. To cause your changes to take effect, exit ValveLink then restart the application.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-1

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections55 5.1

Connecting to HART Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.1.1 HART Master Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.1.2 Connecting with a HART Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.1.2.1 Attaching the Modem to the Computer Serial Port . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.1.2.2 Attaching the Modem to the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5.1.2.3 Selecting HART Modem Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5.1.2.4 Specifying the Highest Device Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 5.1.2.5 Verifying Instrument Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.1.2.6 Modifying the Database Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5.1.2.7 Matching Instruments with Database Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 5.1.2.7.1 Transferring Data Between an Instrument and a Database Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 5.1.2.7.2 If You Canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Transfer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 5.1.3 Connecting to Instruments on a HART Multiplexer Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 5.1.3.1 Setting up a HART Multiplexer Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 5.1.3.2 Selecting HART Multiplexer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 5.1.3.3 Specifying the Highest Multiplexer Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 5.1.3.4 Scanning a Multiplexer Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 5.1.3.4.1 Checking Current Status Against the Network Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 5.1.3.5 Modifying the Database Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 5.1.3.6 Matching Instruments with Database Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 5.1.3.6.1 Transferring Data Between an Instrument and a Database Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 5.1.3.7 If You Canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Transfer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 5.2 5.2.1 July 2000

Connecting to FOUNDATION Fieldbus Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Making Physical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 VL2000 Series

5-2

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5.2.2

VL2000 Series

Using ValveLink Software with FOUNDATION Fieldbus Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

July 2000

5-3

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5.1

Connecting

5.1.1

HART Master Device

HART

Instruments

HART protocol provides for up to two master communicating devices, one designated as the primary master and the other as the secondary master. Typically a primary master is a communicating device, such as a HART-capable control system, permanently wired to a field instrument. In contrast, a secondary master is often not permanently wired to a field instrument. A hand-held communicator or a HART modem communicating with a computer running ValveLink software typically communicates as a secondary master. A multiplexer communicating with a computer running ValveLink software can be either a primary or secondary master. If the multiplexer is used in conjunction with a HART-capable control system, select secondary master. If the control system is not capable of communicating via HART, select primary master.

5.1.2

Connecting with a HART Modem ValveLink software can communicate with DVC5000 Series FIELDVUE Instruments using a HART modem. Figure 5-1 shows one example of how you could connect your personal computer to an instrument for communication. You can connect the HART modem directly to the instrument, or to the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s signal wiring anywhere between the instrument and the control room. Once your personal computer is physically connected to the instrument or the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s signal wiring through the HART modem, you can start communicating with the ValveLink software.

5.1.2.1

Attaching the Modem to the Computer Serial Port You attach the D-shell connector of the HART modem to an unused serial or communications port on the back of your computer. Complete the following steps to attach the HART modem: Step 1:

July 2000

Locate an unused serial or communications port on the back of your computer. VL2000 Series

5-4

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

HART Modem

Personal Computer With Valvelink VL2000 Series Software Control System Output Terminals

Field Devices

HF200 Series HART Filters

Figure 5-1. ValveLink VL2000 Series Software Communication with HART Modem.

If you have already installed and setup the ValveLink software, connect the modem to the port specified on the Communication page in the Preferences window (see subsection 3.1.2, Step 11). If you have not already setup your ValveLink software, make note of the port where you attach the HART modem so that you can designate the correct port in subsection 5.1.2.3. Step 2:

VL2000 Series

Attach the HART modem directly to the serial port on the computer or to a cable connected to the serial port. July 2000

5-5

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5.1.2.2

Attaching the Modem to the Instrument Connect the HART modem to a field instrument or to the field instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s signal wiring using the modem cable assembly. Clip the cable to the instrument or its field wiring as shown in figure 5-2. Connect to PC Serial Port

Modem

E0350 / IL

Figure 5-2. Attaching the HART Modem to a FIELDVUE Instrument.

Complete the following steps to connect the modem: Step 1:

Locate the signal wires or the terminals of the instrument with which you want to communicate.

Step 2:

Clip the cable assembly to the wires or the terminals.

Once you have both ends of the modem attached correctly to the computer and the instrument, you can begin communicating using the modem.

5.1.2.3

Selecting HART Modem Communication To select HART modem communication, open the Preferences window. (From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink & Preferences.) The Communication page, shown in figure 5-3, should be displayed. If not, click on the Communication tab to display the page.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-6

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-3. Preferences Window, Communication Page

Click the HART modem option button. Click the appropriate COM check box to select the serial port (COM port) to which the modem is attached.

5.1.2.4

Specifying the Highest Device Address To specify the highest device address to scan for, open the Preferences window. From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink & Preferences. If the HART Modem page, shown in figure 5-4, is not displayed, click on the HART Modem tab to display the page. Enter a value (0 to 15) corresponding to the highest device address. If the instruments are connected as point-to-point, set this value to 0. If the instruments are connected in a multidrop configuration, set this value to the highest polling address configured in the instruments. Specify whether the modem is a primary master or secondary master by clicking on the appropriate option button. See section 5.1 for description of primary and secondary HART master devices. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the OK button to save your changes. Click OK to close the confirmation message.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-7

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-4. Preferences Window, HART Modem Page

Note To cause your changes to take effect, you must exit the software and then restart.

5.1.2.5

Verifying Instrument Connections When the ValveLink software starts up, it displays the window shown in Figure 5-5. The instruments connected to the ValveLink computer are shown in the explorer view (the left pane of the window). If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t see the instrument, right click the modem symbol and select Scan for New. Double click the instrument symbol to open the tag.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-8

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Modem Symbol Instrument Symbol

Figure 5-5. ValveLink Window, No Tags Open

5.1.2.6

Modifying the Database Tag To communicate with an instrument in the field, a tag for the instrument must exist in the ValveLink database. ValveLink software first looks for a database tag that contains key data, such as the HART tag, descriptor, valve serial number, and address, that matches key data stored in the instrument. If no database tag is found, ValveLink software creates one automatically. If a HART tag exists in the instrument, the software creates a database tag that has the same tag (name) as the HART tag. If no HART tag exists in the instrument, ValveLink software creates a database tag as follows. For the first instrument the database tag is FIELDVUE_0001; for a second instrument without a HART tag, the database tag is FIELDVUE_0002, etc. If the tag created by the ValveLink software is not suitable for the instrument application, you can easily modify it. Refer to figure 5-6. Double click the database cabinet symbol, then double click the folder to open it and see a list of database tags. Right click on the tag you want to modify and select Modify Tag from the drop-down menu. Change the tag so that it better fits the application, as shown in figure 5-7. Click the Save Tag button to save the new tag. For more information on modifying tags, see section 7.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5-9

Double click cabinet to see a list of database tags

Figure 5-6. Selecting a Tag to Modify

5.1.2.7

Matching Instruments with Database Tags If a tag is established in the database and you replace the instrument associated with that tag, the key data in the instrument may no longer match the key data in the tag. Running Query And Match from the Network menu allows you to quickly resolve discrepancies in key data between field instruments and database tags. Once all key data match, ValveLink software displays the database tag for the instrument. To run Query And Match, select Network from the menu bar. Select Query And Match from the Network menu. The Query And Match screen is shown in figure 5-8. The Query And Match window displays two list boxes. The list box on the left contains field devices currently available whose key data does not match any database tags. The list box on the right contains database tags whose key data does not match any field devices.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-10

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Change Tag, up to 32 Characters.

Figure 5-7. Example, ValveLink Modify Tag Window

When you select an instrument from the field devices list box, the software displays the key data polled from the instrument. Once you have an instrument selected, you can click on the suggested match button and the software will try to find a database tag with a HART tag that matches that of the instrument. If a match is found, the software highlights the tag in the database tags list box and displays key data in the database for that tag. If a match cannot be found, then a message prompts you to manually find a matching entry. To manually search for a tag, use the scroll arrows to see a list of tags not matched to field instruments. When you find a tag, click on it to display its data. If you cannot find a database tag for the instrument, click the New Tag button to create a new database tag.

5.1.2.7.1

Transferring Data Between an Instrument and a Database Tag From the Query and Match window, both the Field Devices and Database Tags boxes list key data associated with the currently se-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5-11

Figure 5-8. ValveLink software Query and Match Screen

lected instrument and tag. Before transferring data, verify you have selected the appropriate instrument in the Field Devices box and the appropriate database tag in the Database Tags box. If transfer arrows are dim rather than black, you may need to change the Instrument Mode or the Instrument Protection. See section 13. When you are satisfied matching tags have been selected you can use the transfer arrows to transfer data from the instrument to the database tag or vice versa. However, an arrow that is dimmed indicates you cannot transfer data in that direction. Click the right pointing arrow next to the value you want to transfer, to transfer data from the instrument to the database. Click the left pointing arrow next to the value you want to transfer, to transfer data from the database to the instrument. To transfer all values from an instrument to the database tag, click the right pointing Transfer All Values arrow near the bottom of the Query And Match window. See figure 5-9. To transfer all values from a database tag to an instrument, click the left pointing Transfer All Values arrow near the bottom of the Query And Match window. July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-12

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-9. Transferring Data between An Instrument and the ValveLink Database

5.1.2.7.2

If You Canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Transfer Data If Transfer arrows are dim rather than black, you cannot transfer data. If you canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t transfer data: Check instrument mode and protection. Talk to your system administrator for security authorization.

5.1.3

Connecting to Instruments on a HART Multiplexer Network Some installed configurations of ValveLink software can communicate with DVC5000 Series FIELDVUE Instruments over an RS485 network using HART multiplexers. VL2000 Series ValveLink software with multiplexer capability can support up to 32 multiplexers per network and up to two networks. To determine if your software has multiplexer capability, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink. For details about wiring and connecting equipment, refer to the appropriate instruction manuals. To troubleshoot the network and its connections, you can scan for multiplexers and instruments, scan for alerts, and resolve discrepancies between data stored in field devices and data stored in the ValveLink database. For more information on working with networks, see section 6. Figure 5-10 shows an example network using ValveLink software and a Fisher-Rosemount Type 2530H1 HART interchange multiplexer.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-13

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

RS485 Network Up to 31 more Multiplexers Personal Computer With Valvelink VL2000 Series Software

Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer

HART Communication Wire Pair

Control System Output Terminals

Field Devices

HF200 Series HART Filters

Figure 5-10. ValveLink VL2000 Series Software Network Communication

5.1.3.1

Setting Up a HART Multiplexer Network ValveLink software uses a RS485 network to communicate with DVC5000 Series FIELDVUE instruments through HART multiplexers. An RS232-to-RS485 converter is required to connect the serial port on the computer (this port uses the RS232 protocol) to the RS485 network.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-14

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Depending upon the multiplexer, the ValveLink software can support up to 256 individual loop channels per multiplexer. You can connect one instrument to each loop channel. See table 5-1 to determine the number of multiplexers and instruments that may be connected to a network. Table 5-1. Maximum Number of Multiplexers and HART Devices per Network Multiplexer Type Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer ELCON HIS1700 Multiplexer MTL4841 Communications Module Pepperl & Fuchs

Maximum Number of Multiplexers per Network

Maximum Number of Loops per Multiplexer

32 31 31 32

32 32 256(1) 255

1. Each MTL4841 module receives digital data from a maximum of 16 MTL4842 HART Interface Modules. In turn, each MTL4842 module accesses data from a maximum of 16 HART devices.

The following procedure briefly describes how to set up a multiplexer network. The subsections that follow provide more detail about setting preferences. To add a multiplexer network to the computer running ValveLink software: 1. Connect physical equipment. Set all multiplexers and the RS232-to-RS485 converter to the same baud rate. For details about wiring and connecting equipment, refer to the appropriate instruction manual. 2. Apply power to the instruments. 3. Apply power to the multiplexers. 4. Apply power to the RS232-to-RS485 converter. 5. Start the ValveLink application. Log on with an account that will allow you to set preferences. 6. From the Customize ValveLink menu, select Preferences. 7. On the Comm Ports page: a. Click the HART Multiplexer option button. b. Select the communication port (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4) on your personal computer to which the RS232-to-RS485 converter is connected. c. Select an appropriate baud rate that matches the baud rate of the RS232-to-RS485 converter and multiplexers attached to the communication port. VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-15

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Right click the Comm Port symbol to see the drop-down menu

Figure 5-11. Scanning for New Multiplexers and Instruments On a Network

8. On the Multiplexers page: a. Verify that the highest multiplexer address to scan for includes the addresses of all multiplexers on the network. b. Select whether the multiplexers should function as primary or secondary communicating devices for the instruments attached through the network. 9. Click the OK button then exit the program and restart to cause changes to take effect. 10. Refer to figure 5-11. After restarting the program, right click the Comm Port icon in the left pane of the window. 11. From the drop-down menu select Scan for New. Watch the messages as ValveLink scans the network. You should see the network being scanned. If the software does not recognize and scan the network, check physical connections, baud rates, and communication port, then try again. July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-16

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Instrument Recognized by ValveLink software. No HART tag in instrument.

Figure 5-12. New Instrument Found, No HART Tag in Instrument

12. Verify that the software recognizes the multiplexers and instruments. You should see a symbol in the left pane of the window for each multiplexer connected to the network. Beneath each multiplexer symbol you should also see a symbol for each instrument connected to the multiplexer. See figure 5-12. If the software does not recognize multiplexers during the scan, check physical connections and baud rates and try again.

5.1.3.2

Selecting HART Multiplexer Communication To select HART multiplexer communication, open the Preferences window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink& Preferences.) The Communication page, shown in figure 5-3 should be displayed. If not, click on the Communication tab to display the page. Click the appropriate option button to select HART multiplexer communication. Check the appropriate box to select a comm port. Click the appropriate options button to select the communications baud rate. For multi-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-17

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

plexer communication, up to two serial ports may be selected to permit the computer to communicate on up to two multiplexer networks.

Note To cause your changes to take effect, you must exit the software and then restart.

5.1.3.3

Specifying the Highest Multiplexer Address To specify the highest multiplexer address for which you wish to scan, open the Preferences window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink& Preferences.) If the Multiplexer page is not displayed, click on the Multiplexers tab to display the page. Enter a value (0 to 31) corresponding to the highest multiplexer address. The multiplexer address is determined by the settings of the address switches on the HART multiplexer. Refer to the appropriate multiplexer instruction manual for instructions on setting multiplexer addresses. Specify whether the multiplexer should communicate as a primary master or secondary master by clicking the appropriate option button. See section 5.1. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the OK button to save your changes. Click OK to close the confirmation message.

Note To cause your changes to take effect, you must exit the software and then restart.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-18

5.1.3.4

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Scanning a Multiplexer Network The Explorer view (left pane of the window), shown in figure 5-12, shows all the multiplexers and instruments connected to the multiplexer network. You can check to see which multiplexers and instruments are communicating with the ValveLink software. If you have made changes to the network, such as changing multiplexer or instrument addresses, you can rebuild the network, or you can scan for any new multiplexers and instruments added to the network since the last network scan. You may perform a network scan at any time. You may want to perform a scan to update the view or because you added an instrument to the network. If you add or remove a multiplexer, change a multiplexer address or change the loop wiring, you may wish to rebuild the network display. To rebuild the display, right click the Comm Port symbol and select Rebuild Network from the drop-down menu. The software scans the network for all multiplexer addresses and loops. After completing the scan, the network display is rebuilt using the new information gathered from the scan. You can scan for new multiplexers and instruments added since the last time the network was scanned. To scan the network for new instruments or multiplexers, right click the Comm Port symbol and select Scan for New from the drop-down menu. The ValveLink software scans the network for previously unused multiplexer addresses and loops. After completing the scan, any new multiplexers and instruments recognized by the software are added to the display.

Maintenance Tip Depending on the size of your network, Rebuild Network can require a significant amount of time. Consider running Rebuild Network during off hours, or, if scanning for new instruments, click Scan For New.

You also can just scan a multiplexer for new instruments. To scan a multiplexer, right click the multiplexer symbol for the multiplexer to VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-19

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Instrument not communicating on the network

Figure 5-13. Network Display Showing an Instrument That is Not Communicating

which you have added instruments. From the drop-down menu, select Reset and Re-scan Mux. The ValveLink software commands the multiplexer to reset and scans the multiplexer for previously unused loops. After completing the scan, any new instruments recognized by the software are added to the display.

5.1.3.4.1

Checking Current Status Against the Network Display If you want to verify that multiplexers and instruments are communicating on the network, right click the Comm Port symbol then select Check Network from the drop-down menu. If the device is communicating, a symbol appears with the associated tag for the multiplexer or instrument. If the device is not communicating, a appears over the device symbol as shown in figure 5-13. Check Network checks only the multiplexers and instruments shown on the most recent network display. Check Network does not rebuild the network display and does not recognize any new instruments or multiplexers added to the network.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-20

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Double Click cabinet to see a list of database tags

Figure 5-14. Selecting a Tag to Modify

5.1.3.5

Modifying the Database Tag To communicate with an instrument in the field, a tag for the instrument must exist in the ValveLink database. ValveLink software first looks for a database tag that contains key data, such as the HART tag, descriptor, valve serial number, and address, that matches key data stored in the instrument. If no database tag is found, ValveLink software creates one automatically. If a HART tag exists in the instrument, the software creates a database tag that has the same tag (name) as the HART tag. If no HART tag exists in the instrument, ValveLink software creates a database tag as follows. For the first instrument the database tag is FIELDVUE_0001; for a second instrument without a HART tag, the database tag is FIELDVUE_0002, etc. If the tag created by the ValveLink software is not suitable for the instrument application, you can easily modify it. Refer to figure 5-14. Double click the database cabinet symbol, then double click the folder to open it and see a list of database tags. Right click on the tag

VL2000 Series

July 2000

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5-21

Change Tag, up to 32 Characters.

Figure 5-15. Example ValveLink Modify Tag Window

you want to modify and select Modify Tag from the drop-down menu. Change the tag so that it better fits the application, as shown in figure 5-15. Click the Save Tag button to save the new tag. For more information on modifying tags, see section 7.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-22

5.1.3.6

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Matching Instruments with Database Tags

Note Two or more tags in the database may have the same key data, such as the HART tag, descriptor, valve serial number, and address. When you attempt to open one of these tags, ValveLink software displays a dialog box listing all the database tags with identical key data. To open a tag, click on the desired tag to highlight it, then click the Open button.

If a tag is established in the database and you replace the instrument associated with that tag, the key data in the instrument may no longer match the key data in the tag. Running Query And Match from the Network menu allows you to quickly resolve discrepancies in key data between field instruments and database tags. Once all key data match, ValveLink software displays the database tag for the instrument. To run Query And Match, select Network from the menu bar. Select Query And Match from the Network menu. The Query And Match screen is shown in figure 5-16. The Query And Match window displays two list boxes. The list box on the left contains field devices currently available on the network whose key data does not match any database tags The list box on the right contains database tags whose key data does not match any field devices. When you select an instrument from the field devices list box, the software displays the key data polled from the instrument. Once you have an instrument selected, you can click on the Suggested Match button and the software will try to find a database tag with a HART tag that matches that of the instrument. If a match is found, the software highlights the tag in the database tags list box and displays key data in the database for that tag. If a match cannot be found, then a message prompts you to manually find a matching VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-23

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-16. ValveLink software Query And Match Screen

entry. To manually search for a tag, use the scroll arrows to see a list of tags not matched to field instruments. When you find a tag, click on it to display its data. If you cannot find a database tag for the instrument, click the New Tag button to create a new database tag.

5.1.3.6.1

Transferring Data Between an Instrument and a Database Tag From the Query And Match window, both the Field Devices and Database Tags boxes list key data associated with the currently selected instrument and tag. Before transferring data, verify you have selected the appropriate instrument in the Field Devices box and the appropriate database tag in the Database Tags box. If transfer arrows are dim rather than black, you may need to change the Instrument Mode or the Instrument Protection. See section 13. When you are satisfied matching tags have been selected, you can use the transfer arrows to transfer data from the instrument to the database tag or vice versa. However, an arrow that is dimmed indicates you cannot transfer data in that direction. Click the right pointing arrow next to the value you want to transfer, to trans-

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-24

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-17. Transferring Data between An Instrument and the ValveLink Database

fer data from the instrument to the database. Click the left pointing arrow next to the value you want to transfer, to transfer data from the database to the instrument. To transfer all values from an instrument to the database tag, click the right pointing Transfer All Values arrow near the bottom of the Query And Match window. See figure 5-17. To transfer all values from a database tag to an instrument, click the left pointing Transfer All Values arrow near the bottom of the Query And Match window.

5.1.3.7

If You Can’t Transfer Data If Transfer arrows are dim rather than black, you cannot transfer data. If you can’t transfer data: Check Instrument mode and protection. Talk to your system administrator for security authorization.

5.2

Connecting Instruments

FOUNDATION

Fieldbus

FOUNDATION fieldbus is an all digital, serial, two–way communication protocol that interconnects devices such as digital valve controllers, transmitters, discrete devices, and process controllers. It is a local area network (LAN) for instruments that enables basic control and I/O to be moved to the field devices. The DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers use the FOUNDATION fieldbus technology develVL2000 Series

July 2000

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5-25

CONNECTION MARKED PORT 1

CONNECT TO FIELDBUS H1 SEGMENT OR DVC5000f SERIES INSTRUMENT

CONNECTION MARKED PORT 2

THIS CONNECTION NOT USED BY VALVELINK SOFTWARE

Figure 5-18 Computer Running ValveLink Software with Dual-Port NI-FBUS

oped and supported by Fisher-Rosemount and the other members of the independent Fieldbus Foundation.

5.2.1

Making Physical Connections To have the ValveLink software communicate with the DVC5000f Series digital valve controller, ValveLink software requires that an NI-FBUS interface card be installed in the computer. Two types of interface cards are available: cards with a single-port fieldbus connection and cards with a dual-port fieldbus connection. If you have a single-port card (PCMCIA-FBUS) installed in your computer, make fieldbus connections to the single cable marked PORT 1. If you have a dual-port card (PCMCIA-FBUS/2) and you configured port0 for NIFBUS, as described in section 3.2, make connections to PORT 1 of the dual port cable, as shown in figure 5-18. You can connect to a DVC5000f instrument via an H1 segment or directly to an instrument not on a segment. Use either a 2-wire shielded cable with a 9-pin DSUB connector or a twisted shielded pair. For more information on

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-26

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

making connections to the PCMCIA-FBUS cable, see the appropriate National Instruments Getting Started manual. Connecting to an H1 Segment

WARNING To avoid personal injury or property damage due to loss of process control, do not connect the computer to an active H1 segment while the ValveLink or NIFBUS software is running. Doing so could interfere with Link Active Scheduler (LAS) operation.

For a cable with connector, connect pin 6 of the 9-pin DSUB connector to the segment positive (+) connection. Connect pin 7 to the segment negative (–) connection. Connect the cable shield to the H1 segment shield. To connect a twisted shielded pair cable, connect one wire of the twisted pair to the D+ screw terminal on the PCMCIA-FBUS cable PORT 1. Connect the other end of this same wire to the H1 segment positive (+) connection. Connect the second wire to the D– screw terminal on the PCMCIA-FBUS cable PORT 1. Connect the other end of this same wire to the H1 segment negative (–) connection. Connect the cable shield to the H1 segment shield. Connect the shield at one end only. Connecting to a Single DVC5000f Series Instrument Connecting to a single instrument requires a fieldbus power hub (Relcom part number FCS–PH, or equivalent). The power hub provides a power supply and double terminator. Up to four devices can be connected to the Relcom power hub. The computer with ValveLink software and NIFBUS interface card is considered as one device.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-27

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

FOUNDATION FIELDBUS POWER HUB 1 CONNECTION FOR A ANOTHER FIELDBUS DEVICE

–

COMPUTER WITH VALVELINK SOFTWARE AND NI-FBUS INTERFACE CARD

CONNECTION FOR A ANOTHER FIELDBUS DEVICE

DVC5000f SERIES DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER

POWER INDICATOR

NOTE 1 RELCOM PART NUMBER FCS-PH OR EQUIVALENT

9 TO 32 VDC POWER SUPPLY

Figure 5-19. Typical Connection to a Single DVC5000f Series Digital Valve Controller

Note If using a connection method other than the Relcom power hub, provide power using an approved fieldbus power conditioner in conjunction with a 24 volt dc power supply.

Figure 5-19 shows example power hub connections. To connect the computer: For a cable with connector, connect pin 6 of the 9-pin connector to a power hub positive (+) connection. Connect pin 7 to a power hub negative (–) connection. Connect the cable shield to the power hub shield (S) connection. To connect a twisted shielded pair cable, connect one wire of the twisted pair to the D+ screw terminal on the PCMCIA-FBUS cable PORT 1. Connect the other end of this same wire to the power hub positive (+) connection. Connect the second wire to the D– screw terminal on the PCMCIA-FBUS cable PORT 1. Connect the other end of this same wire to the power hub negative (–) connection. Use twisted pair shielded cable to connect the instrument to the power hub. Remove the instrument terminal box cover. Connect the July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-28

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-20. Click on the Windows Start menu, then Programs& ValveLink& ValveLink

instrument LOOP + terminal to the power hub positive (+) terminal. Connect the instrument LOOP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; terminal to the power hub negative (â&#x20AC;&#x201C;) terminal. Connect the shield to the power hub shield (S) terminal. For information on making connections to the digital valve controller, refer to the FIELDVUE DVC5000f Series Digital Valve Controller for FOUNDATION fieldbus Instruction Manual - Form 5445.

5.2.2

Using ValveLink Software With a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Intrument Before starting the ValveLink software, be sure NIFBUS is shutdown. The ValveLink software will not start if NIFBUS is running. When you start the ValveLink software, it will automatically start NIFBUS. 1. Start the ValveLink software.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5-29

Figure 5-22. ValveLink software NIâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;FBUS startup window

2. Log In.

Figure 5-21. ValveLink Log on.

3. ValveLink software starts NIFBUS. As NIFBUS initializes the startup window, shown in figure 5-22, appears. Do not stop the initializing process so that ValveLink software may start up successfully. 4. If you are not connected to a segment with an active Link Active Scheduler (LAS), the ValveLink Link Master Starting window, shown in figure 5-23, appears. Click OK to continue the initializing process. July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-30

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-23. ValveLink Link Master starting window

Note The Link Active Scheduler (LAS) controls traffic on the H1 segment. For an active H1 segment, the LAS function is provided by the host system or another FOUNDATION fieldbus device. When ValveLink software is connected (to either an active segment or a single instrument), the NI-FBUS interface card waits to see if the LAS is present. If not, the NI-FBUS interface card provides the LAS function. Therefore, to avoid conflict between the LAS function in the NI-FBUS interface card and LAS on the active segment, do not disconnect ValveLink software from a single instrument and connect it to an active segment without first shutting down the ValveLink software.

After the ValveLink Link Master Starting window disappears, the NIâ&#x20AC;&#x201C; FBUS startup window again appears temporarily to complete the initializing process. It states that it is initializing and running. VL2000 Series

July 2000

5-31

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-24. DVC5000f Series Instrument at a Temporary Address. Click Change Address to change the Device Tag and Address

5. After NI-FBUS completes start up, double click the instrument icon to open its tag.

Note If the instrument icon is crossed out, it may be because the instrument is at a temporary address. The ValveLink software will not connect to instruments at a temporary address.

If the instrument is at a temporary address, the Temporary Address window shown in figure 5-24 appears when you attempt to open the instrument tag. ValveLink software will not connect to an instrument with a temporary address. Click the Change Address button to change the device tag and address. On the Change Device Tag and Address window, shown in figure 5-25, enter a working address for the device. Address 35 is preferred. However, if you are connected to an H1 segment, address 35 may be in use by another device. If another device is at address 35, select an unused address between 21 and 35. Click Set Address July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-32

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

Figure 5-25. Changing the Device Address.

Figure 5-26. Reminder of Instrument Address Change.

then click the Change Address button to assign the new address. When the address changes, click the Done button. The instrument should be connected and you may proceed with instrument startup, calibration, and diagnostics. When you attempt to log out or exit the ValveLink software, if the instrument was at a temporary address when you started, the message shown in figure 5-26 appears. You may leave the instrument at the set address, or allow it to return to the temporary address. VL2000 Series

July 2000

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

5-33

Click Yes to keep the set address, or No to return to a temporary address.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

5-34

HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connections

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-1

Multiplexer Networks

Multiplexer Networks66 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.1.3 6.1.2 6.1.2.1

6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3

6.3 6.3.1 6.3.1.1 6.3.1.2 6.3.1.3 6.3.1.4 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.3.1 6.3.3.2 6.3.3.3 6.3.3.4 6.3.3.5 6.3.3.6 6.3.4 July 2000

Adding Multiplexers and Instruments to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Adding Multiplexers to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Viewing Multiplexer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Changing the Multiplexer Tag and Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Setting Up the Pepperl & Fuchs Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Adding Instruments to a Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Identifying Non-FIELDVUE Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Checking for Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Scanning for and Setting Up Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Tags and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Printing the Alert Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-11 6-11 6-12 6-13

Connecting and Communicating on a Modbus Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Modbus Protocol Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Support, Modbus Function Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Support, Modbus Function Code 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Support, Modbus Function Codes 3 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . Data Support, Modbus Function Code 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the Modbus Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up ValveLink to Communicate on the Modbus Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Transmission Mode and Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Modbus Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Slave Addresses to Database Tags . . . . . . . . . Selecting Packed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling Integers for a Function Code 4 Response . . . . . . Communicating on the Modbus Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-15 6-16 6-16 6-18 6-21 6-21 6-22 6-24 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-28 6-29 6-29

VL2000 Series

6-2

Multiplexer Networks

6.3.5

VL2000 Series

Verifying Modbus Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

July 2000

6-3

Multiplexer Networks

6.1

Adding the

Multiplexers Network

and

Instruments

ValveLink software can communicates with DVC5000 Series FIELDVUE Instruments through HART multiplexers over an RS485 network. See section 5 for information on setting up a HART multiplexer network. ValveLink software can support up to 2 networks with up to 32 multiplexers on each network. Depending upon the multiplexer, the ValveLink software can support up to 256 individual loop channels per multiplexer. You can connect one instrument to each loop channel. See table 6-1 to determine the number of multiplexers and instruments that may be connected to a network. Table 6-1. Maximum Number of Multiplexers and HART Devices per Network Multiplexer Type Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer ELCON HIS1700 Multiplexer MTL4841 Communications Module Pepperl & Fuchs Multiplexer

Maximum Number of Multiplexers per Network

Maximum Number of Loops per Multiplexer

32 31 31 32

32 32 256(1) 255

1. Each MTL4841 module receives digital data from a maximum of 16 MTL4842 HART Interface Modules. In turn, each MTL4842 module accesses data from a maximum of 16 HART devices.

6.1.1

Adding Multiplexers to the Network To add multiplexers to the network connected to the computer running ValveLink software: 1. Connect physical equipment. Set all multiplexers to the baud rate that matches the network baud rate. For details about wiring and connecting equipment, refer to the appropriate instruction manual. 2. Apply power to the instruments. 3. Apply power to the multiplexers. 4. Start the ValveLink application. Log on with an account that will allow you to set preferences. 5. From the Customize ValveLink & Preferences. If you cannot access Preferences, talk to your system administrator for security authorization.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-4

Multiplexer Networks

Right click the Comm Port symbol to see the drop-down menu

Figure 6-1. Scanning for New Multiplexers and Instruments Added to a Network

6. On the Multiplexers page: a. Verify that the highest multiplexer address to scan for includes the multiplexer address you just added. b. Select whether the multiplexer should function as the primary or secondary communicating device for the instruments attached through the network. If you change the value in the Highest Mux Address to Scan For field, save your entry, exit the program and restart. Then continue with the steps below. 7. Click the OK button then exit the program and restart to cause changes to take effect. 8. Refer to figure 6-1. After restarting the program, either doubleclick the Comm Port symbol or right click the Comm Port symbol and select Scan for New from the drop-down menu. VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-5

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-2. ValveLink Software Multiplexer Information Window

9. Verify that the software recognizes the new multiplexer. If the software does not recognize the new multiplexers during the scan, check physical connections and try again. If the new multiplexers have instruments attached, continue with subsection 6.1.2, Adding Instruments to a Multiplexer.

6.1.1.1

Viewing Multiplexer Status You can view the status and add a tag and descriptor to each multiplexer on the network. For a Pepperl and Fuchs multiplexer, you can also define which modules are included in the multiplexer. To see the status of a specific multiplexer, right click on the multiplexer symbol and select Mux Info from the drop-down menu. Figure 6-2 shows the Multiplexer Information window. The following define the fields on the Multiplexer Information window: Mux #—The multiplexer address, determined by the address switch settings on the multiplexer or communications module. Unique ID—The last six digits of a unique ID number assigned to the multiplexer by the manufacturer. Tag—A name assigned to the multiplexer from the Tag & Descriptor screen. Description—A description assigned to the multiplexer from the Tag & Descriptor screen.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-6

Multiplexer Networks

Manufacturer—The multiplexer manufacturer, Fisher-Rosemount, MTL, or P&F. Device Type—HART Interchange for a Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer, MTL4841 Communications Module for a MTL4840 HART Maintenance System, or KFD HART Multiplexer System for a Pepperl & Fuchs multiplexer. Univ. Command Rev.—The HART command language revision number, always 5 Instr. Command Rev.—The multiplexer or communications module firmware revision number. Scanning—Alert scanning. Should always be disabled when not viewing the Network Scan window. Scan Cmd—HART command level returned to the multiplexer or communications module by the instrument if an alert occurs. May be a 1 or a 3. Message—A message programmed into the multiplexer or communications module software. Gender—Whether the multiplexer or communications module is a primary master or secondary master. Loop Search—Currently the multiplexer or communications module only searches for single analog loops, those loops where the instrument polling address is 0. Gateway Device—HART signalling scheme. Always RS485 Bell 202 Software Rev.—Revision number of the software installed in the multiplexer or communications module. Hardware Rev.—Hardware revision level. Retry Count—Number of times multiplexer or communications module attempts to send a command to the instrument. Should be 2 after initialization. VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-7

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-3. Pepperl & Fuchs Module Setup Screen

6.1.1.2

Changing the Multiplexer Tag and Descriptor To change the multiplexer tag or descriptor click the Tag & Descriptor button on the Multiplexer Information display. Enter an up to 8 character tag and an up to 16 character descriptor. Valid characters for the user name and password include the letters A through Z, the numbers 0 through 9, and the following special characters: single quotation mark (‘), exclamation point (!), at sign (@), number sign (#), dollar sign ($), percent sign (%), caret (^), ampersand (&), asterisk (*), parenthesis (), hyphen (-), underscore (_), plus (+), equal sign (=), semicolon (;), colon (:), apostrophe (’), quotation marks (”), period (.), slash (/), backslash (\), less than and greater than (<>), brackets ([]), and question mark (?).

6.1.1.3

Setting Up the Pepperl & Fuchs Multiplexer When adding or removing a submodule from a Pepperl & Fuchs multiplexer you must reconfigure the multiplexer to indicate the changes. Multiplexer configuration changes are made from the Pepperl & Fuchs Module Setup screen shown in figure 6-3.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-8

Multiplexer Networks

To setup a Pepperl & Fuchs multiplexer, right click the Pepperl & Fuchs multiplexer symbol. From the drop-down menu select P & F Setup. On each Pepperl & Fuchs slave module, set the slave address switch to an unused value so that each module has its own individual setting. On the Pepperl & Fuchs Module Setup screen, check those modules that are installed.

Note ValveLink must be licensed with a Tag Limit sufficient for the number of connected instruments. See section 3.5 to verify that sufficient tag limits exist. If additional tag limits are represented, reference section 11.4.1 to Set Up.

6.1.2

Adding Instruments to a Multiplexer Depending upon the multiplexer, the ValveLink software can support up to 256 individual loop channels per multiplexer. You can connect one instrument to each loop channel. See table 6-1 to determine the number instruments that may be connected to a network. To add a new instrument to a multiplexer: 1. Connect HART signal wiring to the multiplexer. For details about wiring and connecting equipment, refer to the appropriate instruction manual. 2. Apply power to the instruments. 3. Apply power to the multiplexers. 4. Right click the multiplexer symbol and select Reset and Rescan the Multiplexer from the drop-down menu. If the instrument is recognized by the software a valve symbol appears beneath the mul-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-9

Multiplexer Networks

tiplexer on the device connection diagram as shown in figure 6-4. If no symbol appears, then the software does not recognize the instrument. Check physical connections and instrument loop power, thenselect Reset and Rescan the Multiplexer.

Note HART Multiplexers can only communicate with FIELDVUE Instruments when the polling address is “0”. Communication does not occur with a higher polling address.

5. To open the instrument’s tag, double click the valve symbol for the instrument. If a tag does not exist in the ValveLink database, the software creates a database tag that matches the HART tag stored

Instrument Recognized by ValveLink Software. No HART tag in instrument.

Figure 6-4. New Instrument Found, No HART Tag in Instrument

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-10

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-5. Device Information Screen for Non-FIELDVUE Devices

in the instrument. If no HART tag exists, the software creates the following database tags: FIELDVUE 0001 for the first instrument, FIELDVUE 0002 for the second instrument, etc. See section 7 for information on creating and opening a tag. If you have created a tag in the database, the ValveLink software attempts to match the instrument to the tag. However if key data, such as the HART tag, descriptor, valve serial number, and multiplexer address do not match, the ValveLink software will not use the database tag you created. Use Query And Match to resolve any discrepancies in key data. Refer to subsection 5.1.3.5 for information on using Query And Match.

6.1.2.1

Identifying Non-FIELDVUE Devices All types of HART devices communicating on the network, not just FIELDVUE Instruments, are displayed by the ValveLink software. However, the software will not permit opening a tag for a non-FIELDVUE device. Double clicking the device symbol causes the Device Information window shown in figure 6-5 to appear.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Multiplexer Networks

6-11

Figure 6-6. Network Scan Setup Window

6.2

Checking

for

Alerts

6.2.1

Scanning for and Setting Up Alerts Network Scan scans instruments connected to the network for current alert conditions. You can select which tags to scan and which types of alerts to scan for. You can also view and print an alert log.

6.2.1.1

Setting Up Tags and Alerts Before you start a scan, you must specify the tags and alerts for which the software should scan. These are identified through the Network Scan Setup window, shown in figure 6-6. To identify which tags and which alerts to scan, click the Network Scan button on the toolbar, or from the Network menu, select Network Scan. On the Network Scan window, click the Setup button. Only tags that are available to communicate via a multiplexer can be scanned. In the Tags box, select the tags to be scanned, then click

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-12

Multiplexer Networks

the Add Selected Tags to Scan List button to add them to the List of Tags to Scan box. In the Alert Selection box, select the alerts for which the software should scan. Click the Save button. For information on setting up and communicating alert data over a Modbus network, see subsection 6.3. For information on setting up tags for trending see subsection 15.2.2.1. To remove tags from the List of Tags to Scan box, select the tags you want to remove and click the Remove Tags from Scan List button

6.2.1.2

Starting a Scan To start a scan, click the Network Scan button on the tool bar, or from the Network menu, select Network Scan, then click the Start Scan button. Scanning begins for selected tags and for specific alert conditions. (To change tags and alert selections, use the Network Scan Setup window.) Figure 6-7 shows the Network Scan window. It consists of two parts: a list of active alerts and an alert log. In the Active Alerts list, the software lists the tag, tag group, alert type, and date and time the alert went on (became active). Active alerts are highlighted in red. When the alert clears (no longer active) it is removed from the list of active alerts. When an alert is first discovered, an audible tone may sound or an acknowledgment message may appear on your screen. (Enable the audible alert and acknowledgment messages on the Network Scan Setup page in the Preferences window, refer to subsection 6.2.2.) The bottom part of the Network Scan window is an alert log. It lists all alerts, whether they are active or cleared. The log lists the tag, tag group, alert type, the date and time the alert went on (alert became active), and the date and time the alert went off (alert cleared). Active alerts (no time off) are displayed in red. You can move the gray bar that separates the two parts to allocate more space to either the active alerts list or the alert log. To move the bar, click on it and drag it. ValveLink software scans for alerts in the background. This means that you can continue to scan for alerts while doing other things such as configuring or calibrating an instrument, running diagnostics, etc.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Multiplexer Networks

6-13

Figure 6-7. Network Scan Window

You can minimize the Network Scan Setup window by clicking the minimize button in the upper right hand corner, the same as you would for windows in any other Windows application. To maximize the window, click the Network Scan button on the Windows task bar. For information on reporting alert data over a Modbus network, see subsection 6.3.4. To stop scanning the network, click the Stop Scan button. Use the scroll bars to review the list of active alerts or the alert log.

6.2.1.3

Viewing and Printing the Alert Log In addition to viewing the alert log from the Network Scan window, you can also print the alert log by clicking the Print Log button. From the Print Setup box, change the printer orientation to landscape so that all of the alert log data fits on the page. To clear the log or change the maximum number of alerts stored in the log, use Preferences on the Customize ValveLink menu (see

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-14

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-8. ValveLink Preferences Network Scan Setup Page

subsection 6.2.2). After reaching the maximum number, the oldest alerts are removed from the end of the log.

6.2.2

Setting Options for Alerts To set the alert options, open the Preferences window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink& Preferences.) If the Network Scan Setup page is not displayed, click on the Network Scan Setup tab to display the page. The Network Scan Setup page is shown in figure 6-8. Audible Tone—Check this box if you wish to have ValveLink software notify you with an audible tone and system messages when alerts occur. Acknowledge Alerts—Check this box if you wish to have acknowledgment messages appear on your screen when an alert is detected while running the Network Scan. Maximum Alert Events—Enter the maximum number of alert events to be stored in the Alert Log. Valid entries are a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 1,000. Pause Interval in seconds—Enter the amount of time, in seconds, to pause between scans for alerts. Valid entries are a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 99 seconds.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-15

Multiplexer Networks

Clear Alert Log upon leaving Preferencesâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Check this box if you wish the alert log to be cleared when you close the Preferences window. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the Save button to save your changes. If you cannot access Preferences on the Customize ValveLink menu, talk with your system administrator for security authorization.

6.3

Connecting Modbus

and Network

Communicating

ValveLink VL2000 Series software that can communicate over a HART multiplexer network can also communicate information from FIELDVUE instruments to a distributed control system (DCS), or other intelligent devices, using the Modbus protocol. To determine if your software can communicate on a multiplexer network, see the ValveLink Help Screen, About ValveLink. Information communicated includes the alert status for travel high and low, travel high-high and low-low, travel deviation, travel accumulator, cycle counter, drive signal, and auxiliary input. You can also communicate travel, temperature, and pressure sensor failure indications, configuration changed, communication error, and if the instrument is Out Of Service and an overall instrument status. The overall instrument status is active if any of the other alerts are active. Analog values such as travel, input current, actuator pressure, and internal temperature also can be communicated.

6.3.1

Modbus Protocol Support The ValveLink software acts as a slave on the Modbus network and supports five data block requests from a Modbus master. Table 6-2 lists the supported Modbus functions. Either ASCII or RTU Modbus protocols at baud rates from 300 to 19,200 are supported by the ValveLink software. The software may be setup to represent one or up to 256 slaves. Each slave can communicate information from up to 312 Instruments. Each instrument must have a tag assigned to it in the ValveLink database and must be communicating via a HART multiplexer.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-16

Multiplexer Networks

Table 6-2. Modbus Function Codes Supported Code

6.3.1.1

Meaning

Read Coil Status

Read Input Status

Read Holding Registers

Description Status of 16 alerts, 32 bits reserved per tag. Status of up to 16 alerts. Alerts may be individually selected and packed. Status of up to 16 alerts and 4 analog values. Analog values are single precision IEEE floating point. Alerts and analog values may be packed or unpacked. Unpacked data reserves 32 registers per tag.

Read Input Registers

Status of up to 16 alerts and 4 analog values. Analog values are signed integers or scaled zero-based integers. Alerts and analog values may be packed or unpacked. Unpacked data reserves 32 registers per tag.

Diagnostics

Subfunction 00 only for loopback testing.

Data Support, Modbus Function Code 1 When the ValveLink software receives a function code 1 from a Modbus master, it responds with alert data according to a predetermined format. The software always allocates 32 coils for each tag although only the first 17 coils are actually used for reporting alert status. The sequence (starting coil to ending coil) in which alerts are provided remains constant. Figure 6-9 shows an example response and how the coils are allocated. When an instrument (tag) is added to a slave address, the first (lowest) coil range available is used. If the tag is deleted, the coil range is left open, until another tag is added to the slave address. The alert statuses are assigned to the coils as shown in figure 6-10. The coil contains a “1” when the alert is active and a “0” when the alert is clear. Empty coils all contain “0”s.

6.3.1.2

Data Support, Modbus Function Code 2 If unpacked, the response to a function code 2 is exactly the same as the response to a function code 1. However, in order to optimize

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-17

Multiplexer Networks

Starting Coil 1

Starting Coil 65

Starting Coil 33

32 coils 17 coils

Alert Status Reserved

Alert Status

First Instrument (Database Tag)

32 coils 17 coils

32 coils 17 coils Reserved

Alert Status

Second Instrument (Database Tag)

Starting Coil 9953

Reserved

Third Instrument (Database Tag)

Alert Status

Reserved

312th Instrument (Database Tag)

Figure 6-9. ValveLink Software Response to Modbus Function Code 1, Unpacked Data

Coils 18 to 32 empty 1

3 4 5

Starting Coil

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Coils

Figure 6-10. Alert Status Assignments to Coil Addresses, Unpacked Data

communication, the alert data may be compressed (packed) into less than 32 coils per instrument. When packed, the ValveLink software allocates coils only for selected alerts. As an example, suppose that only Travel Alert Hi, Travel Alert Lo, Travel Accumulator, and Drive Signal have been selected. Then the response to a function code 2 will appear as shown in figure 6-11. The starting coil address for the first instrument is 0. The starting coil address for the second instrument is 4, etc. Although packing the data maximizes the number of tags (instruments) that can be monitored in a single contiguous block, it also means that changes in the configured alerts or tags will probably require repacking the data and making changes to the masterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requests. When tags are added to a slave address, they will be added July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-18

Multiplexer Networks

... 1

3 4 5

First Instrument Starting Coil

8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16

Second Instrument

Third Instrument

Fourth Instrument

33 34 35 36 Starting Coil

Ninth Instrument

Coils

Figure 6-11. Example Alert Status Assignments to Coil Addresses for Packed Data

to the first (lowest) available coil range. If a tag is deleted, the coils for that tag are left unassigned until another tag is added to the slave address or the data is repacked. If an alert is deselected, the number of coils assigned to a tag does not change until the data is repacked. When an alert is added, any empty coils are filled first. If no empty coils are available, you are requested to repack the data.

6.3.1.3

Data Support, Modbus Function Codes 3 and 4 When the ValveLink software receives a function code 3 or 4 from a Modbus master, the response to either function code may be packed or unpacked. If left unpacked, the software always allocates 32 registers for each tag: 2 registers for alert status and 8 registers for analog data; 22 registers are reserved. The sequence (starting register to ending register) in which data is provided remains constant. For example, the starting register for the first instrument is always register 1. The starting register for the second instrument is always register 33, etc. The starting register for the 312th instrument is register 9953 [Starting register = (Nâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;1)32+1]. Each register contains two bytes (16 bits). Therefore, 32 bits are always used for the alert status. Figure 6-12 shows an example unpacked response and how the registers are allocated. The first 17 bits of the starting register are allocated to the alert status in the same order shown in figure 6-10, that is, Travel Deviation status is represented by the lowest order bit, Travel Alert Hi is represented by the next bit, etc. Therefore, if the

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-19

Multiplexer Networks

Starting Register

16 bit Reserved Alert Status

Travel

Actuator Pressure

32 bits Alert Status

Input Current

Internal Temperature

...

Registers 11 through 31 reserved

Analog Values

Figure 6-12. Register Allocation for One Instrument, Modbus Function Code 3, Unpacked Data Starting Register

16 bit Alert Status

Reserved

Travel

32 bits Alert Status

Input Current

Internal Temperature

Analog Values

...

Registers 7 through 31 reserved

Figure 6-13. Register Allocation for One Instrument, Modbus Function Code 4, Unpacked Data

alert status register is displayed as an integer and Travel Alert Hi is the only alert active, the integer 2 will be displayed. For a function code 3, analog values are reported as single-precision, IEEE, floating-point numbers. For function code 4, analog values are reported as integers. The integers may be signed or zerobased with user configurable scaling. Zero-based integer values are always positive. Only one register is used for each analog value as shown in figure 6-13. Except for temperature, default scaling for signed integer values is 100; i.e., to obtain the actual value for travel, actuator pressure, or input current, divide the integer value received by 100. The default scaling for signed integer temperature values is 10. To optimize communication, the alert data may be packed (compressed) into less than 10 registers per tag. When packed, the July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-20

Multiplexer Networks

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5 4

3 2 1

Alert Status Register

Starting Register

16 bit Alert Status

Travel

Input Current

First Instrument

Internal Temperature

...

Travel

Second Instrument

Figure 6-14. Register Allocation for Modbus Function Code 3, Packed Data

ValveLink software allocates registers only for selected alerts and analog values. As an example, suppose that only Travel Alert Hi, Travel Alert Lo, Travel Accumulator, and Drive Signal have been selected. In addition, suppose we want to communicate Travel, Input Current, and the Internal Temperature. The response to a function code 3 will appear as shown in figure 6-14. Although packing the data maximizes the number of tags (instruments) that can be monitored in a single contiguous block, it also means that a change in the configured alerts or tags will probably require repacking the data and making changes to the masterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requests. When tags are added to a slave address, they will be added to the first (lowest) available register range. If a tag is deleted, the VL2000 Series

July 2000

Multiplexer Networks

6-21

registers for that tag are left unassigned until another tag is added to the slave address or the data is repacked. If an alert or analog value is deselected, the number of registers assigned to a tag does not change until the data is repacked. When an alert or analog value is added, any empty registers are filled first. If no empty registers are available, you are requested to repack the data.

6.3.1.4

Data Support, Modbus Function Code 8 ValveLink software supports Modbus function code 8, subfunction code 0 for loopback testing. When the ValveLink software receives a request function code 8, subfunction code 0, it echoes back exactly what was received.

6.3.2

Connecting to the Modbus Network To communicate instrument information, the computer running the ValveLink software must have two serial ports available: one to connect to the multiplexer network with the instruments and one to connect to the Modbus network. The Modbus network can be an RS232C or RS485 connection. If an RS232 connection is used, a null modem adapter is required at the computer serial port connected to the Modbus network. A standard RS232 interface cable connects the Modbus master to the null modem adapter. Maximum cable length is 50 feet (15 meters). Shielded cable is recommended. Figure 6-15 shows an example computer with ValveLink VL2000 software connected to a HART multiplexer network and an RS232 Modbus network. For more information on setting up a HART multiplexer network, refer to subsection 5.1.3.1 and the appropriate multiplexer instruction manuals. If an RS485 Modbus network is used, an RS232-to-RS485 converter is required. In addition to the connection to the Modbus master, the RS485 network permits multidrop connections to other slaves up to the number of addresses available. Individual slaves are assigned addresses ranging from 0 to 255. Standard cable for the RS485 interface is a two-wire shielded cable. The cable shield may be grounded at either end, but not at both ends. Maximum cable length is typically 2000 feet (610 meters) without a repeater. Figure 6-15

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-22

Multiplexer Networks

Null Modem Adapter

To Control System Terminations and FIELDVUE Instruments (see Figure 5-10)

RS232 Interface Cable (50 feet, max.)

Modbus Master or Control System

Figure 6-15. Example ValveLink Computer Connections to HART Multiplexer and an RS232 Modbus Network

shows an example computer with ValveLink VL2000 Series software connected to a HART multiplexer network and an RS485 Modbus network. For more information on setting up a HART multiplexer network, refer to subsection 5.1.3.1 and the appropriate multiplexer instruction manuals.

6.3.3

Setting Up ValveLink to Communicate on the Modbus Network ValveLink software communicates with a Modbus master over the Modbus interface. The Preferences window provides selections that allow you to: Select the Modbus Transmission Mode and Delay ValveLink software supports both ASCII or RTU serial transmission modes. Select the transmission mode and Modbus parameters to match the settings in the Modbus master. You can also specify a

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-23

Multiplexer Networks

RS485 Interface Cable (2000 feet, max)

Modbus Slave Modbus Slave To Control System Terminations and FIELDVUE Instruments (see Figure 5-10)

Modbus Slave Modbus Master or Control System

Note: Number of Modbus slaves limited by number of addresses available, 247 max.

Figure 6-16. Example ValveLink Computer Connections to HART Multiplexer and an RS485 Modbus Network

delay in milliseconds between the time ValveLink software receives a request and the time the software begins to prepare a response. Identify the Communication Port Identifies the communication port on your personal computer to which the null modem adapter or RS232-to-RS485 converter is attached. Set Modbus Parameters Allows you to set up the Modbus parameters to match the settings in the Modbus master. These parameters include: baud rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity. You must also define the instruments for which the ValveLink software should communicate information over the Modbus network. The Modbus Setup window allows you to: List the ValveLink Database Tag You define the instruments for which the ValveLink software should communicate information by July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-24

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-17. Preferences Window, Modbus Page

listing the database tags in the List of Tags to Scan box on the Network Scan Setup window. See subsection 6.2.1.1 for information on setting up tags and alerts. Assign Slave Addresses to the Database Tags ValveLink software supports up to 256 slave addresses. You can assign up to 312 tags to each address. As database tags are assigned to the slave addresses, the ValveLink software automatically calculates the starting coils and registers for that tag.

6.3.3.1

Defining Communication Ports To define the communication ports, open the Preferences window, shown in figure 6-17. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Preferences.) If the Modbus page is not displayed, click the Modbus tab to display the page. To see a list of communication ports available, click the arrow beside the Communication Port list box. Click on the port to which the Modbus network is attached to select it.

6.3.3.2

Selecting Transmission Mode and Delay To select the transmission mode, open the Preferences window (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink& Preferences.) If

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Multiplexer Networks

6-25

the Modbus page is not displayed, click the Modbus tab to display the page. Select the serial transmission mode that matches the Modbus master, either ASCII or RTU. When the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode is chosen, the ValveLink software sends each eight-bit byte in a message as two ASCII characters. The main advantage of this mode is that it allows time intervals of up to one second to occur between characters with out causing an error. If the RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode is selected, each eight-bit byte in a message contains two four-bit hexadecimal characters. The main advantage of this mode is that its greater character density allows better data throughput than ASCII for the same baud rate. Each message must be transmitted in a continuous stream. You can specify a delay of up to 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds). The ValveLink software is capable of replying to requests faster than some Modbus masters are capable of receiving the response. This parameter, when used in conjunction with the polling scan rate of the Modbus master, should be able to accommodate the timing requirements of all Modbus masters. The default value of 50 milliseconds is appropriate for most masters.

6.3.3.3

Defining Modbus Parameters ValveLink software is capable of communicating over the Modbus network at rates between 300 and 19,200 baud. Select a baud rate that matches the setting in the Modbus master. Typically the higher baud rates provide for faster communication. However, in noisy environments; including electrical noise from motors, arc welding equipment or induction furnaces; may cause communication errors. If significant errors occur, select a lower baud rate. Select the number of data bits for Modbus communication, either 7 or 8. The Modbus protocol stipulates that the RTU transmission mode use 8 data bits and that the ASCII mode use 7 data bits. Be sure your selection matches the Modbus master. Also, be sure to adjust the number of data bits whenever the transmission mode is changed to be consistent with the Modbus protocol. Select the number of stop bits to match the setting in the Modbus master, either 1 or 2. Select 1 stop bit if parity is used or 2 stop bits if no parity.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-26

Multiplexer Networks

Parity is one of the methods for error checking used by the Modbus protocol. The parity can be set to Odd, Even, or None. Set the parity to match the setting for the Modbus master. If None is selected for parity, the number of stop bits should be set to 2. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the Save button to save your changes. Click OK to close the confirmation message.

Note To cause your changes to take effect, you must exit the software and then restart.

6.3.3.4

Assigning Slave Addresses to Database Tags Before the ValveLink software can communicate alert information on the Modbus network, you must select which tags the software should scan for alerts. You select the tags from the Network Scan Setup window. See subsection 6.2.1.1 for information on setting up tags and alerts. To assign slave addresses to the selected tags, from the Network Scan Setup window, click the Modbus Setup button. The Modbus Setup window, shown in figure 6-18, lists the selected tags in the Scan List Tag column. You cannot modify this list from the Modbus Setup window. You must add or remove tags from the Network Scan window. In the Slave column, use the list boxes to assign an address in the range 0 to 255 to each tag, or select None. If you select None, the alert data for that tag will not be communicated on the Modbus network. Up to 312 tags may be assigned to a single slave address. When a slave address is selected for a tag, the ValveLink software calculates the starting coil and starting register for that tag. The starting coils are listed in the Starting Coil column; the starting registers are listed in the Starting Register column. The starting coil and starting register for a newly assigned tag is the first available coil or

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Multiplexer Networks

6-27

Figure 6-18. Modbus Setup Window

register for that address. Although you cannot change the starting coil and starting register value, you can affect the ordering of tags on a slave address. The starting coil and starting register is dependent upon the order in which slave addresses are assigned to tags. For example, if you first assign slave address 7 to tag FY-807, the starting coil and register for that tag will be 1. If you then assign slave address 7 to the tag LCV-1126, then, for unpacked data, the starting coil for the tag LCV-1126 will be 33 (32 coils allocated to a tag) and the starting register will be 33 (32 registers allocated to a tag). For packed data, the starting coil and starting register assignments are affected by the state of the check boxes on the Packed Modbus Setup window. If all alerts and analog values are selected, then 32 coils and 32 registers are allocated to the tag. Otherwise, the minimum number of coils and registers required to accommodate the selected alerts and analog values are allocated. To print a list of tags with slave addresses, starting coils and registers, and alert assignments, click the Report button at the bottom of the Modbus Setup window. You can also get a report by clicking the Modbus Report button on the Alert Scan window. July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-28

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-19. Packed Modbus Data Setup Window

6.3.3.5

Selecting Packed Data To select the packed data that will be communicated over the Modbus network, click the Packed Setup button at the bottom of the Modbus Setup window. Figure 6-19 shows the Packed Modbus Setup window. The Packed Modbus Setup window lists all of the alerts and analog values which are available for communication on the Modbus network. To optimize Modbus memory and data transmission, you may elect not to report all alerts and analog values. The default is to have all alerts and analog values selected. To deselect a parameter, click on the check box in front of the parameter to clear it. Packed function codes permits you to select which of the function code responses, 3 or 4, you want packed when you select packed data. See subsection 6.3.1.3 for information on function codes 3 and 4 and packed data. After you have selected the alerts and analog values you wish to report, click the OK button to save your choices and exit the Packed Modbus Setup window. To pack the data, click the Pack Modbus button on the Modbus Setup window. This will compress the coil and register assignments within each of the slave addresses. Clicking the Pack Modbus button will also eliminate any holes resulting from reassignment of tags and changes made on the Packed Modbus Setup window. A packed data response is available for Modbus function code requests 2, 3, and 4. If the number of items selected on the Packed

VL2000 Series

July 2000

6-29

Multiplexer Networks

Figure 6-20. Scaling Window for Function 4 Response Integers

Modbus Setup window changes after tags are already setup for Modbus, you must click the Packed Setup button on the Modbus Setup window to change the starting coil and starting register. When changes are made to packed data, you will most likely have to reconfigure requests from the Modbus master. Having all the alerts and analog values selected minimizes the impact on the Modbus master of Modbus setup changes within the ValveLink software.

6.3.3.6

Scaling Integers for a Function Code 4 Response The default response to a function code 4 request is to report the analog values as scaled signed integers. Travel, actuator pressure, and input current are scaled by 100. Temperature is scaled by 10. However, from the Function 4 Scaling window, shown in figure 6-20, you can convert them to zero-based integers and apply user defined scaling. To select the integers to scale and apply variable scaling, click the Scaling button on the Modbus Setup window. Check the appropriate check box to select the integer to scale. The scaling for all selected integers begins at 0. The upper scaling limit may be any value within the range of 999 to 32767.

6.3.4

Communicating on the Modbus Network To communicate alert data on the Modbus network, the ValveLink software must first be scanning the instruments for alerts. To start scanning for alerts, click the Start Scan button on the Network Scan

July 2000

VL2000 Series

6-30

Multiplexer Networks

window. (Click the Network Scan button on the tool bar) For more information on scanning for alerts, see subsection 6.2. Once the ValveLink software is scanning the instruments for alerts, click the Start Modbus button on the Network Scan window. As soon as the software receives a request from the Modbus master, it will respond with the requested alert data. To stop Modbus communication, click the Stop Modbus button on the Network Scan window. Alternatively, you can click the Start Modbus button and ValveLink will automatically start scanning the instruments for alerts and report the alert data, when requested, over the Modbus network. However, clicking the Stop Modbus button will not automatically stop the alert scan. Click the Stop Scan button to cause the ValveLink software to stop scanning the HART multiplexer network. If the ValveLink software is reporting data over the Modbus network, clicking the Stop Scan button will not only cause the software to stop scanning for alerts, but also will stop communication over the Modbus network.

6.3.5

Verifying Modbus Network Communication 1. Verify all items on the Modbus Preferences window match the Modbus master. 2. For RS232 connections, verify that the cable to the master contains a null modem adapter and is connected to the correct serial port on the PC where the ValveLink software is installed. 3. For RS485 connections, verify that the RS232-to-RS485 converter baud rate, the Modbus master baud rate, and the baud rate selected on the Modbus Preferences window all match. 4. For RS485 connections, verify that the connections to the RS232-to-RS485 converter and the Modbus master are correct (i.e., DATA + to DATA + and DATA â&#x20AC;&#x201C; to DATA â&#x20AC;&#x201C;) 5. Verify Modbus setup includes tags at the desired slave address. 6. Verify the Modbus master is making the proper requests to the configured slave addresses.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Tag Management

Tag Management 7.1

Setting Up the ValveLink Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2

Working with Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.2.1 7.2.2.2 7.2.2.3 7.2.2.4 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8

7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2

7.4 7.4.1 7.4.1.1 7.4.1.2

July 2000

7-1

The Tag Management Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 The New Tag or Modify Tag Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Instrument and Valve Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Groups Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 HART Mux Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Opening a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Closing a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Creating a New Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Modifying a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Copying a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Deleting a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Defining Tag Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Adding and Changing Tag Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Adding and Changing Group Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Working with Tag Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Importing and Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Importing Tag Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Exporting Tag Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

VL2000 Series

7-2

7.1

Tag Management

Setting

the

ValveLink

Database77

After installing ValveLink software on your computer, you can begin setting up a database to store tag information. When you create and save a new tag, the application saves the data in a database. When you run a diagnostic test and save the dataset, work with detailed setup and save a dataset, or set up and save valve specifications, you are saving data in the database. As you work with ValveLink software and save the results of your work, the software updates and adds to the database. When you first begin working with the software, you can use several different methods to enter tag data into the database. Some suggestions: Import data from another ValveLink database–If another division or area of your company is using ValveLink software and has already set up a database, data from their system can be exported and you can import that same data into your system. Create new tags by scanning instruments–From the Network menu, select Explorer View. Then from the Network List window, double click on the COM port, HART modem, or FF card symbol. ValveLink software polls the network for instruments. Double click on the desired tag and the ValveLink software creates a new database tag with data from the instrument. Create new tags from scratch–You can use either the New HART Tag or New FF Tag selection on the Tag menu to create and save new tags. Use the New HART Tag selection to create tags for DVC5000 Series instruments. Use the New FF Tag selection to create tags for DVC5000f Series instruments. Copy an existing tag–You can click the Copy Tag button on the Tag Management window to copy an existing tag and save it with a new tag name. DATASYNC–You can merge data from two ValveLink databases using DATASYNC. (See section 10).

7.2

Working

with Tags

ValveLink software uses tags to identify both physical devices and related data stored in the software. To configure, calibrate, or run VL2000 Series

July 2000

Tag Management

7-3

diagnostics on an instrument, you identify that instrument to the ValveLink software by opening its tag. When you open a tag, you identify both a specific physical device and its associated information, stored in the ValveLink database. You can: Open a tag—This notifies the software that you want to work with a particular instrument and its associated data. When you open a tag, the status bar changes to reflect tag data, and the Instrument Status window appears. Close a tag—This notifies the software that you are finished working with a particular instrument and its associated data. (To work with the instrument again, open its tag.) Create a new tag—Adds a new instrument to the database. The software creates a record for that instrument in its database. (You can also create tags and associated database records for reference, without linking to physical devices.) Modify a tag—This changes the tag information that identifies an instrument in the database. (To change the information in the instrument itself, setup the instrument.) Copy a tag—This copies all of an instrument’s tag information and associated database records to a new tag. Delete a tag—This deletes an instrument’s tag and associated database records from the database.

7.2.1

The Tag Management Window The Tag Management window, shown in figure 7-1, allows you to search for and select a particular tag so that you can open it, modify it, copy it, or delete it. You can also print a report containing information from several tags. You can use tag groups to narrow the list of tags. The following defines the fields on the Tag Management window. Tag or partial tag value—Enter a tag or several characters of a tag and press the Enter key to begin searching. The software lists tags that match your entry in the Tags Found box.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-4

Tag Management

Figure 7-1. Tag Management Window

Tag groupsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Use the tag groups on the upper right side of the window to further narrow your search for a particular tag. To open a group and list its associated selections, click the list-box arrow on the right side of the box. Click an item from the list to select it. The software lists tags associated with the selected group and selection in the Tags Found box.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

7-5

Tag Management

Maintenance Tip Modify tag groups and selections through the Customize ValveLink menu. See subsection 7.3.

Tags Found—Lists tags that match the criteria entered in the Tag or partial tag value box and selected from the tag groups. To select a tag from the list, click it once. The information box to the right of the Tags Found box shows important data associated with the selected tag. Verify you selected the correct tag. After selecting a tag from the Tags Found box, click one of the buttons on the bottom of the window to open, modify, copy, or delete the tag. Tag information box—Lists important information associated with the tag currently selected in the Tags Found box.

7.2.2

The New Tag or Modify Tag Window Figure 7-2 shows an example of a New Tag or Modify Tag window. The New Tag or Modify Tag window consists of four pages: Instrument and Valve, Groups, HART Mux (HART tags only), and Notes. Information on these pages define the tag in the database. The following define the fields on these pages. The Tag field at the top of the window contains the database tag you are creating or modifying. You can use any combination of up to 32 letters, numbers, and characters as a tag.

7.2.2.1

Instrument and Valve Page The following define the fields on the Instrument and Valve page. HART Tag—(for DVC5000 Series instruments only) Enter an eight-character name that identifies the physical instrument.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-6

Tag Management

Figure 7-2. Example ValveLink New Tag or Modify Tag Window

Instrument Model—Select the model of instrument associated with the tag you are creating or modifying, for example, DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. Valve Type—Select the type of valve associated with the instrument: rotary or sliding stem. Descriptor—Enter a brief description of the instrument. Valve Serial Number—Enter the valve serial number on which the digital valve controller is mounted. Reference Only—Check this box to identify a tag intended for the database but not associated with a physical instrument in the field. If you intend to match this tag with an instrument, be sure the box is clear. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Tag Management

7-7

Tags not assigned to any tag group

Tag assigned to the tag group Boiler

Figure 7-3. Assigning a Database Tag to a Tag Group

7.2.2.2

Groups Page This page permits you to associate a new or existing tag with groups and selections. Groups categorize tags, narrowing your search for specific tags. Groups are not hierarchies, but you can use more than one group as sort criteria when searching for a tag. Establish up to four groups through the Customize ValveLink menu (see subsection 7.3). Example groups might include Plant Area, Subsection, Manufacturer, or Critical Loops. Then establish selections for each group. Example selections for Plant Area might include Boiler, Tank Farm, or Bleach Plant. Tags that are not assigned to any group appear as unassigned in the database, as shown in figure 7-3. Once you have established groups and selections, you can assign a tag to them. To open a group and list its associated selections, click the list box arrow on the right side of the group box. Click a selection from the list to select it.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-8

7.2.2.3

Tag Management

HART Mux Page

Note This page applies to instruments on a HART multiplexer network only. You do not need to complete this page if using a HART modem to communicate with the instrument or if you are creating or modifying a tag for a FOUNDATION fieldbus instrument.

This page permits you to set up or modify HART multiplexer network information for the instrument associated with this tag. The following define the fields on the HART Mux page. Mux Address—Enter the address of the multiplexer to which the instrument is attached. Valid values are 0 to 31. Node—(information in this field applies to the MTL multiplexers only). Enter the node number for the MTL4842 HART interface module to which the instrument is attached, in a MTL4840 Maintenance System. Valid values are 1 to 16. If the instrument is not connected in an MTL system, enter 0 for this field. Loop Number—Enter the loop number for the instrument. Valid values are 0 to 255. Actual loop numbers depend on the multiplexer (see subsection 3.2). DCS Loop ID—Enter the DCS (Distributed Control System) point tag, or other identifying information, for the loop associated with the instrument. The DCS is the controlling device that sends a 4–20 mA analog signal to the instrument.

7.2.2.4

Notes Page This page permits you to add or edit notes associated with the tag. Type your note in the Notes box. Text automatically wraps to the

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Tag Management

7-9

next line as necessary; you do not need to press the Enter key at the end of each line. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor and select existing text to type over or delete. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Notes box to see more text.

7.2.3

Opening a Tag Before you can work with an instrument, you must first identify it by opening its tag. When you open a tag, you identify both a particular physical device and its associated information, stored in the database. When you open a tag, the status bar changes to reflect tag information, and the Instrument Status window opens. In addition, the database tag appears in the title bar of the ValveLink window. As you make selections from the toolbar or menus, new windows replace the Instrument Status window, but the database tag remains in the title bar. You can use one of several methods to open a tag: Network List—In the left pane of the ValveLink window, double click on the tag you wish to open. From the menu bar—elect Tag, then, select Open or Modify Tag from the Tag menu. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to open. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to open appears in the Tags Found box, highlight it then click the Open Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. The software also keeps track of the tags you last worked with. You can quickly open one of these tags by selecting it from the bottom of the Tag menu. From the toolbar—click the Tag icon. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to open. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to open appears in the Tags Found box highlight it then click the Open Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-10

Tag Management

Note Two or more tags in the database may have the same key data, such as the HART tag, descriptor, valve serial number, and address. When you attempt to open one of these tags from the network list, ValveLink software displays a dialog box listing all the database tags with identical key data. To open a tag, click on the desired tag to highlight it, then click the Open button.

7.2.4

Closing a Tag If you close a tag window, you also close the tag. To continue working with a tag, do not close its window. Instead, select another option from the menu bar or toolbar. A new window replaces the previous window. To close a tag, click the Close Tag button at the bottom of the active tag window, or double-click the Control box in the upper left corner of the active tag window. You can also select Close Tag from the Tag menu. If the instrument is Out Of Service, or if you have not saved a new dataset the software warns you when you close the tag.

7.2.5

Creating a New Tag When you add a new instrument to the network, create a new tag to identify it. When you create a tag, the software establishes a new database record for storing information about the instrument. As you work with the instrument, for example, as you run diagnostic tests and save datasets, the information is added to the tagâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s database record.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

7-11

Tag Management

Maintenance Tip You can transfer key data between an instrument and database tags through Query & Match on the Network menu.

You can use one of several methods to create a tag: From the menu barâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;select Tag. Then, select New HART Tag or New FF Tag from the Tag menu. From the New Tag window, enter information about the instrument in the four pages. See subsection 7.2.2 for a definition of the fields on the pages in the New Tag window. (To display a page and its fields, click the tab name.) When you finish entering information, click the Save Tag button at the bottom of the window. Run Query & Match from the Network menu to resolve any discrepancies between data stored in the instrument and data stored in the database. You can also create a tag by copying information from an existing database tag. Refer to subsection 7.2.7 for information about copying a tag.

7.2.6

Modifying a Tag When you modify a tag, you change information about an instrument stored in the ValveLink database. Modifying a tag does not change information stored in the instrument itself. After modifying a tag, run Query & Match from the Network menu to resolve any discrepancies between tag information in the database and in the instrument itself. If you modify an instrument model or the valve type so that they no longer match the information stored in the instrument, the software warns you when you access that instrument. However, the software will still connect with the instrument. You can use one of several methods to modify a tag:

July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-12

Tag Management

From the menu bar—select Tag. Select Open or Modify Tag from the Tag menu. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to modify. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to modify appears in the Tags Found box highlight it then click the Modify Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. From the toolbar—click the Tag icon. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to modify. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to modify appears in the Tags Found box, highlight it then click the Modify Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. From the Modify Tag window, enter revisions in any of the four pages. See subsection 7.2.2 for a definition of the fields on the pages in the Modify Tag window. (To display a page and its fields, click the tab name.) When you finish entering revisions, click the Save Tag button at the bottom of the window. Run Query & Match from the Network menu to resolve any discrepancies between data stored in the instrument and data stored in the ValveLink database.

7.2.7

Copying a Tag Copying a tag copies all database information from an existing tag and saves it to a new tag. You can use one of several methods to copy a tag: From the menu bar—select Tag. Select Open or Modify Tag from the Tag menu. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to copy. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to copy appears in the Tags Found box highlight it then click the Copy Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. From the toolbar—click the Tag icon. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to copy. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Tag Management

7-13

appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to copy appears in the Tags Found box highlight it then click the Copy Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. In the Copy Tag dialog box, enter the new tag. If the new tag is not a reference tag, click the Reference Only box to clear it. Click OK to copy the database record from the existing tag and save it as a new database record with the new tag. Click Cancel to close the window without copying the tag.

7.2.8

Deleting a Tag Deleting a tag removes all ValveLink database records associated with that tag. You can use one of several methods to delete a tag: From the menu bar—select Tag. Select Open or Modify Tag from the Tag menu. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to delete. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to delete appears in the Tags Found box, highlight it then click the Delete Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the tag when you see the message, ”Delete tag ...and all its associated datasets in the ValveLink database?”. From the toolbar—click the Tag icon. From the Tag Management window, in the Tag or Partial Tag: field, begin typing the tag you wish to delete. As you begin typing, tags with the letters typed appear in the Tags Found box. When the tag you want to delete appears in the Tags Found box, highlight it then click the Delete Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the tag when you see the message, ”Delete tag ... and all its associated datasets in the ValveLink database?”.

7.3

Defining

Tag

Groups

Groups categorize tags, allowing you to sort and filter data when searching the ValveLink database for specific tags. You can establish up to four groups through the Customize ValveLink menu. Example groups might include Plant Area, Subsection, Manufacturer, July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-14

Tag Management

Figure 7-4. Tag Group Names Window

or Critical Loops, or any names meaningful in your facility. You can also establish selections which further define each group. You assign individual tags to specific group selections when creating and modifying tags.

7.3.1

Adding and Changing Tag Groups To add a tag group, open the Tag Group Names window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Tag Group Names.) Figure 7-4 shows the Tag Group Names window. Type a group name in any of the Group boxes. To replace an existing name with a new group name, select it and type over it. Click Save.

7.3.2

Adding and Changing Group Selections To add or change a group selection, open the Tag Group Selections window. From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink& Tag Group Selections. Click the From the Group list box, click on a group name to highlight it. To add a new selection to the group, type its name in the New Selection box then click the Add to Group button. To remove a selection, select it from the Selections in Group box and click the Remove from Group button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

7-15

Tag Management

When finished, click the Save button. To cause your changes to take effect, exit ValveLink then restart the application.

7.4

Working

with

Tag

Data

7.4.1

Importing and Exporting Data From the Tag menu you can: Import tag data—Copy a file containing tag information and datasets into the ValveLink database. Export tag data—Save selected datasets from the ValveLink database as a file. You can import this file into another ValveLink database or into other Windows applications, such as AMS.

7.4.1.1

Importing Tag Data To import tag data, from the menu bar select Tag. Select Import Tag Data from the Tag menu. If you cannot select Import Tag, talk to your system administrator for security authorization. In the File Name box, identify the file you want to import. Click OK. When importing tags into the database, the ValveLink software checks for duplicate tags. If a tag in the database matches the tag you’re importing, you can select: SKIP—over the tag and all associated datasets. The tag is not imported into the database. The existing tag and its datasets remain unchanged. REPLACE—the existing database tag and all associated datasets with the datasets in the import file. The tag is imported and replaces the existing tag. The imported tag’s datasets replace the existing tag’s datasets. MERGE—the datasets in the import file with the existing datasets. The tag’s datasets are imported and included with the existing tag’s datasets.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

7-16

Tag Management

Note When merging datasets, the UNIQUE IDENTIFIER of the original data is preserved and is not changed by the new data.

CHANGEâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;the imported tag. Enter a new tag that does not match an existing tag in the database. The tag is changed and imported with its associated datasets. The existing tag and its datasets remain unchanged.

7.4.1.2

Exporting Tag Data To export tag data, from the menu bar select Tag. Select Export Tag Data from the Tag menu. In the Tag Selection area of the window, identify the tags you want to export to a file. Use tag groups to narrow the tags listed in the Database Tags box. To add to the Tags to Export box, select tags from the Database Tags box and click the Add button. To remove a tag from the Tags to Export box, select it then click the Remove button. In the Datasets to Include in the Export File area of the window, select the types of datasets you want to include with the exported tags. In the Export File Name box, enter the file name and directory where ValveLink should store data, for example, A:\TAGS.EXP. Click the Export Tags button. When you finish exporting tags, click the Close button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

8-1

Automation Tools

Automation Tools88 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.4.1 8.1.4.2 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7

July 2000

Working with Batch Runner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 The Batch Runner Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Modifying a Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Modifying Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running a Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspending Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Instrument Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling a Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Batch or Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting Batch Runner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2 8-5 8-5 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-9

VL2000 Series

8-2

8.1

Automation Tools

Working

with

Batch

Runner

With the Batch Runner tool, you can run one or more of the following operations on one or more instruments with existing tags, via HART modem or multiplexer: Upload and save an entire instrument configuration. Run diagnostics and store data sets for Status Monitor, Dynamic Error Band, Step Response, Drive Signal, Output Signal, andValve Signature. Auto calibrate travel using the last crossover value Run the Performance Tuner Reset the Configuration Changed Flag Reset the instrument clock (available for instruments with firmware revision 5 or later) Download the date to the instrument ValveLink operations can also be selected and stored without specific tags. Such a group of operations, called a Macro, can then be recalled later and applied to existing tags. The Batch Runner feature may not be available with your software. To determine if this feature is available, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink. If it is not available, this feature can be added through a ValveLink setup function.

8.1.1

The Batch Runner Dialog Box To start Batch Runner, click the Batch Runner button on the toolbar, or, from the Main menu, click Tools & Batch Runner. You can immediately begin creating a batch process in the Batch Runner dialog box, shown in figure 8-1. The following defines the fields on this dialog box. Tagâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Permits you to enter existing instrument database tags on which to run ValveLink operations. Double-clicking the Tag field opens the Select Tag dialog box. From the Select Tag dialog box, in

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Automation Tools

8-3

Figure 8-1. Batch Runner Dialog Box with Tag Select Dialog Box Open

the Database Tags window, select the tag or tags you want to enter then click the Add button. Click the OK button to close the dialog box. You can select one or multiple tags. If you enter multiple tags and the Operation field in the row is filled in, then Batch Runner generates another row for each tag with the same operation. If you enter multiple tags and the Operation field is empty, the tags are placed in the same tag field, separated by commas. You can replicate the same tag in two or more rows by first selecting (highlighting) two or more rows. Then double-click the tag field in one of the selected rows. (To maintain the row selection, hold down the Shift key while double-clicking the tag field.) The tag entered in the highlighted tag field will be written in the tag field of every selected row. If multiple tags are entered, Batch Runner generates additional rows for each tag. The additional rows contain the operations in the selected rows. Operationâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Permits you to enter the operation to be run for the tag specified. Clicking on the Operation field causes a drop-down July 2000

VL2000 Series

8-4

Automation Tools

list arrow to appear. Clicking this arrow provides a list of available operations. Click on an operation to select it. Selecting Macro allows you to run a predefined macro. When you select Macro, if the Tag field is empty, Batch Runner will prompt you to enter the database tag or tags for the instruments on which you wish to run the operations in the macro. After you enter the tag or tags, Batch Runner prompts you for the macro file name. (For information on creating a macro, see Creating and Modifying Macros in this section). After the macro is opened, Batch Runner generates a series of rows, each containing one of the operations in the macro. Parameters—After you select an operation, if the operation has parameters associated with it the default parameter values appear in the Parameters field. For example, if you select Dynamic Error Band from the list, the following values are entered in the Parameters field: –1 (Input Start), 101 (Input End), and 50 (Scan Time).The parameters may be changed. Double-click in the Parameters field to open the Parameters dialog box. Enter new values in the dialog box fields and click OK to close the dialog box and transfer the new values to the Parameters field. Time—Normally, indicates the approximate time required to complete the operation. In some cases, when the parameters are changed the required time also changes. While a batch is running, the Time field is constantly updated to show the time remaining to complete the operation. When the operation is complete, the Time field should indicate 0:00 Percentage—A progress bar in this field indicates the current percent of the operation that has been completed. This field is constantly updated as the batch is running. Results—A message from the operation appears in this field telling the status after it has run. For example, Successful, Canceled, Write Protected, etc. Total Time—An estimate of the time required to run all the operations in the batch. The total time should be the sum of the individual times for each operation. While a batch is running, this time is constantly updated to show the time remaining to complete the batch. VL2000 Series

July 2000

8-5

Automation Tools

Once you have defined the first step, use the Insert Step (Ctrl+N) or the Copy Step (Ctrl+C) and Paste Step (Ctrl+V) buttons on the bottom of the dialog box to build a batch process. To move a step, use the Cut Step (Ctrl+X) button to copy a selected step to the clipboard and cut it from its current location in the batch process. Then use the Paste Step (Ctrl+V) button to paste the step in its new location. Use the Delete Step (Del) button to permanently remove a step from the batch process.

8.1.2

Creating and Modifying a Batch You can begin creating a batch from the Batch Runner dialog box as soon as it appears, or you can click the New button on the Batch Runner dialog box then click the New Batch button on the Select New File box. See The Batch Runner Dialog Box in this section for an explanation of the fields on the Batch Runner dialog box. Once you have finished creating your batch, save it by clicking the Save or Save As button. Batch Runner saves the batch as a file with the extension .vlb. Saved batch files can be transferred between computers and can be run with another ValveLink software installation that supports Batch Runner. To modify a batch that you have saved, on the Batch Runner dialog box, click the Open button. Be sure the File Type is Batch Files *.vlb near the bottom of the Open dialog box. If not, click the arrow to see a list of file types then select file type Batch Files *.vlb. Doubleclick the name of the batch to open it for editing.

Note Do not edit batch and macro files using a text editor. Edit these files using only the Batch Runner tool. Using a text editor to edit these files may corrupt the file.

8.1.3

Creating and Modifying Macros Macros are batches that contain several operations but no instrument tags. You can then create another batch that includes the de-

July 2000

VL2000 Series

8-6

Automation Tools

Figure 8-2. Batch Runner Macro Dialog Box

sired tags and select the macro as one of the operations for these tags. This ensures that exactly the same operations are run on instruments in similar applications. To create a macro, from the Batch Runner dialog box, click the New button. Click the New Macro button in the Select New File box. Begin creating a macro by filling in the fields in the Macro dialog box, shown in figure 8-2. The following defines the fields on this dialog box. Operation—Permits you to enter the operation to be run. Clicking on the Operation field causes a drop-down list arrow to appear. Clicking this arrow provides a list of available operations. Click on an operation to select it. Parameters—After you select an operation, if the operation has parameters associated with it the default parameter values appear in the Parameters field. For example, if you select Dynamic Error Band from the list, the following values are entered in the Parameters field: –1 (Input Start), 101 (Input End), and 50 (Scan Time).The VL2000 Series

July 2000

8-7

Automation Tools

parameters may be changed. Double-click in the Parameters field to open the Parameters dialog box. Enter new values in the dialog box fields and click OK to close the dialog box and transfer the new values to the Parameters field. Timeâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Normally, indicates the approximate time required to complete the operation. In some cases, when the parameters are changed the required time also changes. Estimated Timeâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;An estimate of the time required to run all the operations in the macro. The estimated time should be the sum of the individual times for each operation. Once you have defined the first step, use the Insert Step (Ctrl+N) or the Copy Step (Ctrl+C) and Paste Step (Ctrl+V) buttons on the bottom of the dialog box to define a macro. To move a step, use the Cut Step (Ctrl+X) button to copy a selected step to the clipboard and cut it from its current location. Then use the Paste Step (Ctrl+V) button to paste the step in its new location. Use the Delete Step (Del) button to permanently remove a step from the macro. Once you have finished creating your macro, save it by clicking the Save or Save As button. Batch Runner saves the macro as a file with the extension .vlm. Saved macro files can be transferred between computers and can be run with any copy of VL2000 Series ValveLink software that supports the Batch Runner. To modify a macro that you have saved, on the Batch Runner dialog box, click the Open button. Near the bottom of the Open dialog box, in the File Type field, click the arrow to see a list of file types, select file type Macro Files *.vlm. Double-click the name of the macro to open it for editing.

Note Do not edit batch and macro files using a text editor. Edit these files using only the Batch Runner tool. Using a text editor to edit these files may corrupt the file.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

8-8

8.1.4

Automation Tools

Running a Batch To start running a batch, open the batch by clicking on the Open button at the bottom of the Batch Runner dialog box. From the Open dialog box, select the batch you wish to run, then double-click on it or click the Open button. Start the batch by clicking the Run button on the bottom of the Batch Runner dialog box.

8.1.4.1

Suspending Scanning Before the batch is run, ValveLink checks to see if one or more of the tags in the batch is currently being scanned (all types of scanning, such as for alerts or Modbus). If at least one of the tags is being scanned, ValveLink posts a message stating that, “Some of the tags in the list are being actively scanned. Batch Runner will temporarily suspend an affected tag, until operations on that tag are complete. Do you want to suspend scanning on affected tags?” If you answer Yes, when Batch Runner comes across a tag that is being scanned it will suspend all scanning on that tag until the operation is complete. Once the operation is finished, scanning is resumed. If you answer No, when Batch Runner comes across a tag that is being scanned it will skip the operation and post the message “Skipped—tag still scanning” in the Results field for that operation.

8.1.4.2

Changing Instrument Mode When the batch is started, ValveLink checks those instruments whose tags are listed in the batch to see if the instrument mode is In Service. If the operation for an instrument requires that the mode be Out of Service, the tag for that instrument will be added to a list of In Service tags. Select each tag in the In Service list and acknowledge if the instrument mode may be changed to Out of Service. You do this using the Instrument Mode dialog box. For more information on changing the instrument mode, see Changing the Instrument Mode in section 5.1.3.6.1. For those tags that remain In Service, when the batch runs and an operation requires the instrument mode to be Out of Service, the operation will be skipped and the following message will

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Automation Tools

8-9

appear in the Results field: â&#x20AC;&#x153;In Service-Skipped.â&#x20AC;? After the batch has completed, any tags that were in service and taken out of service before the batch started will be listed in a dialog box so that you can place them back In Service.

8.1.5

Canceling a Batch To stop a currently running batch, click the Cancel button on the dialog box for the running batch. If it is not on the last step, a dialog box appears asking you if it is ok to continue with the next step or abort.

8.1.6

Deleting a Batch or Macro To delete a batch or macro, first open the batch or macro you wish to delete. Click the Delete button on the bottom of the Batch Runner or Macro dialog box. Answer yes to the confirmation message to delete the open batch or macro.

8.1.7

Exiting Batch Runner Click the Close button on the Batch Runner or Macro dialog box to exit the Batch Runner.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

8-10

Automation Tools

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Reports

Reports99 9.1

Creating Tag Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.2

Using the AuditLog Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.2.1 9.2.2.2 9.2.2.3 9.2.2.4 9.2.2.5 9.2.3 9.2.4

9.3

July 2000

9-1

Audit Log Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Filtering Records to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Filtering Records by User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Filtering Records by Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Filtering Records by Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Filtering Records by Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Applying Multiple Filters and Removing Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Sorting Records to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Printing the Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Printing Other Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

VL2000 Series

9-2

Reports

Figure 9-1. Print Tag Report Window

9.1

Creating

Tag

Reports

From the Tag Management window, you can print a report that contains selected information for all the tags listed in the Tags Found box. whether they are highlighted or not. Use the information in subsection 7.2.1 to select the tags that appear in the Tags Found box. You can use one of several methods to print the report: From the menu bar, select Tag. Select Open and Modify Tag from the Tag menu. In the Tag Management window, enter into the Tag or Partial Tag field the tag or several characters of those tags you want to appear on the report. If necessary, use Tag Groups to limit the tags in the Tags Found box. When the list of tags is correct, click the Print List button at the bottom of the window. From the toolbar, click the Tag icon. In the Tag Management window, enter into the Tag or Partial Tag field the tag or several characters of those tags you want to appear on the report. If necessary, use Tag Groups to limit the tags in the Tags Found box. When the list of tags is correct, click the Print List button at the bottom of the window. The Print Tags Report window is shown in figure 9-1. You can select the tag information that appears on the report by checking the box to VL2000 Series

July 2000

9-3

Reports

the left of the item. Click the box again to clear it. You can also arrange the tag information on the report. Items near the top of the list will appear on the left side of the report. To move an item, click on the item to highlight it. Click the Move Up button to position the item closer to the top of the list. Click the Move Down button to move the item closer to the bottom of the list. The default separator between each 5 rows of tag information is a space. If you wish to separate each 5 rows with a line, check the box next to Lined Report. The default page orientation for the report is landscape, where the report is printed on a 11 x 8-1/2 inch page. To print the report on an 8-1/2 x 11 inch page, check the box next to Forced Portrait. When you have finished, click OK to print the report. Click Cancel to return to the Tag Management window without printing a report.

9.2

Using

the

AuditLog

Viewer

Figure 9-2 is an example of the ValveLink AuditLog. This log is a file, VLINK.VLG, in the same directory where the ValveLink files are installed. In this file the ValveLink software records all the events, that occur with ValveLink. For example, when a user logs on, the software records the date, time, and user name as well as the date and time of each operation that user performs. Entries are recorded in the log for events such as, startup and logon, changing preferences, calibrating or configuring an instrument, saving a dataset, and running a diagnostic test. To conserve disk space, the size of the log file is limited. When ValveLink is installed the file is limited to 100 kilobytes, however you may change the file size. To specify the size of the log, start ValveLink and logon with a user account that can change preferences. From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink& Preferences. Go to the AuditLog page by clicking on the appropriate tab. Enter a value for the size of the log. Valid entries include 10 to 100 Kbytes. To calculate file size, use the following approximation: 55 bytes per event. Thus, a 100 Kbyte file should hold about 1,818 events. When the file reaches the specified size, ValveLink renames the current audit log file with a name corresponding to the current date (for example, if the day is July 12, 1997, the audit log file will be renamed VL120797.VLG) and creates a new VLINK.VLG file. July 2000

VL2000 Series

9-4

Reports

Figure 9-2. Example ValveLink AuditLog

To retain a history of events over a long period may require multiple log files. You may rename the current log file (VLINK.VLG) and the backup file (VLINKLOG.BAK) to maintain multiple files. However, when the ValveLink software logs an event, it always logs the event in the file VLINK.VLG, thus this file has the record of the latest events. If the file VLINK.VLG is deleted, or renamed, the ValveLink software automatically creates a new one when it starts up. During ValveLink installation, an icon is created for the ValveLink Audit Log Viewer program in the ValveLink VL2000 program group. To view the audit log, start the viewer by clicking on the ValveLink Audit Log Viewer icon. From the dialog box, select the audit log file you wish to view. When first displayed, the Audit Log Viewer displays the log as it is was recorded. You can filter and sort how the entries are displayed, but you cannot modify the log. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Reports

9.2.1

9-5

Audit Log Toolbar The following is a brief description of the function provided by each of the buttons on the toolbar. For a more detailed description see the appropriate subsection either 9.2.2, Filtering Records to Display, or 9.2.3, Sorting Records to Display. To display the toolbar, select Options from the menu bar, then select toolbar from the Options menu. Filter by Users Button—Permits displaying only records that contain operations initiated by specified users. Does not affect sorting options previously selected.

Filter by Tags Button—Permits displaying only records that include operations performed on specified database tags. Does not affect sorting options previously selected.

Filter by Events Button—Permits displaying only records that contain events within specified event categories. Does not affect sorting options previously selected.

Filter by Dates Button—Permits displaying only records that occurred within a specified date range. Does not affect sorting options previously selected. If no events occur within the specified range, you are notified by a message box and the display remains unchanged.

Filter by Times Button—Permits displaying only records that occurred within a specified time range. Does not affect sorting options previously selected. If no events occur within the specified range, you are notified by a message box and the display remains unchanged.

Filter by Multiple Criteria Button—Permits displaying only records that match a combination of criteria, including user, tag, event, date and time. Does not affect sorting options July 2000

VL2000 Series

9-6

Reports

previously selected. If no events occur within the specified date or time range, you are notified by a message box and the display remains unchanged.

No Filtering Button—Removes any filtering criteria. All records in the log file are displayed. Does not affect sorting options previously selected.

Sort by Users Button—Permits sorting the displayed records alphabetically by user. Records without a user (blank) will be listed last. Records with the same user are sorted by date and time, either chronologically or reverse-chronologically depending on if Reverse Dates is selected.

Sort by Tags Button—Permits sorting the displayed records alphabetically by database tag. Records without a tag (blank) will be listed last. Records with the same tag are sorted by date and time, either chronologically or reverse-chronologically depending on if Reverse Dates is selected.

Sort by Events Button—Permits sorting the displayed records alphabetically by event category. Records with the same event category are sorted by date and time, either chronologically or reverse-chronologically depending on if Reverse Dates is selected.

Sort by Dates Button—Permits sorting the displayed records by date and time, either chronologically or reversechronologically depending on if Reverse Dates is selected.

Reverse Date Button—Permits reordering the displayed records so that the record with the latest date and time is at the top of the list. VL2000 Series

July 2000

9-7

Reports

9.2.2

Filtering Records to Display Several filters are available to allow you to display the records for selected users, selected database tags, selected events, within a specified date range, or within a selected range of times. To filter the selected records, click on the appropriate toolbar button or select Filter from the menu bar then select the type of filter: Users, Tags, Events, Dates, Times, Multiple, or None.

9.2.2.1

Filtering Records by User From the Users list box, highlight those users whose records you wish to display. Only users who have records in the log are displayed in the list box. Once you have highlighted the users whose records you want to display, click OK to display the filtered log. Clicking OK removes any previous filter and updates the display applying only the user filter. Any previously selected sorting options still apply. Clicking Cancel restores any previous filters.

Note Selecting all the users in the list box is not identical to no filter. Some log entries do not have users associated with them and a blank user is not listed in the list box. Selecting all the users will display all log entries except those with no user name.

9.2.2.2

Filtering Records by Tag From the Tags list box, highlight the database tags that have records you wish to display. Only tags with records in the log are displayed in the list box. Once you have highlighted the tags of records you want to display, click OK to display the filtered log. Clicking OK removes any previous filter and updates the display applying only the tag filter. Any previously selected sorting options still apply. Clicking Cancel restores any previous filters.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

9-8

Reports

Note Selecting all the tags in the list box is not identical to no filter. Some log entries do not have tags associated with them and a blank tag is not listed in the list box. Selecting all the tags will display all log entries except those without tags.

9.2.2.3

Filtering Records by Event From the Events list box, highlight the events listed in the log you wish to display. Only events in the log are displayed in the list box. Once you have highlighted the events you want to display, click OK to display the filtered log. Clicking OK removes any previous filter and updates the display applying only the event filter. Any previously selected sorting options still apply. Clicking Cancel restores any previous filters.

9.2.2.4

Filtering Records by Date and Time In the dialog box, enter the range of dates and times of records you wish to display. Once you have entered a date and time range, click OK to display the filtered log. Clicking OK removes any previous filter and updates the display applying only the date and time filter. Any previously selected sorting options still apply. Clicking Cancel restores any previous filters. If no records exist within the specified date and time, a message box appears to notify you there are no records and returns you to the previous display.

9.2.2.5

Applying Multiple Filters and Removing Filters Selecting Multiple from the Filters menu or clicking the Filter by Multiple Criteria button from the toolbar provides a Multiple Filters dialog box to allow you to filter records by user, tag, event and date and time. Except for date and time, for each of the filtering criteria you

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Reports

9-9

can select all, multiple, or a single criteria from the list boxes. For example. from the users list box you can select All, multiple users, or any one of the single users listed. If you select All, no filtering by user is applied. If you select multiple users, a second dialog box appears. The tags and events criteria work the same. The second dialog box provides a list box where you can highlight multiple selections. The All and None buttons allow you to quickly make multiple choices. To select a majority of the criteria in the list, click the All button. All selections are highlighted. You can now deselect those selections you do not want to display by clicking on them to remove the highlighting. Clicking on the None button removes all the highlighting and permits you to click on the individual choices you wish to display. Once you have made your choices, click OK to select your choices and return to the Multiple Filters dialog box. Clicking Cancel returns you to the Multiple Filters dialog box with out making any choices for that criteria. Make your choices for the other criteria in like manner. To display records within a date and time range, from the Multiple Filters dialog box specify the date and time range. If no records are logged within the specified date and time, a message box appears after you click OK to notify you there are no records and returns you to the previous display. If no date and time range is specified, the default date and time range includes all records on the log so that no filtering by date and time is applied. Once all criteria choices have been made and a date and time range specified, click OK to display the filtered log. Any previously selected sorting options still apply. Clicking Cancel restores any previous filters. To remove all filters, select None from the Filters menu or click the No Filtering button on the toolbar.

9.2.3

Sorting Records to Display You can apply sorting criteria to display the records alphabetically by user, database tags, events, or chronologically by date and time. Records with blank users and tags will be listed last. Sorting is independent of the selected filters. To sort the selected records, click on the appropriate toolbar button or select Sort from the menu bar then select the type of sorting: by

July 2000

VL2000 Series

9-10

Reports

User, by Tag, by Event, by Date or Reverse Date. Like entries within a category will be listed chronologically by date and time, or reverse chronologically if Reverse Date is selected. For example, if several records have the same user, the records for that user will be listed chronologically (earliest record first) or, if Reverse Date is selected, reverse chronologically (latest record first).

9.2.4

Printing the Audit Log The audit log may be printed at any time. To print the log, either click the Print button on the toolbar, or select Print from the File menu. The log is printed as currently displayed, with any selected filters and sort criteria applied to it. If a filter is applied. the printout indicates that this is not the entire log.

9.3

Printing

Other

Information

You can print datasets or graphs from a number of ValveLink windows including diagnostic tests, configuration data, and valve specifications. If ValveLink does not allow you to access Print on the Tag menu or click the Print button on the toolbar, then printing is not a valid option from the current window. You can use one of two methods to print the displayed dataset or valve specifications: From the menu bar, select Tag. Select Print Dataset from the Tag menu, or From the toolbar, click the Print button on the toolbar. To print a graph for a diagnostic test, see subsection 15.3.1.3. Specific print options depend upon the printer youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re using with your computer. For help on working with your printer, see the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s documentation.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Database Synchronization

Database Synchronization 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.5 10.1.6

July 2000

10-1

Working with the DataSync Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Selecting Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Selecting Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Explanation of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Selecting an Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Setting Preferences for DataSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Using DataSync with a Serial or Parallel Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

VL2000 Series

10-2

10.1

Database Synchronization

Working

with

the

DataSync

Program10

DataSync is used to synchronize two ValveLink software version 4.x databases on the same computer, over a network, or by using a direct cable connection between two computers. With DataSync you can copy or move tag information from one database to another or merge tag information between databases.The DataSync utility requires the ValveLink Diag Tools feature. Depending upon your installed configuration of ValveLink software, the Diag Tools feature may not be available. To determine if this feature is available, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink. Start the DataSync program by clicking on the ValveLink DataSync icon in the ValveLink program group. At the logon dialog box, enter your ValveLink software login and password.

10.1.1

Selecting Databases10 After you log in, you must choose the two databases with which you wish to work. The first is the source database. This is the database that includes the tags you wish to copy. The second is the destination database. This is the database to which you wish to copy tags. You can either type in the database name, or you can select it by clicking the Browse button. If the two databases exist on the same computer, you can easily browse and choose the database files. If one or both of the database files exist on a network drive, you should also be able to browse to those. If the database files exist on two computers connected by cable, see Using DataSync with a Serial or Parallel Connection. The destination database must be a ValveLink database, but the source database can be either a ValveLink database or a Fisher FIRST export file. The default file type for the source database is a ValveLink database (*.mdb). To see a Fisher FIRST export file, change the Files of type entry on the Open dialog box (see figure 10-1). Fisher FIRST export files are available in several different file types. If after changing the file type, you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t see any files listed, try selecting a different file type. After you have selected the two data-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

10-3

Database Synchronization

Change file type to see other database files

Figure 10-1. Changing File Type to Access Other Databases

bases, click Next to continue or Exit to quit the program. The databases must be of the appropriate type and version before you can continue.

10.1.2

Selecting Tags Once you have selected the databases, you must select the tags with which you wish to work. As shown in figure 10-2, DataSync shows you all of the tags in the source database. Select only the tags you want to move to the destination by using the ⇐, ⇒, All ⇐, and All ⇒ buttons. To move a group of tags to the Selected tags box, highlight them in the Tags in source database box and click the ⇒ button. To move all of the tags to the Selected tags box, click the All ⇒ button. To remove a group of tags from the Selected tags box, highlight them in the Selected tags box and click the ⇐ button. To remove all of the tags from the Selected tags box, click the ⇐ All button. On the left side of the screen, you can see the group names with a drop–down list of the subgroups in each group. If you select a subgroup from a drop–down list, only tags in that subgroup will be displayed in the Tags in source database box.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

10-4

Database Synchronization

Figure 10-2. Selecting Source Database Tags

Click < Back to return to the previous screen, Next > to continue, or Exit to quit the program.

10.1.3

Explanation of Operations The various operations are selected from the screen shown in figure 10-3. The following defines the operations. Union-Merge—Select this operation to merge data from the selected tags with data in existing tags in the destination database. If a selected tag does not exist in the destination database, it is added to the destination database. DataSync deals with Tag ID information and Master Spec Sheets in four different ways. If the tag does not exist in the destination database, the Tag ID and Master Spec Sheet are copied to the destination database. If the tag exists in the destination database and none of the check boxes are checked, the Tag ID and Master Spec Sheet ARE NOT merged. If the tag exists in the destination database and the “Duplicate Tag ID and spec sheet fill vacancies in destination” box is checked, empty values in the Tag ID and Master Spec Sheet are filled in with the values in the source database. If the tag exists in the destination database and the “Duplicate Tag ID and spec sheet replace those in destination” box is checked, the Tag

VL2000 Series

July 2000

10-5

Database Synchronization

Figure 10-3. DataSync Operations Selection Screen

ID and Master Spec Sheet are completely replaced by the Tag ID and Master Spec Sheet in the source database. Union-Skipâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;This operation copies data for selected tags only if the tag does not exist in the destination database. Union-Screenâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;This operation permits you to choose what to do with duplicate tags. For each selected tag that already exists in the destination database, you are given a choice of what to do. After you select the Union-Screen operation, DataSync displays the Sreen Tag box shown in figure 10-4. You can change the name of the tag by typing a new name in the edit field and clicking the Change Tag button. To skip the tag and not copy it to the destination database, click the Skip Tag button. To merge tag data in the source database with tag data in the destination database, click the Merge Tag button. To cancel the process, click the Cancel button. July 2000

VL2000 Series

10-6

Database Synchronization

To change a tag, enter the new tag then click the Change Tag button

Figure 10-4. Screen Tag Box for the Union-Screen Operation

After you have screened all of the duplicate tags, DataSync copies data for all of the remaining selected tags to the destination database. Replaceâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Select this operation to copy data for all of the selected tags to the destination database. Before the tags are copied, however, any duplicates in the destination database will be deleted. If you select Replace a message asks if you are sure you want to replace before continuing. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to quit the operation. If you continue, DataSync first copies the destination database to a backup directory, then deletes the duplicate tags. When DataSync has finished copying tags, you are prompted to either save or delete the backup database. If something went wrong or you want to save a backup copy of the destination database, click Save Backup. If everything worked correctly and you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t want a backup, click Delete Backup.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Database Synchronization

10-7

Note The next three operations are not available if the source database is a Fisher FIRST export file.

Last Dataset—This operation can be used with any of the other operations. For each tag copied or merged to the destination database, only data from the most recent dataset of each type is moved. For example: if you have saved 3 valve signature tests for one tag, only data from the most recently saved test is copied or merged. Purge Source—This operation cannot be used at the same time as the Purge All operation but can be used with any of the other operations. If you select Purge Source, a message asks if you are sure you want to purge before continuing. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to quit the operation. If you continue, DataSync first completes the operation you told it to do, then it copies the source database to a backup directory. DataSync deletes ONLY the tags in the source database that it copied or merged to the destination. When DataSync has finished deleting tags, you are prompted to either save or delete the backup database. If something went wrong or you want to save a backup copy of the source database, click Save Backup. If everything worked correctly and you don’t want a backup, click Delete Backup. Purge All—This operation cannot be used at the same time as the Purge Source operation but can be used with any of the other operations. If you select Purge All, a message asks if you are sure you want to purge before continuing. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to quit the operation. If you continue, DataSync first completes the operation you told it to do, then it copies the source database to a backup directory. DataSync deletes ALL of the tags in the source database. When DataSync has finished deleting tags, you are prompted to either save or delete the backup database. If something went wrong or July 2000

VL2000 Series

10-8

Database Synchronization

you want to save a backup copy of the source database, click Save Backup. If everything worked correctly and you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t want a backup, click Delete Backup.

10.1.4

Selecting an Operation Once you have selected the tags, you must decide how to work with them. You must choose one of four operations: Union-Merge, Union-Skip, Union-Screen, or Replace. If you choose UnionMerge, you may also click one of the check boxes below it. For any of the four operations, you may also check Last Dataset, Purge Source, or Purge All.

Note You cannot select Purge Source and Purge All at the same time.

Select an operation and click Next > to continue, click < Back to return to the previous screen, or click Exit to quit the program. A progress window, shown in figure 10-5, shows you the current tag and dataset type, the percent of the tags that have been copied, and a list box containing everything that has been completed up to this point. To quit while the operation is running, click the Cancel button. When the operation is complete, you can view the status of all operations in the list box and click Close to return to the first window.

Note The percent bar only shows the percent of tags where the operation has finished, this does not include deleting tags or backing up databases.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Database Synchronization

10-9

Figure 10-5. DataSync Progress Window

10.1.5

Setting Preferences for DataSync To change the ValveLink DataSync preferences, from the Main Menu select Customize & Preferences from the drop-down menu. You can change the folder where DataSync will save backup files and the language that DataSync displays on the screen. Click browse to select a folder for backup files, or type the name in the box. In the dialog box that appears, select a folder where you would like DataSync to save backup files. Click OK to enter your selection and return to the preferences window, or click Cancel to keep the existing preference. Click the list arrow and from the drop-down list select the language you want DataSync to display on the screen. If you change your language preference, you must exit and restart DataSync. When you are done choosing your preferences, click OK to save them or click Cancel to keep the existing preferences.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

10-10

10.1.6

Database Synchronization

Using DataSync with a Serial or Parallel Null Modem Cable DataSync can work with databases on two computers that are connected by a parallel or serial cable. The following describes how to use the Direct Cable Connection program that comes with Windows. If you do not see Direct Cable Connection on the Accessories menu, it is not installed. Refer to Windows Help for information on installing missing Windows components. The computer running DataSync is the Guest computer. The other computer is the Host computer. 1. On the Host computer, make sure the drive and/or folder containing the ValveLink database is shared. To make a folder shared, right click on it and select Sharing... Refer to figure 10-6. On the Sharing tab, select Shared As and enter the folder name in the box labeled Share Name Click OK to close the properties window. 2. Connect the two computers with a null modem serial or parallel cable. 3. On both computers, run Direct Cable Connection by selecting Start & Programs. From the programs menu, select Accessories and Direct Cable Connection. If Direct Cable Connection is not installed, install it from the Windows CD-ROM by running Add/Remove Programs from the Control Panel. 4. If Direct Cable Connection has not been run on the computers, a connection wizard will take you through the process of setting up the connection. If Direct Cable Connection has been run, the computer shows you the current settings, as shown in figure 10-7. If changes are required, click on Change to set up the connection on both computers. On the Host computer, select Host and the correct port for the connection. On the Guest computer, select Guest and the correct port for the connection. 5. If the Direct Cable Connection does not automatically try to connect, click Listen on the Host computer and Connect on the Guest computer. 6. Wait for the computers to connect. 7. After the computers connect, a window should pop up, as shown in figure 10-8, on the Guest computer that displays the shared folders on the Host. Right click the folder you are going to use and select Map Network Drive. Select a drive letter and click OK.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Database Synchronization

10-11

Figure 10-6. Folder Properties Dialog Box

8. Start DataSync. If you click on one of the Browse buttons, you should be able to browse through files on the Host computer by using the drive letter you selected. Select the two ValveLink databases you need to work with and use DataSync to synchronize the tags.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

10-12

Database Synchronization

Figure 10-7. Direct Cable Connection Computer Settings Screen

Figure 10-8. Mapping a Network Drive on the Guest Computer

VL2000 Series

July 2000

11-1

ValveLink Software License Changes

ValveLink Software License Changes1111 11.1

Working with the VLADMIN Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.2

Removing a License from Installed ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.3

Restoring a License to Installed ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11.4

Stepping Up the ValveLink Software Installed Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3

11.5

July 2000

Increasing the Tag Limit of the Installed ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Adding Features to the Installed ValveLink Software . . . . . . . . 11-5 Backing Up the Hardlock After a StepUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Information for Ordering a Replacement Hardlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

VL2000 Series

11-2

11.1

ValveLink Software License Changes

Working

with

the

VLADMIN

Program

A ValveLink license administration program (VLADMIN) is installed when the ValveLink software is installed. This administration program is used to remove, restore, and StepUp licenses for installed ValveLink software. The program interacts with the installed ValveLink program and a ValveLink hardlock. At the completion of the ValveLink installation, an icon is created for the ValveLink license administration program in the ValveLink VL2000 program group. Start the administration program by clicking on the ValveLink License Admin icon. At the logon dialog box, enter the password FALCON. After the password is successfully entered, the program prompts you to install the hardlock. The program then verifies the presence of the hardlock and prompts you for the name of the directory where your ValveLink software is installed. The dialog box shown in figure 11-1 shows the installed configuration and licenses available in the hardlock and the installed configuration of the ValveLink software. Two types of hardlocks are available: those that are used for new installations, and those that are used to StepUp the installed configuration of the ValveLink software. If you are removing a license from, or restoring a license to, installed ValveLink software, the New Licenses information in the hardlock must match the Installation Settings. If you are stepping up the installed configuration of your ValveLink software, the StepUp From Licenses information in the hardlock must match the Installation Settings. After the StepUp, the Installation Settings will match the New Licenses information in the hardlock. The New License count in the hardlock indicates the number of times the ValveLink software can be installed. The StepUp From License count indicates the number of ValveLink software installations that can be upgraded.

11.2

Removing ValveLink

a Software

License

from

Installed

Removing a license removes the license from the installed ValveLink software and increments the New License count in the hardlock. AfVL2000 Series

July 2000

ValveLink Software License Changes

11-3

Figure 11-1. ValveLink License Administration Dialog Box Showing Hardlock Contents and ValveLink Software Installation Settings

ter you remove the license, a hardlock will be required to run the ValveLink software. In order to remove a license the New License information in the hardlock must match the Installation Settings. In addition, the Hardlock Only setting in the Installation Settings must be No (no hardlock required to run the ValveLink software). If all the conditions listed above are not met, the Remove button is dimmed and you cannot remove a license from the installed ValveLink software. To remove the license from the ValveLink software, click the Remove button. The administration program gives you a chance to cancel the operation. If you click Cancel, the license is not removed. To continue the operation, click Remove. July 2000

VL2000 Series

11-4

11.3

ValveLink Software License Changes

Restoring ValveLink

a Software

License

Installed

Restoring a license decrements the New License count in the hardlock and restores the license in the installed ValveLink software. After you restore the license, the ValveLink software will run without a hardlock attached to the computer. In order to restore a license the New License information in the hardlock must match the Installation settings. In addition, the Hardlock Required setting in the Installation settings must be Yes (a hardlock is required to run the ValveLink software before you execute the restore operation). If all the conditions listed above are not met, the Restore button is dimmed and you cannot restore a license to the installed ValveLink software. To restore the license to the ValveLink software, click the Restore button. The administration program gives you a chance to cancel the operation. If you click Cancel, the license is not restored. To restore the license, click Restore.

11.4

Stepping Installed

Up the Configuration

ValveLink

Software

Stepping up the ValveLink software installed configuration permits you to change the features available in the installed software and/or the number of tags that can be added to the ValveLink database. To StepUp the installed ValveLink software requires a StepUp hardlock.

11.4.1

Increasing the Tag Limit of the Installed ValveLink Software If you are stepping up the tag limit, the StepUp From Tag Count must match the Tag Count of the installed ValveLink software. Also the StepUp From License Count must be greater than 0 and the Hardlock Required setting in the Installation settings must be No (a hardlock is not required to run the ValveLink software). If the above is true, the Tag StepUp button will be available and you can upgrade the installed ValveLink software. Click the Tag StepUp button to upgrade the software. If you click Cancel, the software is not upgraded. After the software is up-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

ValveLink Software License Changes

11-5

graded, the Tag Count in the Installation settings will match the Tag Count in the New License information in the hardlock. The ValveLink software next prompts you to make a backup hardlock. You can proceed to make the backup hardlock or you can cancel and make the backup hardlock later.

11.4.2

Adding Features to the Installed ValveLink Software If you are adding features to the installed ValveLink software, the StepUp From features must match the features of the installed software. if the features do not match, the StepUp button will be dimmed and you cannot upgrade the installed ValveLink Software. If the Hardlock Only setting in the Installation Settings is Yes, the ValveLink software may be upgraded regardless of the StepUp From License count in the hardlock. If the ValveLink software runs without a hardlock, the StepUp From License count in the hardlock must be greater than 0. To StepUp the installed ValveLink software, click the StepUp button. The administration program gives you a chance to cancel the operation. If you click Cancel, the software is not changed. After the software is stepped up, the Installation settings will match the New License information in the hardlock. The ValveLink software next prompts you to make a backup hardlock. You can proceed to make the backup hardlock or you can cancel and make the backup hardlock later.

11.4.3

Backing Up the Hardlock After a StepUp Once you have stepped up your installed ValveLink software, you can upgrade your original installation hardlock to use as a backup. To create a backup hardlock, remove the StepUp hardlock from the computer and install the original installation hardlock. The features of the original hardlock must match the features of the installed ValveLink software before the upgrade. If the correct hardlock is installed, you may make a backup hardlock. The software warns you that proceeding with the backup will permanently change the contents of the hardlock. If you click the Cancel button, the backup procedure is cancelled and the hardlock contents are not changed. To create the backup hardlock, click the Backup button. After the backup is complete, remove the hardlock and store it in a safe place.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

11-6

ValveLink Software License Changes

Figure 11-2. VLADMIN Old License Information Display

11.5

Information Hardlock

for

Ordering

Replacement

If you have lost your original hardlock so that you cannot make a backup hardlock after a StepUp, you can request a replacement hardlock from Fisher Controls. To order a replacement hardlock, start the VLADMIN program as described earlier. At the prompt to install the hardlock click the View Old Lic. Info button. Figure 11-2 shows the Old License Information display. You do not need a hardlock installed to see this display. The features available before the StepUp are shown in the Old License Information area. The replaceVL2000 Series

July 2000

ValveLink Software License Changes

11-7

ment hardlock will match this information. Print the display by clicking the Print button and fax or mail this information to your local sales office or representative. Once you receive the replacement hardlock, you can use it to create your backup hardlock. If you have performed a StepUp and have made a backup, and you lose your backup hardlock or you have a hard drive failure, the information on the Current License Information display will show the features available for the current installed VaveLink software. The replacement hardlock will match the Current License Information on the display.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

11-8

ValveLink Software License Changes

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Initial Setup and Calibration

July 2000

12-1

Initial Setup and Calibration1212 12.1

Working with the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.2

Calibrating Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

12.3

Using the Performance Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

VL2000 Series

12-2

Initial Setup and Calibration

WARNING Changes to the Instrument setup may cause changes in the output pressure or valve travel. To avoid personal injury or property damage, be sure the instrument and valve are isolated from the process.

When the DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller is ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the factory mounts the digital valve controller and sets up the instrument as specified on the order. In this case, the instrument is properly configured and running Setup Wizard is not necessary; proceed directly to Auto Travel Calibration. When mounting to a valve in the field, the instrument needs to be setup to match the instrument to the valve and actuator. Use the Setup Wizard to setup and calibrate the instrument. Before beginning setup, be sure the instrument is correctly mounted as described in the instrument instruction manual.

Note The Setup Wizard does not read the existing configuration of DVC5000 Series FIELDVUE Instruments.

12.1

Working

with

the

Setup

Wizard

The Setup Wizard requests information about the valve, actuator, and instrument through fields on a series of pages, then automatically sets up the instrument. The following explains the buttons on the various pages. VL2000 Series

July 2000

12-3

Initial Setup and Calibration

Next—Click this button to continue to the next page. Back—Click this button to return to the previous page. Cancel—Click this button to abandon the Setup Wizard. The setup parameters in the instrument are not changed. Finish—Click this button to have the ValveLink software send the setup parameters to the instrument. This button appears only on the last window in the Setup Wizard procedure. Help—Click this button for help on the specific page. Use the following procedure to setup an instrument using the Setup Wizard. Step 1:

Open the instrument’s database tag by double clicking on the appropriate valve symbol in the left pane of the ValveLink window, (shown in figure 12-1) or

From the menu bar—select Tag& Open or Modify Tag from the Tag menu. On the Tag Management window, enter the tag in the Tag or Partial Tag field. In the Tags Found box, highlight the tag you want to open. Click the Open Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window. From the toolbar—click the Tag icon. On the Tag Management window, enter the tag in the Tag or Partial Tag field. In the Tags Found box, highlight the tag you want to open. Click the Open Tag button at the bottom of the Tag Management window.

July 2000

Step 2:

Be sure the instrument is connected by checking the tag information on the status bar (see subsection 3.4.4). If the instrument is not connected, refer to section 17.2.

Step 3:

If the instrument is connected, start the Setup Wizard by clicking the Setup Wizard button on the toolbar (see figure 12-2). If the Setup Wizard button is not available, either the instrument tag is not open, the instrument is not connected, or it is not a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. VL2000 Series

12-4

Initial Setup and Calibration

VALVE SYMBOL

LEFT PANE

RIGHT PANE

Figure 12-1. ValveLink Window

Figure 12-2. Selecting Setup Wizard From the Toolbar

VL2000 Series

July 2000

12-5

Initial Setup and Calibration

Note To setup a HART instrument, the protection must be None and the Instrument Mode must be Out Of Service. If not, the ValveLink software prompts you to change the mode and protection. For more information on changing an instruments mode and protection, see subsections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2. For a FOUNDATION fieldbus instrument, the Output block mode must be Out of Service. If not, the ValveLink software prompts you to change the mode. For more information on changing the block mode, see subsection 13.2.

Step 4:

Enter the information requested on each of the pages. To see a list of entries for each field, click the arrow beside the field.

Misc Information a. Enter the instrument pressure units. b. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Actuator Information c. Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on which the instrument is mounted. If the actuator manufacturer is not listed, select Other. d. Enter the actuator type. If the actuator type is not listed, select Other Double-acting or Other Single-Acting.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

12-6

Initial Setup and Calibration

Figure 12-3. Selecting Actuator Type, Make, and Size.

Note If you specify Baumann as the actuator manufacturer, the actuator type for sliding-stem actuators, is either Air to Extend (fail open) or Air to Retract (fail closed). Air to Extend means as air pressure to the actuator increases, the actuator stem moves out from the actuator casing, i.e., moves down. Air to Retract means as air pressure to the actuator increases, the actuator stem moves into the casing, i.e., moves up.

e. Enter the actuator size. f. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Valve Information g. Enter the valve style, either sliding-stem or rotary. The next two fields only appear if the ValveLink software cannot determine the required information from the information entered on the Actuator Information page. VL2000 Series

July 2000

12-7

Initial Setup and Calibration

STEM CONNECTOR

FEEDBACK ARM

ADJUSTMENT ARM

CONNECTOR ARM A6536 / IL

Figure 12-4. SStem - Standard Feedback Connection

h. For Feedback Connection, Select Rotary-All/SSRoller or SStem - Standard. For rotary valves, enter Rotary-All/SS-Roller. For sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkage consists of a connector arm, adjustment arm, and feedback arm (similar to that shown in figure 12-4), enter SStem - Standard. If the feedback linkage consists of a roller that follows a cam (similar to that shown in figure 12-5), enter Rotary-All/SS-Roller. i. Click the Next button to go to the next window, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. The next page, Travel Sensor Rotation, appears only if you specified Other as the actuator manufacturer or type. Travel Sensor Rotation j. Indicate if the ValveLink software has permission to move the valve to determine travel sensor rotation (Yes July 2000

VL2000 Series

12-8

Initial Setup and Calibration

ROLLER

STEM CONNECTOR

CAM

27B6708-B E0032 / IL

Figure 12-5. SS - Roller Feedback Connection

or No). If you enter No, the software prompts for the travel sensor rotation with increasing air pressure. Note: This field only appears if the software cannot determine the travel sensor rotation from the information previously entered.

Supply Pressure and Tuning Set k. Enter the instrument supply pressure range. The next field only appears if the ValveLink software cannot determine the required information from the information entered on the Actuator Information page. l. Enter a tuning set. Choose one of the eleven tuning sets, C through M, or select User Adjusted. The tuning sets C through M provide preset values for gain and VL2000 Series

July 2000

12-9

Initial Setup and Calibration

rate. If you select User Adjusted, you can enter gain values. See subsection 13.4.11 for more information on tuning sets.

Note For DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 3, only the eleven tuning sets are available. User adjusted tuning is not available

Factory Settings m. Specify if factory defaults should be used. If you select Yes, the ValveLink software sets the setup parameters to the values listed in table 12-1 for DVC5000 Series instruments or to the values listed in table 12-2 for DVC5000f Series instruments. If you select No, the setup parameters listed in the tables remain at their previous settings. For DVC5000 Series instruments, you can also select Custom. If you select Custom, a dialog box appears (shown in figure 12-6) prompting you for the name of a ValveLink export file that contains a detailed setup dataset with the default values for the parameters listed in table 12-3. If data from more than one tag is included in the export file or if a tag has multiple datasets, the software displays the dialog box shown in figure 12-7. Select the tag and dataset that contains the data you wish to use for the defaults. See subsection 7.4.1.2 for information on exporting tag data. n. Click the Finish button to have the ValveLink software setup the instrument for the specified valve and actuator. Click the Back button to return to the previous window. July 2000

VL2000 Series

12-10

Initial Setup and Calibration

Figure 12-6. Dialog Box Prompting for Export File Containing Default Values for Custom Defaults

Figure 12-7. Selecting a Tag and Dataset from an Export File That Contains Multiple Tags and Multiple Datasets

Step 5:

VL2000 Series

A progress bar appears while the setup information is sent to the instrument. Clicking Cancel returns you to the last window in the setup procedure. July 2000

12-11

Initial Setup and Calibration

Table 12-1. DVC5000 Series Factory Default Settings Setup Parameter Analog Input Units Input High Input Low Travel Range High Travel Range Low Control Mode Restart Control Mode Self-Test Shutdown Dynamic Bypass Input Filter Time Input Characteristic Travel Limit High Travel Limit Low Travel Cutoff High Travel Cutoff Low Minimum Opening Time Minimum Closing Time Polling Address

Default Setting mA 20.0 mA 4.0 mA 100% 0% Analog (RSP) Resume Last All Failures Disabled No 0 secs Linear 125% â&#x20AC;&#x201C;25% 125% 0.5% 0 secs 0 secs 0

Table 12-2. DVC5000f Series Factory Default Settings Setup Parameter Input Characteristic Travel Cutoff High Travel Cutoff Low

July 2000

Default Setting Linear 125% 0.5%

VL2000 Series

12-12

Initial Setup and Calibration

Table 12-3. DVC5000 Series Parameters Modified for Custom Defaults Setup Parameter

Setup Parameter

General Page: Polling Address

Pressure Page: Pressure Units

Initial Setup Page: Control Mode Restart Control Mode Travel Cutoff Low

Input Characterization Page: Input Characteristic(6)

Inputs Page: Analog Input Units Input Range Low Input Range High Temperature Units

Travel Accum Alert Page: Travel Accum Alert Enable(1) Travel Accum Deadband Travel Accum Alert Point Travel Accumulator(3)

Self Test Shut Down Page: No Free Time RAM Fail Critical NVM Fail(5) Temperature Sensor Fail Travel Sensor Fail Drive Current Fail(4)

Deviation & Other Alerts Page: Travel Dev Alert Enable(1) Travel Dev Alert Point Travel Dev Time Auxiliary Input Alert Enable(1) Auxiliary Input Alert State(2) Drive Alert Enable(1)

Travel Control Page: Travel Limit Low Travel Limit High Travel Cutoff Low Travel Cuttoff High Dynamic Response Page: Input Filter Time Minimum Opening Time Minimum Closing Time Dynamic Bypass Enable Alert Record and Burst Page: Valve Alerts Enable Failure Alerts Enable(4) Misc Alerts Enable Burst Mode Enable(2) Burst Command(2)

Cycle Counter Alert Page: Cycle Count Alert Enable(1) Cycle Count Deadband Cycle Count Alert Point Cycle Counter(3) Travel Alerts Page: Hi/Lo Alert Enable(1) Hi Hi/Lo Lo Alert Enable(1) Lo Alert Point Hi Alert Point L L Lo Lo Al Alert P Point i Hi Hi Alert Point Alert Deadband

1. Alert parameters not applicable to instrument level HC. 2. These parameters only applicable to instruments with firmware revision 5, or later. 3. These parameters are downloaded only if the system preferences are set for automatic download. 4. These parameters only applicable to instruments with firmware revision 5, or later, in hardware revision 5, or later. 5. For instruments with firmware revision 4, 5, or 6 Critical NVM Fail cannot be enabled to cause an instrument shutdown. 6. For instruments with firmware revision 5 or 6, custom characterization is available. If Custom is selected for the Input Characteristic, the custom characteristic curve is downloaded.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Initial Setup and Calibration

12.2

Calibrating

12-13

Travel

After the Setup Wizard completes the setup, it asks you if you want to calibrate the instrument travel by performing the Auto Travel calibration procedure. If you click No, the ValveLink software returns you to the activity you were performing before you started the Setup Wizard. If you click Yes, the ValveLink software runs the Auto Travel calibration procedure.

WARNING Calibration can cause a sudden change in valve position and loss of process control. Before calibrating, make sure the instrument and its valve are isolated from the process to prevent injury or property damage.

Step 1:

For DVC5000 Series instruments, verify that the mode switches on the instrument printed wiring board are set to point-to-point. If the switches are not set for point-topoint, refer to the appropriate instrument instruction manual for information on setting the switches. Click the Next button to continue.

Step 2:

Mount the digital valve controller to the actuator. Or, if the instrument is already mounted, click the Next button to continue.

Step 3:

Verify that the equipment is connected as shown in figure 12-8. Click the Next button to continue. If this is a rotary valve actuator, step 3 is the last step for auto calibration. After this step, ValveLink automatically calibrates the instrument, using valve and actuator stops as the 0% and the 100% calibration points. If calibration is for a sliding-stem valve actuator, continue to step 4 (rotary valve actuators do not require crossover adjustment).

July 2000

VL2000 Series

12-14

Initial Setup and Calibration

PC with

Figure 12-8. Example DVC5000 Series Travel Auto Calibration Setup (HART Modem)

Step 4:

Select the desired crossover adjustment. If you select Default, this is the last step. An approximate value for the crossover is written to the instrument, followed by a series of actions that will auto calibrate the instrument. If you select Last, this is also the last step. The crossover setting currently stored in the instrument is used, followed by a series of actions that will auto calibrate the instrument. If you select Manual, go to step 5 for DVC5000 series instruments.

VL2000 Series

Step 5:

For DVC5000 Series instruments select the crossover adjustment source, either Analog or Digital. Click the Next button to continue.

Step 6:

Adjust the feedback arm to the crossover point, see figure 12-9. Click the Next button to continue. July 2000

12-15

Initial Setup and Calibration

Note: The feedback arm is at the crossover point when the slot is perpendicular to the valve stem. Figure 12-9. Crossover Point

For DVC5000 Series instruments, if you selected Analog in step 5, adjust the current source until the feedback arm is at the crossover point. If you selected Digital in step 5, (DVC5000 Series instruments) use the arrows to adjust the feedback arm to the crossover point. The small arrows produce a fine adjustment and may require several clicks before a change is perceptible. This is the last step. ValveLink automatically calibrates the instrument. Click OK to complete the calibration procedure. July 2000

VL2000 Series

12-16

12.3

Initial Setup and Calibration

Using

the

Performance

Tuner

Note The performance tuner is not available for instrument levels AC and HC.

The performance tuner is used to optimize the tuning of DVC5000 and DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers. It can be used on most sliding-stem and rotary designs, including Fisher Controls and other manufacturers’ products. Moreover, because the performance tuner can detect internal instabilities before they become apparent in the travel response, valves can be tuned remotely. Typically, the performance tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments mounted on larger actuators may take longer. When tuning a digital valve controller, the performance tuner detects the instrument revision level and tunes the system accordingly. In most cases, the performance tuner selects a tuning set that has a gain margin around 2. As with most self-tuning control algorithms, there are limitations to the use of the performance tuner. It should not be used on instruments mounted on valves with graphite packing at room temperature. The high friction of such packing causes severe stick-slip friction. The performance tuner also does not detect or adjust for flow restricting accessories placed between the digital valve controller and the actuator. This includes devices such as volume boosters, solenoid valves, and under–sized connecting tubing. The exception to this limitation are actuators equipped with Type 2625 volume boosters. The bypass screw on the volume booster should be set to no less than 1/2 turn of the seat. PS Sheet 62.1:FIELDVUE(H) Guidelines for Manually Tuning FIELDVUE Instruments with Firmware Revision 5 provides more information on tuning instruments used with flow restricting accessories. However, if the performance tuner is used on actuators equipped with flow restricting accessories, it will find and report a stable—although suboptimal—tuning set. In VL2000 Series

July 2000

Initial Setup and Calibration

12-17

Figure 12-10. Performance Tuner Dialog Box

this case, valve performance may be enhanced by manually adjusting the tuning parameters using the Expert tuning selection. See section 13 for more information on using Expert tuning. To access the performance tuner, select Performance Tuner from the Instrument Setup menu. Figure 12-10 shows the Performance Tuner dialog box. Click the checkbox if a Type 2625 volume booster is connected between the digital valve controller and the actuator. Click the Run button to start the performance tuner.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

12-18

Initial Setup and Calibration

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-1

Detailed Setup

Detailed Setup 13.1

Working with Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

13.1.1 13.1.2 13.1.2.1 13.1.2.2 13.1.2.3 13.1.2.4 13.1.2.5 13.1.2.6 13.1.2.7 13.1.3 13.1.4

13-4 13-5 13-5 13-5 13-6 13-6 13-6 13-6 13-7 13-8 13-8

13.2

Starting Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

13.3

Working with DVC5000 Series Instruments . . . . . . . 13-9

13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3

13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.4.4 13.4.5 13.4.6 13.4.7 13.4.8 13.4.9 13.4.10 July 2000

The Detailed Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Notes to a Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Dataset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Dataset From Another Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing Current Dataset Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring Data Between the Instrument and a Dataset . . Printing a Setup Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If You Canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Access Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Instrument Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Changing Instrument Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Resetting the Configuration Changed Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Setting Up DVC5000 Series Instruments . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Initial Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Response Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle Counter Alert Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deviation & Other Alerts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self Test Shut Down Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Alerts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Control Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-15 13-20 13-21 13-22 13-23 13-25 13-26 13-28 13-30 13-33

VL2000 Series

13-2

Detailed Setup

13.4.11 13.4.12 13.4.13 13.4.14 13.4.15

13.5 13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 13.5.5

Tuning Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Accum Alert Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Record and Burst Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Characterization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-34 13-37 13-39 13-41 13-44

Working with DVC5000f Series Instruments . . . . . 13-45 Changing the Device Tag and Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Block Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Transducer Block Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting and Clearing Fault State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-45 13-46 13-48 13-48 13-53

13.6 Setting Up DVC5000f Series Instruments . . . . . . . . 13.6.1 Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1.1 Options Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1.2 Alarms Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1.3 Other Alerts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1.4 Mode Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2 Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.1 General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.2 Valve Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.3 Actuator Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.4 Pressure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.5 Tuning Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.6 Travel Control Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.7 Input Characterization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.8 Deviation Alert Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.9 Travel Accum Alert Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.10 Other Alerts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.11 Mode Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.12 Travel Alerts Hi/Lo Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.13 Travel Alerts Hi Hi/Lo Lo Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2.14 Cycle Counter Alert Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-54 13-57 13-57 13-58 13-59 13-59 13-60 13-60 13-61 13-62 13-66 13-66 13-69 13-69 13-73 13-74 13-76 13-77 13-78 13-79 13-80

13.7 13.7.1 VL2000 Series

Setting Up a Valve Spec Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-82 Setting Up and Maintaining a Valve Spec Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . 13-82 July 2000

13-3

Detailed Setup

13.7.2 13.7.3 13.7.4 13.7.5 13.7.6

July 2000

Valve Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-83 13-83 13-84 13-84 13-85

VL2000 Series

13-4

Detailed Setup

Figure 13-1. ValveLink Detailed Setup Window

13.1

Working

with

Detailed

Setup1313

This section explains how to access and modify instrument detailed setup data available in the ValveLink database. For information on using the Setup Wizard and Performance Tuner, see section 12.

13.1.1

The Detailed Setup Window When you setup an instrument, you are defining the operating parameters for the instrument. You setup an instrument from the Detailed Setup window. To access the window, from the menu bar, select Instrument Setup& Detailed Setup, or click the Detailed Setup button on the toolbar, after you have opened an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. The Detailed Setup window is shown in figure 13-1. From the Detailed Setup window, you can retrieve data from your database or from the instrument. You can also modify this data and

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13-5

save the modifications in your database or download them to the instrument. The Detailed Setup window includes several pages. To view the data on a page, click the tab for that page to bring it to the front. The color of the page tabs indicate the status of the instrument data and dataset data. Until information is read from the instrument, the page tab remains gray. After the instrument information on a page is read from the instrument, and if the instrument data matches the data in the dataset, the tab for that page turns blue. On pages where the data read from the instrument is different from the dataset data, the page tab is yellow. Each page, except the Notes page, in the Detailed Setup window has two columns: one for instrument data and one for the ValveLink dataset. The instrument data is the setup data polled from the instrument. The ValveLink dataset is the data retrieved from the ValveLink software database. These columns allow you to easily compare the setup data in the instrument with the data in your database.

13.1.2

Working with Datasets Database data is stored in datasets. You can have many datasets for the same instrument. When you work with setup data, you can choose to save the last polled information from the instrument in a dataset. When you save a dataset, the dataset is given a name that includes the date and time corresponding to when the data was saved. You can also add a description of up to 40 characters to the name. To add the description, go to the Notes page by clicking on the Notes tab. Type your description in the Dataset Description box at the top of the page. You can create a dataset or review previously saved data.

13.1.2.1

Creating a Dataset As soon as you begin modifying setup parameters, the ValveLink software changes the value in the Datasets box near the top of the window to NEW. To save the new data when you finish making changes, click the Save Dataset button.

13.1.2.2

Adding Notes to a Dataset To add notes to a dataset, click the Notes tab on the Detailed Setup window. If desired, in the Dataset Description box, type or edit the

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-6

Detailed Setup

description for the dataset. The description appears with the name in the Dataset box at the top of the Detailed Setup window. In the Notes box, type or edit your note. Text automatically wraps to the next line as necessary; you do not need to press the Enter key at the end of each line. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor and select existing text to type over or delete. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Notes box to see more text. When finished, click the Save button to save your notes and description.

13.1.2.3

Reviewing Dataset Data To review previously saved data, click on the list box arrow to the right of the Datasets box to see a list of datasets. Click on a dataset to select it. The ValveLink software extracts the selected dataset from the database and displays the values in the ValveLink Dataset column.

13.1.2.4

Copying a Dataset From Another Tag To copy dataset data from another tag, click the Copy From Tag button. Select a tag and one of its datasets, then click OK. The software fills the fields in the ValveLink Dataset column with setup parameters from the selected tag’s dataset. You can download these values to the instrument or save the values as a new dataset.

13.1.2.5

Clearing Current Dataset Information When you select New in the Datasets box, the prompt, ‘‘Do you wish to clear the current dataset information?” appears. To replace the current dataset values and fill the fields in the ValveLink Dataset column with original default setup parameters, click YES. To retain the current dataset values in the dataset fields, click NO.

13.1.2.6

Deleting a Dataset To delete a dataset, select a previously saved dataset from the Dataset list box, then click the Delete Dataset button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-7

Detailed Setup

13.1.2.7

Transferring Data Between the Instrument and a Dataset A or between the Instrument column and the ValveLink Dataset column permit you to transfer data from one column to the other. Arrows that are highlighted indicate that the dataset data does not match the data stored in the instrument. To modify a parameter, click on the field you wish to update. To update the dataset data with data polled from the instrument (upload), click the right pointing arrow. To update the instrument data with dataset data (download), click the left pointing arrow. You can update all parameters on a page by clicking one of the arrows associated with Download/Upload Current PAGE Parameters near the top of the Detailed Setup window. To update all the setup data, click one of the arrows associated with Download/Upload ALL Parameters near the top of the Detailed Setup window.

Note Downloading the cycle counter, instrument clock, and Travel or Pressure Accumulator setup data with the Download/Upload ALL Parameters arrows requires a check in the checkbox on the Config page in the Preferences window. (From the menu bar, select Customize ValveLink, Preferences, then click the Config tab.)

There may be times when the instrument data does not match the dataset data, but still the download (left pointing) arrows are dim. This can happen if the instrument mode is In Service, or the instrument setup is protected. To change the instrument mode, refer to subsection 13.3.1. To change instrument protection, refer to subsection 13.3.2. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-8

13.1.3

Detailed Setup

Printing a Setup Report You can print a setup report to keep a record of your setup. To print a report, either click the printer button on the toolbar, or select Tag from the menu bar. From the Tag menu, select Print.

13.1.4

If You Can’t Access Detailed Setup If you cannot access Detailed Setup or upload or download parameters, talk to your system administrator for security authorization.

13.2

Starting

Detailed

Setup

If you are setting up an instrument that is new to your ValveLink database, you may want to retrieve the existing setup data from the instrument and save that data in your database. Or, you may want to copy the setup of an existing instrument in your database to this instrument. This will give you a starting point for your new instrument’s detailed setup. Then, you can begin making any modifications you want from this starting point. To bring data in from the instrument, you must open the instrument tag and be sure you are connected to it. If the instrument is connected, the connector symbols on the status bar will appear as joined. Click the Read Inst. button to poll the instrument and display the current instrument setup data in the instrument column. Once the instrument’s data is displayed in the Instrument column, you can click on one of the right pointing arrows to move the instrument’s data into the ValveLink Dataset column. Then, you can save this data in a dataset. For more information on moving and saving data, see the subsection 13.1.2. To copy an instrument’s setup data that exists in the ValveLink database, click the Copy From Tag button at the bottom of the Detailed Setup window. The software prompts you for the instrument that you want to copy. Next, it puts the instrument’s setup data into the ValveLink Dataset column. Then, you can modify the data for the new instrument and save the data in a dataset. The Detailed Setup window consists of several pages. Different data appears on these pages depending upon whether you are setting up a DVC5000 Series, or a DVC5000f Series instrument. You will need VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-9

Detailed Setup

to know how the parameters you are changing affect the instruments. The following subsections explain the meaning of the parameters for the two types of Instruments. A table within each subsection lists the configurable parameters in the instrument and the requirements for modifying these parameters, in terms of instrument mode and protection.

13.3

Working Instruments

with

DVC5000

13.3.1

Changing the Instrument Mode

Series

Note When the instrument is Out Of Service, the output will not track the input. A temporary means of process control may be necessary before taking the instrument out of service.

Some setup parameters can only be changed if the instrument is Out Of Service. To change the instrument mode: 1. Open or activate an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. 2. Access the Instrument Mode dialog box by: Clicking the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or Right clicking the instrument tag then, from the drop down menu, select Instrument Mode, or a. From the menu bar, select Instrument Setup. b. From the Instrument Setup menu, select Mode& Instrument. 3. In the dialog box that appears, shown in figure 13-2, click the Set Instrument In Service or Set Instrument Out Of Service button to July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-10

Detailed Setup

Figure 13-2. Instrument Mode Dialog Box Showing Out Of Service Warning

change the instrument mode and close the dialog box, or click the Cancel button to close the dialog box and leave the instrument mode unchanged. If the instrument mode is changed to Out Of Service and configuration parameters have been changed, the valve position stored in the instrument may or may not be the same as the actual valve position. Restoring the instrument to In Service may step the valve. When you change from Out Of Service to In Service, you can select Set In Service (Ramp) or Set In Service (Step). Select Set In Service (Ramp) to avoid stepping the valve when the instrument is restored to In Service. The ValveLink software ramps the actual valve position to the new position stored in the instrument over a 10 second time period. If the position stored in the instrument is within 5% of the actual position, no ramping occurs. If you select Set In Service (Step), the position stored in the instrument is immediately applied to the valve (the valve will be stepped). If you cannot change the instrument mode or instrument protection, contact your system administrator for security authorization.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-11

Detailed Setup

Note If one type of master takes an instrument Out Of Service, the same type must put it In Service. For example, if a device set up as a primary master takes an instrument Out Of Service, a device set up as a primary master must be used to place the instrument In Service.

13.3.2

Changing Instrument Protection

Note To remove the instrument protection requires installing a jumper across the instrument AUX+ and AUX– terminals. Refer to the instrument instruction manual for jumper details.

1. Open an instrument’s tag. 2. From the menu bar, select Instrument Setup. 3. From the Instrument Setup menu, select Change Protection. 4. Select the desired protection: Configuration & Calibration—Both setup and calibration are protected. This selection prohibits changing calibration and protected setup parameters. None—Neither setup or calibration are protected. This selection allows changing calibration and setup parameters. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-12

Detailed Setup

5. Click the Change button. Follow the prompts to attach and remove jumpers from the Auxiliary Input Terminals. If you cannot change the instrument mode or instrument protection, contact your system administrator for security authorization.

13.3.3

Resetting the Configuration Changed Flag When any of an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s setup parameters change, ValveLink software sets the Configuration Changed flag. When the flag is set,

appears in the status bar.

Only ValveLink software, set up as a primary master, or another primary master can clear the Configuration Changed flag. A hand-held communicating device, or any other secondary master, cannot clear the flag. To clear the Configuration Changed flag, from the menu bar, select Instrument Setup& Reset Config from the Instrument Setup menu and click the Reset button.

13.4

Setting

DVC5000

Series

Instruments

The setup parameters for the DVC5000 Series instruments appear on various pages within the Detailed Setup window. Table 13-1 lists these parameters and the conditions for modifying them, in terms of instrument mode and protection. The table also lists the Detailed Setup window pages where they appear and the page number in this guide for the detailed description. The conditions identify whether you can modify a parameter with the instrument mode set to In Service or Out Of Service and with the instrument protection set to Configuration Protected or None (Config Unprotected). For example, the table below shows that you can configure an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Control Mode with the instrument mode set to Out Of Service and with the instrument protection set to either Configuration Protected or None (unprotected). However, you cannot configure Control Mode with the instrument mode set to In Service. VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-13

Detailed Setup

Table 13-1. Conditions for Modifying DVC5000 Series Instrument Parameters Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

---------------

-------------

------

---------

---------------

-----

---------------

Initial Setup Page 13-15 Control Mode Restart Cont Mode Zero Control Signal Travel Cutoff Low (%) Valve Style Feedback Connection Travel Sensor Motion Inputs Page 13-20 Analog Input Units Input Range Low Input Range High Temperature Units Dynamic Response Page 13-21 Input Filter Time Min Opening Time Min Closing Time Dynamic Bypass Enab Cycle Counter Alert Page 13-22 Cycle Cnt Alert Enable Cycle Cnt Deadband Cycle Cnt Alert Point Cycle Counter Deviation & Other Alerts Page 13-23 Travel Dev Alert Enable Travel Dev Alert Pt (%) Travel Dev Time (sec) Aux Input Alert Enable Aux Input Alert State(1) Drive Alert Enable General Page 13-25 HART Tag Message Descriptor Date Valve Serial Number Instrument Serial Number Polling Address

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-14

Detailed Setup

Table 13-1. Conditions for Modifying DVC5000 Series Instrument Parameters (continued) Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-------------

-----

-------------

Self Test Shut Down Page 13-26 No Free Time RAM Fail Critical NVM Fail(2) Temp Sensor Fail Travel Sensor Fail Drive Current Fail(3) Travel Alerts Page 13-28 Hi/Lo Enable Hi Hi / Lo Lo Enable Lo Point (%) Hi Point (%) Lo Lo Point (%) Hi Hi Point (%) Deadband Travel Control Page 13-30 Travel Limit Low (%) Travel Limit High (%) Travel Cutoff Low (%) Travel Cutoff High (%) Travel Range Low (%)(4) Travel Range High (%)(4) Pressure Page 13-33 Supply Pressure Pressure Units Tuning Page 13-34 Tuning Set Standard Gain Standard Tvl Rate High Perf Gain(1) High Perf Tvl Rate(1) High Perf Press Rate(1) Travel Accum Alert Page 13-37 Tvl Acc Alert Enable Tvl Accum Deadband Tvl Accum Alert Pt Travel Accumulator

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-15

Detailed Setup

Table 13-1. Conditions for Modifying DVC5000 Series Instrument Parameters (continued) Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-- ---

---

-- ---

-----

Alert Record and Burst Page(5) 13-39 Instrument Clock Valve Alerts Enable Failure Alerts Enable(3) Misc Alerts Enable Burst Mode Enable Burst Command Input Characterization Page 13-41 Input Characterization Custom Points(1)

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown. 1. This parameter only applicable to instruments with firmware revision 5 or later. 2. For instruments with firmware revision 4 or later, Critical NVM Fail cannot be enabled to cause an instrument shutdown. 3. This parameter only applicable to instruments with firmware revision 5 or later, in hardware revision 5 or later. 4. For instruments with firmware revision 5 or later, Travel Range Low and Travel Range High are preset at 0 and 100%. Travel range values for these instruments cannot be downloaded. 5. Parameters on Alert Record and Burst Page only applicable to instruments with firmware revision 5 or later.

When you are setting up an instrument using the Detailed Setup window and you have a specific list of choices for a particular parameter, a list box appears for that parameter with a beside it. Click on the to see the list of valid choices.

13.4.1

Initial Setup Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Initial Setup page. Table 13-2 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-16

Detailed Setup

Table 13-2. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Initial Setup Page Parameters Control Mode Restart Ctrl Mode Zero Control Signal Travel Cutoff Low Valve Style Feedback Connection Travel Sensor Motion

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

---------------

-------------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Control Mode—Control Mode lets you define where the instrument reads its set point. You can choose one of the following control modes: ANALOG (RSP), or DIGITAL. A third control mode, TEST, can be only selected by the ValveLink software and is used whenever it needs to stroke the valve, such as in diagnostic tests. Choose ANALOG (RSP) if the instrument is to receive its set point over the 4–20 mA loop. Choose DIGITAL if the instrument is to receive its set point digitally via the HART communications link. Restart Control Mode—Restart Control Mode lets you choose which operating mode you want the instrument to be in after a restart. You can define the restart control mode as: Resume Last, ANALOG (RSP), or DIGITAL. Zero Control Signal—Identifies whether the valve is fully open or fully closed when the input is 0%. If you are not sure how to set the Zero Control Signal, disconnect the current source to the instrument. The resulting valve position is the Zero Control Signal. (With direct acting digital valve controllers, disconnecting the current source is the same as setting the output pressure to zero.) Travel Cutoff Low (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the low cutoff point for the travel. Below this cutoff, the drive signal is set to minimum when Zero Control Signal is closed or maximum when Zero Control Signal is open. Below this cutoff, the travel target is set to –23% of the ranged travel. No rate limiting is in effect when the low cutoff is exceeded. When Travel Cutoff Low is set, the Travel Limit Low is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. To deactivate Travel Cutoff Low, set it to –25%. VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-17

Detailed Setup

FEEDBACK ARM

TRAVEL SENSOR SHAFT

ADJUSTMENT ARM

CONNECTOR ARM

Figure 13-3. SStem - Standard Feedback Connection

Valid values are –25% to 100% and is always less than Travel Cutoff High.

Maintenance Tip Travel Cutoff Low of 0.5% is recommended to help ensure maximum shutoff seat loading.

Feedback Connection—For rotary valves, select Rotary-All. For sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkage consists of a connector arm, adjustment arm, and feedback arm (similar to that shown in figure 13-3), enter SStem-Standard. If the feedback linkage consists

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-18

Detailed Setup

ROLLER

STEM CONNECTOR

CAM

Figure 13-4. SS - Roller Feedback Connection

of a roller that follows a cam (similar to that shown in figure 13-4), enter SStem-Roller. Refer to table 13-3 to determine the Feedback Connection for Fisher, Baumann, and Gulde actuators. Travel Sensor Motionâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Clockwise or Counterclockwise. Establishes the proper feedback orientation. Determine the Travel Sensor Motion setting by viewing the rotation of the end of the travel sensor shaft, shown in figure 13-3. If increasing air pressure to the actuator causes the shaft to turn clockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the shaft to turn counterclockwise, enter Counterclockwise. Tables 13-3 and 13-4 show the required Travel Sensor Motion selections for Fisher Controls and other actuators.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-19

Detailed Setup

Table 13-3. Actuator Information for Initial Setup Actuator Mfr

Actuator Model

Actuator Size

Tuning set

513 or 513R

20 and 32

513—Clockwise 513R—Counterclockwise

585C or 585CR

25 50

F J

585C—Clockwise 585CR—Counterclockwise

30 34, 40 45, 50 46, 60, 70, 87, 80, 100 225 450 675 12, 20 25, 50 80 20, 30, 33 40 60, 70 20, 30, 33 40 60, 70 20 27, 75

H K L M M H J L D G K H K M H K M G L

32 54 70 GA1.21 GA1.31 GA1.41 P460, P462, P900 4.5 6 or 7

Expert(1) H I Expert(2) H K

A B C QP2,QP3 QP4 QP5

D H K H J K

657 or 667

Fisher Controls

1250 or 1250R System 9000 1051 or 1052 1051 or 1052 1066SR

Baumann

All

3024 Gulde 3025 Camflex II Masoneilan

NelesJamesbury

Sigma F, Minitorque, and Ball II Quadra-P ower II

Instrument Model

DVC5010

Feedback Connection

Travel Sensor Motion

657—Clockwise 667—Counterclockwise

SStem Standard

1250—Clockwise 1250R—Counterclockwise DVC5040

Fail-closed—Counterclockwise Fail-open—Clockwise

DVC5020

1051—Clockwise 1052—Clockwise Rotary - All

DVC5030

See table 13 13-4 4

Air to Extend—Clockwise Air to Retract—Counterclockwise SStem Standard

DVC5010 Air o opens—Counterclockwise ens Counterclockwise Air closes—Clockwise

M D H DVC5030

See description for Travel Sensor Motion parameter. arameter.

Rotary - All

1. For Baumann size 32, High Perf Gain=1.9, High Perf Travel Rate=11, High Pref Pressure Rate=70, Std Gain=0.6, Std Travel Rate=13 2. For Gulde size GA1.21, High Perf Gain=3.0, High Perf Travel Rate=11, High Pref Pressure Rate=70, Std Gain=1.0, Std Travel Rate=13

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-20

Detailed Setup

Table 13-4. Type DVC5030 Travel Sensor Motion Selection for Fisher Controls Actuators Type 1051, 1052 and 1066SR Actuators Mounting Style

13.4.2

Travel Sensor Motion

Clockwise

Counterclockwise

Clockwise

Inputs Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Inputs page. Table 13-5 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Database Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-5. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Inputs Page

Parameters Analog Input Units Input Range Low Input Range High Temperature Units

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Analog Input Units—mA or percent of 4–20 mA range. Units in which the analog input is displayed and maintained in the instrument. Input Range Low—mA or percent of 4–20 mA range. Analog input that corresponds to the Travel Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. Valid range is 4–24 mA or 0% to 125%, and is always less than Input Range High. Typical value is 4 mA. Input Range High—mA or percent of 4–20mA range. Analog input that corresponds to the Travel Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. Valid range is 4–24 mA or 0% to 125%, and is always greater than Input Range Low. Typical value is 20 mA. VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-21

Detailed Setup

Temperature Units—Degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. Temperature measured is from a sensor mounted on the instrument printed wiring board.

13.4.3

Dynamic Response Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Dynamic Response page. Table 13-6 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-6. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Dynamic Response Page

Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

Input Filter Time Min Opening Time Min Closing Time Dynamic Bypass Enab

---------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Input Filter Time—Time constant for the filter, in seconds. Minimum Opening Time—Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to increase through the entire ranged travel. This rate is applied to any travel increase. To deactivate, enter a value of 0 seconds. Valid entries are 0 to 400 seconds. Minimum Closing Time—Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to decrease through the entire ranged travel. This rate is applied to any travel decrease. To deactivate, enter a value of 0 seconds. Valid entries are 0 to 400 seconds. Dynamic Bypass Enable—YES or NO. With Dynamic Bypass enabled, the instrument dynamic response to input changes is similar to the first order lag exhibited by a Fisher Controls Type 546 electro-pneumatic transducer connected directly to a large volume spring and diaphragm actuator. This provides dampening to the final control element and can stabilize some process loops. It is generally beneficial in fast process July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-22

Detailed Setup

loops and improves process control. (See Fisher Controls technical monograph TM–36 for more about positioner/booster guidelines.) Position feedback to the instrument is maintained with Dynamic Bypass enabled. Static performance is not affected.

13.4.4

Cycle Counter Alert Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Cycle Counter Alert page. Table 13-7 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-7. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Cycle Counter Alert Page

Parameters Cycle Cnt Alert Enab Cycle Count Deadband Cycle Count Alert Pt Cycle Counter

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Cycle Counter Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables the checking of the difference between the Cycle Counter and the Cycle Counter Alert Point. Cycle Counter Alert is active when the value exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less than the alert point. Cycle Counter Deadband—Percent of ranged travel. The area around the travel reference point established at the last increment of the Cycle Counter. This area must be exceeded before a change in travel can be counted as a cycle. See figure 13-5. Valid entries are 0% to 100%. Typical value is between 2% and 5%. Cycle Counter Alert Point (%)—Value of the Cycle Counter which, when exceeded, activates the Cycle Counter Alert. Valid entries are 0 to 4 billion cycles. Cycle Counter—Cycle Counter records the number of times the travel changes direction. The change in direction must occur afVL2000 Series

July 2000

13-23

Detailed Setup

Deadband exceeded, new Reference Point established

Deadband Reference Point Deadband (+/â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 5%)

Point at which cycle is counted.

Figure 13-5. Cycle Counter Deadband (set at 10%)

ter the deadband has been exceeded before it can be counted as a cycle. See figure 13-5. Reset the cycle counter by configuring it as zero. The Cycle Counter parameter is not downloaded when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters unless you set a system preference requesting it. To transfer this parameter setting to the instrument, either click the download arrow next to the field or set a system preference to automatically download the Cycle Counter parameter when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters. To set the system preference, select Preferences from the Customize ValveLink menu and click the Configuration page. Click the Download check box to place an X in it.

13.4.5

Deviation & Other Alerts Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Deviation & Other Alerts page. Table 13-8 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-24

Detailed Setup

Table 13-8. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Deviation & Other Alerts Page Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

Travel Dev Alert Enab Travel Dev Alert Pt Travel Dev Time Aux Input Alert Enab Aux Input Alert State Drive Alert Enab

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Travel Deviation Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables checking of the difference between the target and the ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. It remains active until the difference is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Point.

Note For firmware revision 3, the Travel Deviation Alert remains active until the travel difference between the target and the ranged travel is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Point minus the Travel Alert Deadband.

Travel Deviation Alert Point (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Alert point for the difference, expressed in percent, between the targeted travel and the ranged travel. When the difference exceeds the alert point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. Valid entries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set to 5%. Travel Deviation Time —Seconds. Time that the travel must exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point before the alert is active. Valid entries are 1 to 60 seconds. Typically this is set to 20 seconds. Auxiliary Input Alert Enable—YES or NO. Checks the status of auxiliary input, which is a discrete input. When enabled the AuxilVL2000 Series

July 2000

13-25

Detailed Setup

iary Input Alert is active when the auxiliary input terminals are either open or closed, depending upon the selection for the Auxiliary Input Alert State Auxiliary Input Alert State—OPEN or CLOSED. Determines which state of the contacts (open or closed) connected to the auxiliary input terminals causes the auxiliary input alert to be active. Drive Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables checking of the drive signal and calibrated travel. If one of the following conditions exists for more than 20 seconds, the Drive Alert is active. If none of the conditions exist, the alert is cleared. If Zero Control Signal is defined as Closed drive signal < 10% and calibrated travel > 3% drive signal > 90% and calibrated travel < 97% If Zero Control Signal is defined as Open drive signal < 10% and calibrated travel < 97% drive signal > 90% and calibrated travel > 3%

13.4.6

General Page The following are the parameters that appear on the General page. Table 13-9 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-9. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, General Page

Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

HART Tag Message Descriptor Date Valve Serial Number Inst Serial Num Polling Address

---------------

-----

---------------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown

HART Tag—An eight-character name that identifies the physical instrument. The status bar displays the HART tag of the instrument whose ValveLink database tag is currently open. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-26

Detailed Setup

Message—A text message of up to 32 characters. May be used to record maintenance history. Descriptor—Brief description of the instrument. Date—When the instrument was last calibrated or next date assigned for calibrating the instrument. Valve Serial Number—Serial number of the valve on which the digital valve controller is mounted. Instrument Serial Number—Serial number assigned to the printed wiring board.This serial number should match the serial number on the instrument nameplate. Polling Address—Address of the instrument. If the digital valve controller is used in a point-to-point configuration, the polling address is 0. If it is used in a multidrop configuration, the polling address is set to a value between 0 and 15.

Note Some HART multiplexers can communicate only with instruments that have a polling address of 0. Therefore, ValveLink software communicating over a multiplexer network can set the polling address to 0 only. However, be aware that if the polling address is changed to other than 0 with ValveLink software communicating via a HART modem, the instrument will not be able to communicate over a multiplexer network.

13.4.7

Self Test Shut Down Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Self Test Shut Down page. Table 13-10 lists the conditions for modifying these pa-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-27

Detailed Setup

rameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-10. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Self Test Shut Down Page Parameters No Free Time RAM Fail Critical NVM Fail Temp Sensor Fail Travel Sensor Fail Drive Current Fail

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-------------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Enabling the following criteria causes the instrument to shutdown if the indicated failure occurs. Upon shutdown, the instrument attempts to drive its output pressure to the zero current condition and no longer executes its control function. In addition, the appropriate failure statuses are set. See subsection 15.2.1.1.2 for further details about failures. No Free Time—When enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure associated with No Free Time. RAM Fail—When enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure associated with RAM (random access memory). Critical NVM Fail—When enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure associated with critical NVM (non-volatile memory).

Note For instruments with firmware revision 4 or 5, the critical NVM fail criteria cannot be enabled to cause instrument shutdown.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-28

Detailed Setup

Temperature Sensor Fail—When enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure associated with the internal temperature sensor. Travel Sensor Fail—When enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure associated with the travel sensor. Drive Current Fail—When enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is a difference between the drive signal and drive current. Drive Current Fail is only available with instrument firmware revision 5 in hardware revision 5. If the ValveLink software is connected to an instrument with firmware revision 3 or 4, or firmware revision 5 in hardware revision 4, the dataset to instrument transfer arrow is dimmed. If a configuration from an instrument with firmware revision 3 or 4 is transferred to the dataset, Drive Current Fail will be cleared.

13.4.8

Travel Alerts Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Alerts page. Table 13-11 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-11. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Travel Alerts Page

Parameters Hi/Lo Enab Hi Hi/Lo Lo Enab Lo Pt (%) Hi Pt (%) Lo Lo Pt (%) Hi Hi Pt (%) Deadband

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Hi/Lo Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, checks ranged travel against the travel alert Hi and Lo Points. Travel alert high or VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-29

Detailed Setup

Alert is Set

Travel Alert High Point

Travel Alert Deadband

Alert is Cleared

Figure 13-6. Travel Alert Deadband

low is active if either the Hi or Lo point is exceeded. Once a Hi or Lo point is exceeded, the ranged travel must clear that point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 13-6. Hi Hi/Lo Lo Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, checks ranged travel against the travel alert Hi Hi and Lo Lo points. Travel alert Hi Hi or Lo Lo is active if either the Hi Hi or Lo Lo point is exceeded. Once a Hi Hi or Lo Lo point is exceeded, the ranged travel must clear that point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 13-6. Lo Point—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Lo alert. Valid entries are –25% to 125%. Hi Point—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Hi alert. Valid entries are –25% to 125%. Lo Lo Point—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Lo Lo alert. Valid entries are –25% to 125%. Hi Hi Point—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Hi Hi alert. Valid entries are –25% to 125%. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-30

Detailed Setup

Deadband—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Travel required to clear a travel alert, once it has been activated. The deadband applies to the travel Hi/Lo alerts and the travel Hi Hi/Lo Lo alerts. Valid entries are –25% to 125%. See figure 13-6.

Note For firmware revision 3, the Travel Alert Deadband applies to the Travel Deviation as well as Travel Hi/Lo alerts and Travel Hi Hi/Lo Lo alerts.

13.4.9

Travel Control Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Control page. Table 13-12 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-12. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Travel Control Page

Parameters

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

Travel Limit Low (%) Travel Limit High (%) Travel Cutoff Low (%) Travel Cutoff High (%) Travel Range Low (%) Travel Range High (%)

-------------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Travel Limit Low—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the minimum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for the valve. During operation, the travel target will not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit Low is set, the Travel Cutoff Low is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. To deactivate Travel Limit Low, set it to –25%. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13-31

Valid values are –25% to 100% and is always less than Travel Limit High. Travel Limit High—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the maximum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for the valve. During operation, the travel target will not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit High is set, the Travel Cutoff High is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. To deactivate Travel Limit High, set it to 125%. Valid values are 0% to 125% and always greater than Travel Limit Low. Travel Cutoff Low—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the low cutoff point for the travel. Below this cutoff, the drive signal is set to minimum when Zero Control Signal is closed or maximum when Zero Control Signal is open. Below this cutoff, the travel target is set to –23% of the ranged travel. No rate limiting is in effect when the low cutoff is exceeded. When Travel Cutoff Low is set, the Travel Limit Low is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. To deactivate Travel Cutoff Low, set it to –25%. Valid values are –25% to 100% and is always less than Travel Cutoff High.

Maintenance Tip Travel Cutoff Low of 0.5% is recommended to help ensure maximum shutoff seat loading.

Travel Cutoff High—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the high cutoff point for the travel. Above this cutoff, the drive signal is set to maximum when Zero Control Signal is closed or minimum when Zero Control Signal is open. Above this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123% of the ranged travel. No rate limiting is in effect when the high cutoff is exceeded. When a Travel Cutoff High is set, the Travel Limit High is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. To deactivate Travel Cutoff High, set it to 125%. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-32

Detailed Setup

Calibrated Travel, %

Travel Range High

The shape of this line is dependent on Input Characterization.

Travel Range Low

Input Range Low

Analog Input mA or % of 4–20 mA

Input Range High

Figure 13-7. Calibrated Travel/Analog Input Relationship (Zero Control Signal =Closed).

Valid values are 0% to 125% and always greater than Travel Cutoff Low. Travel Range Low—(Instruments with firmware revision 3 and 4 only) Percent (%) of calibrated travel. Travel in percent of calibrated travel that corresponds to the Input Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. See figures 13-7 and 13-8. Valid range is 0% to 100% and always less than Travel Range High. Typical setting is 0%. Travel Range High—(Instruments with firmware revision 3 and 4 only) Percent (%) of calibrated travel. Travel in percent of calibrated travel that corresponds to the Input Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. See figures 13-7 and 13-8. Valid range is 0% to 100% and always greater than Travel Range Low. Typical setting is 100%. VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-33

Detailed Setup

Calibrated Travel, %

Travel Range High

The shape of this line is dependent on Input Characterization.

Travel Range Low

Input Range Low

Analog Input mA or % of 4â&#x20AC;&#x201C;20 mA

Input Range High

Figure 13-8. Calibrated Travel/Analog Input Relationship (Zero Control Signal =Open).

Note For instruments with firmware revision 5 or later, the Travel Range High and Low values are preset in the instrument. Travel Range High is set at 100%; Travel Range Low is set at 0%. Travel range values for these instruments cannot be downloaded.

13.4.10

Pressure Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Pressure page. Table 13-13 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-34

Detailed Setup

terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Table 13-13. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Pressure Page Parameters Supply Pressure Pressure Units

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-----

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Supply Pressureâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Adjusts the range of the instrument pressure sensor. Supply pressure provides a list of 4 pressure ranges to choose from. Select the pressure range which includes the instrument supply pressure. Valid supply pressure ranges include: Up to 20 psi/1.4 bar/140 kPa, 21 to 35 psi/1.5 to 2.4 bar/141 to 240 kPa, 36 to 60 psi/2.5 to 4.2 bar/241 to 420 kPa, and 61 to 100 psi/4.3 to 7.0 bar/421 to 700 kPa. Pressure Unitsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;psi, bar, or kPa. Units in which the output pressure is displayed and maintained in the instrument. When setting up, select the units you want to use for measuring output pressure. Valid entries are psi, bar, or kPa.

13.4.11

Tuning Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Tuning page. Table 13-14 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-35

Detailed Setup

Table 13-14. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Tuning Page Parameters Tuning Set Standard Gain Standard Tvl Rate High Perf Gain High Perf Tvl Rate High Perf Press Rate

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-------------

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Tuning Setâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Preset values which identify gain and rate settings. Eleven tuning sets, C through M, provide preselected values. Table 13-15 lists the preselected high performance and standard gain and rate values for these tuning sets. Instruments with firmware 5 and later normally use the high performance values. However, should the pressure sensor fail, the unit will continue to operate using the standard values. Instruments with firmware revisions 3 and 4 use the standard values only. Table 13-3 lists tuning set guidelines for Fisher Controls and other actuators. Tuning set M provides the fastest response and C provides the slowest response. Instruments with firmware revision 5 used with larger actuators may show reduced stability with lower tuning sets. Lower tuning sets use lower gain values but also use lower rate values thus reducing the dampening. User Adjusted allows you to modify the high performance and standard gain. The rate values are automatically adjusted depending upon the gain values you select. Selecting Expert allows you to modify the gain and rate values independently.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-36

Detailed Setup

Note The User Adjusted selection allows you to adjust the gain over a wider range than that provided by the tuning sets. The Expert selection allows you to adjust both gain and rate over a wider range than that provided by the tuning sets.

WARNING Changes to the Tuning Set can result in valve/actuator instability and loss of process control. To avoid personal injury or property damage, be sure the instrument and its valve are isolated from the process when adjusting tuning.

Table 13-15. Gain and Rate Values for Preselected Tuning Sets T ning Set Tuning

High Performance Gain

Standard

Travel Rate

Pressure Rate

Gain

Travel Rate

C D E F G

0.8 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.8

10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.5

75 43 33 27 35

0.40 0.50 0.60 0.75 1.00

13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0

H I J K L M

3.4 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0

11.6 12.7 14.5 16.2 18.0 18.0

51 62 50 42 31 25

1.30 2.00 3.00 3.99 5.25 6.99

13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0

For user adjusted, the high performance and standard gain may be independently adjusted over the range of 0.01 to 25. For expert, standard gain and rate may be independently adjusted over the range 0.01 to 25. High performance gain may be adjusted over the range 0.01 to 20; high performance travel rate may be adjusted over the range 5 to 25; high performance pressure rate may be adjusted over the range 0 to 255.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-37

Detailed Setup

Standard Gain—Amount of change in the output proportional to the amount of change in the input. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revisions 3 and 4 always use the standard gain values. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 or later use the standard gain values if the pressure sensor fails. Standard Tvl Rate—Amount of change in the travel proportional to the rate of change in the input. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revisions 3 and 4 always use the standard travel rate values. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 or later use the standard rate values if the pressure sensor fails. High Perf. Gain—High performance gain, normally used by an instrument with firmware revision 5 or later. High Perf. Tvl Rate—High performance travel rate, normally used by an instrument with firmware revision 5 or later. High Perf. Press Rate—High performance pressure rate, normally used by an instrument with firmware revision 5 or later.

13.4.12

Travel Accum Alert Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Accum Alert page. Table 13-16 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-16. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Travel Accum Alert Page Parameters Tvl Acc Alert Enab Tvl Accum Deadband Tvl Accum Alert Pt Travel Accumulator

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Travel Accumulator Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables checking of the difference between the Travel Accumulator value July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-38

Detailed Setup

Deadband exceeded, new Reference Point established

Deadband Reference Point Deadband (+/– 5%)

This amount of change is added to the Travel Accumulator.

Figure 13-9. Travel Accumulator Deadband (set at 10%)

and the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the Travel Accumulator Point. It is cleared after you reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than the alert point. Travel Accumulator Deadband—Percent of ranged travel. This is the area around the travel reference point established at the last increment of the accumulator. This area must be exceeded before a change in travel can be accumulated. See figure 13-9. Valid entries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set between 2% and 5%. Travel Accumulator Alert Point—Percent of ranged travel. Value of the Travel Accumulator which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Accumulator Alert. Valid entries are 0% to 4 billion %. Travel Accumulator—Percent of ranged travel. Total change in travel since the accumulator was last cleared. Value of the Travel Accumulator increments when the magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel Accumulator Deadband. See figure 13-9. To reset the Travel Accumulator, set it to zero. The Travel Accumulator parameter is not downloaded when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters unless you set a system preference requesting it. To transfer this parameter VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-39

Detailed Setup

setting to the instrument, either click the download arrow next to the field or set a system preference to automatically download the Travel Accumulator parameter when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters. To set the system preference, select Preferences from the Customize ValveLink menu, then check the Download box on the Config page.

13.4.13

Alert Record and Burst Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Alert Record and Burst page. Table 13-17 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-17. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Alert Record and Burst Page Parameters Instrument Clock Valve Alerts Enable Failure Alerts Enable Misc Alerts Enable Burst Mode Enable Burst Command

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-- ---

---

-- ---

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

This page is only available for DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 or later. If the ValveLink software is connected to an instrument with firmware revision 3 or 4, no instrument values are displayed and the dataset values cannot be downloaded. Instrument Clockâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Permits setting the instrument clock. When an alert is stored in the alert record, the date and time (obtained from the instrument clock) that the alert occurred is also stored in the record. The instrument clock uses a 24-hour format. Enter the date and time in the form: DD MMM YYYY HH:MM Valve Alerts Enableâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Enables all active alerts from the Valve Alerts group to be stored in the alert record. When any alert from an enabled group becomes active, active alerts in all enabled groups are stored. Alerts in the Valve Alerts group are listed in table 13-18. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-40

Detailed Setup

Table 13-18. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record Alert Group

Valve Alerts

Failure Alerts

Miscellaneous Alerts

Alerts Include in Group Travel 1 low Travel 1 high Travel 2 low Travel 2 high Travel deviation Drive signal No free time RAM fail Drive current fail NVM fail Temperature sensor fail Pressure sensor fail Travel sensor fail Auxiliary input

Failure Alerts Enable—Enables all active alerts from the Failure Alerts group to be stored in the alert record. The Failure Alerts Group is only available for instruments with firmware revision 5 in hardware revision 5. When any alert from an enabled group becomes active, active alerts in all enabled groups are stored. Alerts in the Failure Alerts group are listed in table 13-18. Misc Alerts Enable—Enables active alerts from the Miscellaneous Alerts group to be stored in the alert record. When any alert from an enabled group becomes active, active alerts in all enabled groups are stored. Alerts in the Miscellaneous Alerts group are listed in table 13-18. To view the alert record, select Instrument Alert Record from the Diagnostics menu. See subsection 15.2.3 for more information. Burst Mode Enable—Permits enabling burst mode. Enabling burst mode provides continuous communication from the digital valve controller. All DVC5000 Series digital valve controllers with firmware revision 5 or later are capable of burst mode communication. Burst mode applies only to the transmission of burst mode data (travel, input current, actuator pressure, and auxiliary input status). Access to information in the instrument is normally obtained through the poll/response of HART communication. The ValveLink software or the control system may request any of the information that is normally available while the instrument is in burst mode. Between each VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-41

Detailed Setup

burst mode message sent by the instrument, a short pause allows the ValveLink software or the control system to initiate a request. The instrument receives the request, processes the reponse message, and then continues “bursting” the burst mode data. Burst Command—There are four burst mode commands. Command 3 is recommended for use with the Rosemount Model 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-analog signal converter. This command provides the following variables: Primary variable—travel in % of ranged travel. Secondary variable—travel setpoint in % of ranged travel. Tertiary variable—actuator pressure in psig, bar, or kPa. Fourth variable—auxiliary input status in %; 0% equals open, 100% equals closed.

13.4.14

Input Characterization Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Input Characterization page. Table 13-19 lists the conditions for modifying these parameters in terms of instrument mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-19. Conditions for Modifying Instrument Parameters, Input Characterization Page Parameters Input Characterization Custom Points.

In Service/ Config Protected

In Service/ Config Unprotected

Out Of Service/ Config Protected

Out Of Service/ Config Unprotected

-----

indicates the parameter may be modified when the instrument mode and protection are as shown.

Input Characteristic—Defines the relationship between the ranged travel and ranged setpoint. Ranged setpoint is the input to the characterization function. If the zero control signal equals closed, then a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 0%. If the zero control signal equals open, a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%. Ranged travel is the output from the characterization function. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-42

Detailed Setup

You can select from the three fixed input characteristics shown in figure 13-10 or you can define a custom characteristic. Figure 13-10 shows the relationship between the ranged travel and ranged setpoint for the fixed input characteristics, assuming the Zero Control Signal has been configured as closed. Custom Pointsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Permits you to specify 37 points on a custom characteristic curve. Each point defines a travel target in % of ranged travel for a corresponding travel set point in % of ranged setpoint. Set point values range from â&#x20AC;&#x201C;6.25% to 106.25% in 3.125% increments. Custom characterization is only available for DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 or later. If the ValveLink software is connected to an instrument with firmware revision 3 or 4, the dataset to instrument transfer arrow is dimmed. If a configuration from an instrument with firmware revision 3 or 4 is transferred to the dataset, the custom characterization points are cleared. To define a custom characteristic, in the table under Database Dataset, position the cursor in the Tvl Target column for the set point you wish to define (37 set points are available). Six set points are displayed at one time; use the scroll arrows to display other set points. Enter the desired travel value corresponding to the set point. You can begin your custom characteristic by filling the ranged travel values with a predefined characteristic: linear, quick opening, or equal percentage. Click the Fill button and the ValveLink software will ask you to select one of the predefined characteristics. You can then modify the characteristic as described in the preceding paragraph. You can also select Import from the list. Selecting Import permits you to import a file that contains the values to be used to fill in the characterization curve. This file must be a standard text file, editable with any text editor. It should contain the Y (Travel Target) values for each of the points on the custom characteristic curve. The points can be separated by tabs, spaces, or each point can be on a separate line (or any combination). The custom characterization curve starts at â&#x20AC;&#x201C;6.25% and continues to 106.25% with increments of 3.125%. This means there are a total of 37 points that should be provided. The following is a sample of the first five lines of a file with one point per line: VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-43

Detailed Setup

100

Ranged Travel, %

125

Ranged Travel, %

125

–25

–25 –25

Ranged Setpoint, % 100

Input Characteristic = Linear

125

–25

Ranged Setpoint, %

100

125

Input Characteristic = Equal Percentage

125

Ranged Travel, %

100

–25 –25

Ranged Setpoint, % 100

125

Input Characteristic = Quick Opening

Figure 13-10. Ranged Travel Versus Ranged Setpoint for Various Input Characteristics (Zero Control Signal = Closed)

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-44

Detailed Setup

–3.125 –1.562 0.0 0.244 1.562 If the above example file were imported, set point –6.25% (which is the first point on the curve) would be assigned a travel target of –3.125%, set point –3.125% (point 2 on the curve) would have a travel target of –1.562% and so on. All travel targets that do not have a value in the file will be set to zero (points 6 through 37 in the above example). The above five points could also have been in the file on a single line as: –3.125 –1.562 0.0 0.244 1.562 with spaces or tabs between the numbers serving as delimiters. With input characterization you can modify the overall characteristic of the valve and instrument combination. Selecting an equal percentage, quick opening, or custom (other than linear) input characteristic modifies the overall valve and instrument characteristic. However, if you select the linear input characteristic, the overall valve and instrument characteristic is the characteristic of the valve, which is determined by the valve trim (i.e., the plug or cage). The factory default setting for input characterization is linear.

13.4.15

Notes Page This page permits you to add or edit notes associated with instrument configuration. Type your note in the Notes box. Text automatically wraps to the next line as necessary; you do not need to press the Enter key at the end of each line. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor and select existing text to type over or delete. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Notes box to see more text.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-45

Detailed Setup

Figure 13-11. Changing the Device Address.

13.5

Working Instruments

with

DVC5000f

Series

13.5.1

Changing the Device Tag and Address If the ValveLink computer is connected to a single instrument or to a segment where the NIâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;FBUS card is providing the LAS function, you can change the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag and address. If the instrument is at a temporary address, you can change the address to a working address to set up the instrument. ValveLink software will not connect to an instrument with a temporary address. To change the device tag or address, from the Instrument Setup menu select Detailed Setup then Device Tag and Address. On the Change Device Tag and Address window, shown in figure 13-11, the instrument address is shown as the current address. You change the current address to a temporary address or to a working address. To

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-46

Detailed Setup

change the address, enter the new address for the device, address 35 is preferred.. If no address is entered, the ValveLink software will select the next available address between 21 and 35. You can enter an address between 16 and 251, however, addresses between 16 and 20 are reserved for the LAS (Link Active Scheduler). Addresses between 248 and 251 are temporary addresses. Click the Set Address option button then click the Change Address button to assign the new address. Taking the instrument offline changes the current address to a temporary address but does not change the device tag. To take the instrument offline, click the Take Offline option button then click the Change Address button. Taking the instrument offline does not change the device tag nor the tag in the ValveLink database. You can also make the instrument a spare by clicking the Make Spare option button then clicking the Change Address button. When you make the instrument a spare, the current address is changed to a temporary address and the device tag is changed to the device ID. This does not affect the tag in the ValveLink database. To change the device tag, enter the new tag in the tag edit field, then click the Write Device Tag button. This changes the tag stored in the instrument and also changes the tag in the ValveLink database. When you have made all the tag and address changes, click the Done button.

13.5.2

Changing the Block Mode Setting up and calibrating a DVC5000f Series digital valve controller requires modifying parameters in the resource and transducer blocks. The Block Mode parameter determines the source of the set point, the destination of the output, and how the block executes. In some cases, the ability to modify a block parameter is also determined by the Block Mode. The Block Mode is a structured parameter composed of the subindexes actual, target, permitted, and normal. The permitted and normal subindexes are defined on the Mode page of the appropriate block. The target and actual mode subindexes are defined below: Target modeâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;The target mode is the mode requested by the user or host system. Only one mode is allowed to be set and it must

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-47

Detailed Setup

be a permitted mode as defined by the permitted subindex of the mode parameter. Actual modeâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;The actual mode is the current mode of the block. The actual mode may differ from the target modes due to operating conditions of the block.

Note When the transducer block is Out Of Service, the valve will move to the air fail position and will not track set point changes to the block. A temporary means of process control may be necessary before taking the transducer block out of service.

WARNING Setting the Resource block to Out of Service sets all function blocks within the instrument to Out of Service, including the PID block. If the PID block is used to control another loop, to avoid personal injury or property damage due to an uncontrolled loop, be sure some other means are provided to control the loop before taking the Resource block Out of Service.

To change the Target Mode of a block: 1. Open the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. 2. Click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or a. From the menu bar, select Instrument Setup& Mode. b. Then select Mode& Block. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-48

Detailed Setup

Figure 13-12. Block Mode Dialog Box with Drop Down List of Transducer Block Target Modes

3. In the dialog box that appears, shown in figure 13-12. Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without making any changes, or click the list arrow next to the Target Mode for the desired block to see the permitted modes. Click on the desired mode to select it. If the block is operating normally the Actual mode should reflect the selected Target mode. 4. Click the OK button to close the dialog box. If the transducer block mode is changed to Out Of Service and setup parameters have been changed, the valve position stored in the instrument may or may not be the same as the actual valve position. Placing the block back in service may step the valve. If you cannot change the block mode or block protection, contact your system administrator for security authorization.

13.5.3

Changing the Transducer Block Protection Protection is provided for certain transducer block parameters to prevent inadvertently overwriting key data. There are four types of protection: Calibration, Configuration, Mechanical, and Tuning. Table 13-21 lists those parameters affected by a type of protection. You may change protection from the Transducer Block Mode page.

13.5.4

Restarting the Instrument You can restart the instrument to reset parameters, links, etc. within the instrument. However, due to the effect that a restart can have on

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13-49

the instrument, and therefore the control loop, restarting the instrument should be used cautiously and only as a last measure. There are two different restarts: Restart Processor, and Restart with Defaults. Following is a brief description of the effects for each of these restarts. Restart Defaultsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Performing a Restart with Defaults should be done with care. This restart resets the static parameters for all of the blocks in the instrument to their initialized state. It also disconnects all links within the instrument. After performing a Restart with Defaults, a Restart Processor also should be performed. Parameters that are set to their default state and their default values are listed in table 13-20. Restart Processorâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Performing a Restart Processor has the same effect as removing power from the instrument and re-applying power.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-50

Detailed Setup

Table 13-20. Parameters Modified by Restart with Default (continued) Index Number

Parameter

Initial Value Resource Block Parameters

1 2 3 4

Static Revision Block Tag Strategy Alert Key

0 spaces 0 0

9 10 11 12 13 15 17

Block Mode Permitted Normal DD Resource Manufacturer ID Device Type Device Revision DD Revision Hardware Types Features

18 19 20 21 22

Feature Select Cycle Type Cycle Select Minimum Cycle Time Memory Size

same as Features Scheduled Scheduled 3200 (1/32 millisecond) 0

23 26 27 31 32

NVM Cycle Time Rcas Timeout Rout Timeout Max Alerts Poss Max Alerts Allow

5760,000 (1/32 millisecond) 640000 (1/32 millisecond) 640000 (1/32 millisecond) 15 Max Alerts Poss

33 34 37

640000 Unlocked

38 39

Confirm Time Write Lock Alarm Summary Disabled Acknowledge Option Write Priority

1 2 3 4

Static Revision Block Tag Strategy Alert Key

Auto or Out of Service Auto spaces 5100 5400 07 01 0002 Reports Enabled Faultstate Enabled Soft write lock Enabled Output Readback Enabled

0 Autoacknowledge Disabled 0 AO Block Parameters 0 spaces 0 0 –Continued–

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-51

Detailed Setup

Table 13-20. Parameters Modified by Restart with Default (continued) Index Number 8 9 11

Parameter

Initial Value

Set Point Output PV Scale Engineering Units at 100% Engineering Units at 0% Units Index Decimal

100 0 % 2

14 15

Transducer Scale Engineering Units at 100% Engineering Units at 0% Units Index Decimal I/O Options Status Options

100 only 0 only % only 2 All I/O options disabled All options disabled

18 19 20 21 22

SP Rate Down SP Rate Up SP Hi Lim SP Lo Lim Channel

+Infinity (rate limiting not in effect) +Infinity (rate limiting not in effect) 100 0 0

23 24 27

Fault State Time Fault State Value Shed Options

1 2 3 4

Static Revision Block Tag Strategy Alert Key

Block Mode Permitted Normal PV Scale Engineering Units at 100% Engineering Units at 0% Units Index Decimal

13 14

Out Scale Engineering Units at 100% Engineering Units at 0% Units Index Decimal Control Options Status Options

0 0 All options disabled PID Block Parameters 0 spaces 0 0 Out of Service until block is configured

100 0 % 2 100 0 % 2 0 0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C;Continuedâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-52

Detailed Setup

Table 13-20. Parameters Modified by Restart with Default (continued) Index Number

Parameter

Initial Value

16 17 19 20 21

PV Filter Time Bypass SP Rate Down SP Rate Up SP Hi Lim

0 On +Infinity +Infinity 100

22 23 24 25 26

SP Lo Lim Gain Reset Bal Time Rate

0 1 1000 0 0

28 29 30 34 37

100 0 0.5% 0

46 47 48 49 50 51

Out Hi Lim Out Lo Lim Back Cal Hysteresis Shed Option Track Scale Engineering Units at 100% Engineering Units at 0% Units Index Decimal Feed Forward Scale Engineering Units at 100% Engineering Units at 0% Units Index Decimal Feed Forward Gain Alarm Summary Disabled Acknowledge Option Alarm Hysteresis Hi Hi Priority Hi Hi Limit Hi Priority Hi Limit

52 53 54 55

Lo Priority Lo Limit Lo Lo Priority Lo Lo Limit

0 –Infinity 0 –Infinity

56 57 58 59

Deviation Hi Pri Deviation Hi Lim Deviation Lo Pri Deviation Lo Lim

0 +Infinity 0 –Infinity

42 45

100 0 % 2 100 0 % 2 0 0 Auto Acknowledge disabled 0.5% 0 +Infinity 0 +Infinity

–Continued–

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-53

Detailed Setup

Table 13-20. Parameters Modified by Restart with Default (continued) Index Number

Parameter

Initial Value Transducer Block Parameters

1 2 3 4 5

Static Revision Block Tag Strategy Alert Key Block Mode Permitted Normal

0 spaces 0 0 Auto or Out of Service Auto

To restart the instrument, from the menu bar select Instrument Setup& Instrument Restart. Select the type of restart: Restart Defaults or Restart Processor. If you selected Restart Defaults, ValveLink software warns you the valve will move and that configuration and calibration data will be set to the default values. Click the Reset with Defaults button to restart the instrument. If you selected Restart Processor, ValveLink software warns you the valve will move. Click the Restart Processor button to restart the instrument. Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without restarting the instrument.

13.5.5

Setting and Clearing Fault State

Note Fault State Enable must be Yes in order to manually set Fault State, see the Resource Block Options page.

You can simulate a loss of communication to an output block, a fault promoted by an output block, or loss of a physical contact causing the Fault State parameter to become active. When the Fault State parameter is active, the output blocks perform their FSTATE actions. July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-54

Detailed Setup

Figure 13-13. Fault State Dialog Box

To manually set Fault State (i.e., make it active), from the menu bar select Instrument Setup& Fault State. As shown in figure 13-13, ValveLink software shows you the current status of Fault State and the analog output (AO) block fault state option. Click the Set Fault State button to cause Fault State to become active. After observing the output conditions, click the Clear Fault State button to clear the fault state and return the instrument to normal operation, if no faults are currently active.

13.6

Setting Instruments

DVC5000f

Series

Setting up a DVC5000f Series instrument requires modifying parameters in the Resource and Transducer blocks. These parameters appear on various pages for the block within the Detailed Setup window. Table 13-21 lists these parameters and the block mode and protection required to modify the parameter. The mode is the actual mode the block must be in to be able to modify the parameter. The table also lists the Detailed Setup window pages and the page number in this user guide where a detailed discussion of the page parameters can be found. Table 13-21. Requirements for Modifying DVC5000f Series Instrument Parameters Parameter

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

Resource Block Parameters Options Page 13-57 Feature Select: Reports Enable Fault State Enable Soft Write Lock Enable Output Readback Enable Alarms Page 13-58

VL2000 Series

Any Any Any Any

Protection not applicable to Resource block parameters

July 2000

13-55

Detailed Setup

Table 13-21. Requirements for Modifying DVC5000f Series Instrument Parameters Parameter Write Priority Confirm Time Notify Limit Auto Acknowledge Option: Discrete Alarm Ack Block Alarm Ack Resource Block Alarm: Discrete Alarm Enable Block Alarm Enable Other Alerts Page 13-59 Alert Key

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

All All All All All

Protection not applicable to Resource block parameters

All All Any

Mode Page 13-59 Block Mode Permitted Block Mode Normal Write Lock RCas Timeout (1/32 ms) ROut Timeout (1/32 ms)

Any Any Any Any Any

Protection not applicable to Resource block parameters

Transducer Block Parameters General Page 13-60 Instrument S/N Message Inst. Model No. Calibration Person Calibration Loc. Calibration Date Valve Page 13-61 Valve Mfg. Valve Model Valve S./N Valve Style

Any Any Any Any Any Any

Configuration

Any Any Any Any

Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration

Any Any Any Out of Service Out of Service Out of Service Out of Service

Configuration Configuration Configuration Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical

Any

Configuration

Mechanical Calibration Calibration Calibration

Actuator Page 13-62 Actuator Mfg. Actuator Model Actuator S/N Actuator Size Act. Fail Action Tvl Sensor Motion Feedback Connection Pressure Page 13-66 Pressure Units Tuning Page 13-66

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-56

Detailed Setup

Table 13-21. Requirements for Modifying DVC5000f Series Instrument Parameters Parameter Tuning Set Standard Gain Standard Tvl Rate High Perf Gain High Perf Tvl Rate High Perf Press Rate Travel Control Page 13-69 Travel Cutoff High Travel Cutoff Low

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

Any Any Any Any Any Any

Tuning Tuning Tuning Tuning Tuning Tuning

Any Any

Configuration Configuration

Out of Service Out of Service

Configuration Configuration

Input Characterization Page 13-69 Input Characteristic Custom Points Deviation Alert Page 13-73 Travel Dev Alrt Enable Tvl Dev. Alrt Pt (%) Tvl Dev. Alrt DB (%) Tvl Dev. Time (sec)

Any Any Any Any

Travel Accum Alert Page 13-74 Travel Acc Alert Enable Tvl Accum Alrt Pt (%) Tvl Accum Alrt DB (%) Tvl Accumulator

Any Any Any Any

Mechanical

Other Alerts Page 13-76 Alert Key Alert Priority Temp Hi Alrt Enable Temp Hi Alrt Pt. (C) Temp Lo Alrt Enable Temp Lo Alrt Pt. (C) Output Blk Tout Enable Output Blk Timeout (sec) NVM Alert Enable NVM Count Limit

Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any

Mode Page 13-77 Block Mode Permitted Block Mode Normal Block Protection Enable: Mechanical Calibration Configuration Tuning

Any Any Any Any Any Any

Travel Alerts Hi/Lo Page 13-78

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-57

Detailed Setup

Table 13-21. Requirements for Modifying DVC5000f Series Instrument Parameters Parameter

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Tvl Hi Alert Enable Tvl Hi Alrt Pt. (%) Tvl Hi Alrt DB (%) Tvl Lo Alert Enable Tvl Lo Alrt Pt. (%) Tvl Lo Alrt DB (%) Travel Alerts Hi Hi/Lo Lo Page 13-79

Any Any Any Any Any Any

Tvl Hi Hi Alert Enable Tvl Hi Hi Alrt Pt. (%) Tvl Hi Hi Alrt DB (%) Tvl Lo Lo Alert Enable Tvl Lo Lo Alrt Pt. (%) Tvl Lo Lo Alrt DB (%) Cycle Counter Alert Page 13-80

Any Any Any Any Any Any

Cycle Counter Alert Enable Cycle Cnt Alrt Pt. Cycle Cnt DB (%) Cycle Count

Any Any Any Any

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

Mechanical

1. Parameters without any data protection listed are not affected by any type of protection mechanism.

13.6.1

Resource Block

13.6.1.1

Options Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Options page. These parameters may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Feature Select The following determines which of the Feature Select parameter options are enabled. Reports Enable—YES or NO. Yes enables alarm and event reporting. Reporting of individual alarms and alerts may be disabled. Fault State Enable—YES or NO. Yes enables using ValveLink and any host software to manually set and clear the fault state. Soft Write Lock Enable—YES or NO. Yes permits using the Write Lock parameter to prevent any external change to static or

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-58

Detailed Setup

nonvolatile parameter values. Block connections and calculation results will proceed normally, but the configuration is locked. Output Readback Enable—YES or NO. Yes permits the transducer block output to be fed back to the Readback parameter in the Analog Output (AO) block.

13.6.1.2

Alarms Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Alarms page. These parameters may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Write Priority—0 to 15. Sets the priority of the alarm generated when the Write Lock parameter is set to Not Locked. Confirm Time (1/32 ms)—The time, in 1/32 of a millisecond, that the instrument waits for confirmation of receipt of a report before trying to send it again. The instrument does not retry if Confirm Time is 0. Notify Limit—The maximum number of reports the instrument sends at one time. Auto Acknowledge Option The following determines if the instrument will automatically acknowledge the listed alarms. Auto Ack. Discrete Alrm—YES or NO. If yes, the Write Lock Alarm is automatically acknowledged by the instrument. Auto Ack. Block Alrm—YES or NO. If yes, the Block Error Alarm is automatically acknowledged by the instrument. Resource Block Alarm The following determines if the listed Resource block alarms are enabled. Write Lock Alarm Enable—YES or NO. If yes, an alarm is reported whenever Write Lock is set to Unlocked. See also Write Lock on the Mode page. Block Error Alarm Enable—YES or NO. If yes, an alarm is reported whenever a Block Error occurs for the Resource block.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13.6.1.3

13-59

Other Alerts Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Other Alerts page. These parameters may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Alert Keyâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;1 to 255. An identification number that permits grouping alerts. This number may be used to indicate to the operator the source of the alert, such as the instrument, plant unit, etc.

13.6.1.4

Mode Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Mode page. These parameters may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Block Mode Permittedâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Auto, Out of Service, or Auto/Out of Service. The permitted mode defines the modes allowed for the block. The available permitted modes are restricted by the instrument to modes supported for the Resource block. Any change request to the Target or Normal modes is checked against the permitted modes to ensure the requested mode is permitted. When setting the Permitted mode, there is no check against any of the other modes (Normal or Target). Therefore, the block may be in a Normal or Target mode that is not permitted because the permitted mode was modified after the Normal or Target mode was set. This will have no effect on the block until the user attempts to modify the Target or Normal mode. At this time these modes are tested against the Permitted modes, thus the user cannot change the Normal or Target modes to what was formerly permitted. Block Mode Normalâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;The Normal mode is the mode the block should be in during normal operating conditions. The Normal mode can only be set to a permitted mode. The user or a host system can compare the actual mode to the normal mode and, based on the results, determine if the block is operating normally.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-60

Detailed Setup

Write Lock—Locked or Unlocked. If Locked, no writes from anywhere are allowed, except to unlock Write Lock. When locked, block inputs will continue to be updated. RCas Timeout (1/32 ms)—Time duration, in 1/32 of a millisecond, at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCAS_IN (remote cascade input) locations. If a function block is in the Rcas (remote cascade) mode and the host computer does not write a set point to RCAS_IN within the RCas Timeout period, the block will shed to the next mode defined by the shed options for the block. Shed from RCas shall never happen when RCas Timeout is 0. ROut Timeout (1/32 ms)—Time duration, in 1/32 of a millisecond, at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROUT_IN (remote output inputs) locations. If a function block is in the Rout (remote output) mode and the host computer does not write a set point to ROUT_IN within the ROut Timeout period, the block will shed to the next mode defined by the shed options for the block. Shed from ROut shall never happen when ROut Timeout is 0.

13.6.2

Transducer Block

13.6.2.1

General Page The following are the parameters that appear on the General page. Table 13-22 lists the requirements for modifying these parameters in terms of block mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-22. Requirements for Modifying Transducer Block Parameters, General Page Parameter Instrument S/N Message Inst. Model No. Calibration Person Calibration Loc. Calibration Date

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

Any Any Any Any Any Any

Configuration Mechanical Calibration Calibration Calibration

1. Parameters without any data protection listed are not affected by any type of protection mechanism.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-61

Detailed Setup

Instrument Serial Number—Serial number assigned to the printed wiring board.This serial number should match the serial number on the instrument nameplate. Message—A text message of up to 32 characters. May be used to record maintenance history. Inst. Model No.—Indicates the instrument type number DVC5010f, DVC5020f, DVC5030f, or DVC5040f. Calibration Person—The name of the person responsible for the last instrument calibration. Calibration Loc.—The physical location where the last instrument calibration was performed (for example, factory, NIST, ACME Labs.). Calibration Date—The date of the last instrument calibration in the format mm/dd/yy, where mm equals month 01 to 12 dd equals day of the month 01 to 31 yy equals year (the instrument is Y2K complient, 00 is the year 2000.

13.6.2.2

Valve Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Valve page. Parameters on this page may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. The Transducer block Configuration protection must be No (see Transducer block Mode page) For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Valve Mfg.—The name of the company that manufacturered the valve on which the instrument is mounted. Valve Model—The valve type or design. Valve S/N—The serial number from the valve nameplate.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-62

Detailed Setup

Valve Style—The style of valve, sliding-stem or rotary.

13.6.2.3

Actuator Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Actuator page. Table 13-23 lists the requirements for modifying these parameters in terms of block mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-23. Requirements for Modifying Transducer Block Parameters, Actuator Page Parameter Actuator Mfg. Actuator Model Actuator S/N Actuator Size Act. Fail Action Tvl Sensor Motion Feedback Connection

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter

All All All Out of Service Out of Service Out of Service Out of Service

Configuration Configuration Configuration Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical

Actuator Mfg.—The name of the company that manufacturered the actuator on which the instrument is mounted. Actuator Model—The actuator type on which the instrument is mounted. Actuator S/N—The serial number from the actuator nameplate. Actuator Size—Specify small, medium, or large for the actuator size. See table 13-24. Act. Fail Action—Specify the action the actuator takes in case of loss of air. Tvl Sensor Motion—Clockwise or Counterclockwise. Establishes the proper feedback orientation. Determine the Travel Sensor Motion setting by viewing the rotation of the end of the travel sensor shaft. If increasing air pressure to the actuator causes the shaft to turn clockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the shaft to turn counterclockwise, enter Counterclockwise. Table 13-24 shows the VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-63

Detailed Setup

Figure 13-14. SStem - Standard Feedback Connection

required Travel Sensor Motion selections for Fisher Controls and other actuators. Feedback Connection窶認or rotary valves, select Rotary-All. For sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkage consists of a connector arm, adjustment arm, and feedback arm (similar to that shown in figure 13-14), enter SStem-Standard. If the feedback linkage consists of a roller that follows a cam (similar to that shown in figure 13-15), enter SStem-Roller. Refer to table 13-24 to determine the Feedback Connection for Fisher, Baumann, and Gulde actuators.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-64

Detailed Setup

ROLLER

STEM CONNECTOR

CAM

Figure 13-15. SS - Roller Feedback Connection

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-65

Detailed Setup

Table 13-24. Actuator Information for Initial Setup Actuator Mfr

Actuator Model

Actuator Size

Value for Actuator Size Parameter

Starting Tuning set

513 or 513R

20 and 32

Small

585C or 585CR

25 50

Small Medium

F J

30 34, 40 45, 50 225 450 675

Medium Medium Large Medium Medium Large

H K L H J L

System 9000

12, 20 25, 50 80

Small Small Medium

F G K

DVC5040f

1051 or 1052

20, 30, 33 40

Medium Medium

H K

DVC5020f

1051 or 1052

20, 30, 33 40

Medium Medium

H K

1066SR

20 27, 75

Small Large

G L

All

32 54 70

Small Medium Medium

E H K

GA1.21 GA1.31 GA1.41 P460, P462, P900 4.5 6 or 7

Small Medium medium

E H K

Large

Small Medium

D H

A B C QP2,QP3 QP4 QP5

Small Medium Medium Medium Medium Medium

D H K H J K

657 or 667

Fisher Controls

Baumann

1250 or 1250R

3024 Gulde 3025 Camflex II Masoneilan

NelesJamesbury

July 2000

Sigma F, Minitorque, and Ball II Quadra-P ower II

Instrument Model

DVC5010f

DVC5030f

Travel Sensor Motion

Feedback Connection

513—Clockwise 513R— Counterclockwise 585C—Clockwise 585CR— Counterclockwise 657—Clockwise 667— Counterclockwise 1250—Clockwise 1250R— Counterclockwise Fail-closed— Counterclockwise Fail-open— Clockwise

SStem Standard

1051—Clockwise 1052—Clockwise Rotary - All See table NO TAG Air to Extend— Clockwise Air to Retract— Counterclockwise

DVC5010f

Air opens— Counterclockwise

SStem Standard

Air closes— Clockwise

DVC5030f

See description for Travel Sensor Motion parameter parameter.

Rotary - All

VL2000 Series

13-66

Detailed Setup

Table 13-25. DVC5030f Travel Sensor Motion Selections Type 1051, 1052, and 1066SR Actuators Mounting Style(1)

Travel Sensor Motion

Clockwise

Counterclockwise

Clockwise

1. Refer to actuator instruction manual for description of mounting styles.

13.6.2.4

Pressure Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Pressure page. Parameters on this page may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. The Transducer block Configuration protection must be No (see Transducer block Mode page). For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Pressure Unitsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;psi, bar, or kPa. Units in which the output pressure is displayed and maintained in the instrument. When setting up, select the units you want to use for measuring output pressure. Valid entries are psi, bar, or kPa.

13.6.2.5

Tuning Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Tuning page. Parameters on this page may be modifed with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. The Transducer block Tuning protection must be No (see Transducer block Mode page). For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-67

Detailed Setup

Tuning Setâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Preset values which identify gain and rate settings. Eleven tuning sets, C through M, provide preselected values. Table 13-26 lists the preselected high performance and standard gain and rate values for these tuning sets. The high performance values are normally used. However, should the pressure sensor fail, the unit will continue to operate using the standard values if the standard gain is not equal to 0. Table 13-24 lists tuning set guidelines for Fisher Controls and other actuators. Tuning set M provides the fastest response and C provides the slowest response. Instruments used with larger actuators may show reduced stability with lower tuning sets. Lower tuning sets use lower gain values but also use lower rate values thus reducing the dampening. User Adjusted allows you to modify the high performance and standard gain. The rate values are automatically adjusted depending upon the gain values you select. Selecting Expert allows you to modify the gain and rate values independently.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-68

Detailed Setup

Table 13-26. Gain and Rate Values for Preselected Tuning Sets T ning Set Tuning

High Performance Gain

Travel Rate

Standard

Pressure Rate

Gain

Travel Rate

C D E F G

0.5 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.1

10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.5

120 60 49 37 46

0.40 0.50 0.60 0.75 1.00

13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0

H I J K L M

2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 10.0

11.6 12.7 14.5 16.2 18.0 18.0

69 82 62 50 31 25

1.30 2.00 3.00 3.99 5.25 6.99

13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0

For user adjusted, the high performance and standard gain may be adjusted independently. The high performance gain may be set to 0 or adjusted over the range 0.1 to 20. The standard gain may be adjusted over the range 0.1 to 10 For expert, all tuning parameters may be adjusted independently. High performance gain may be set to 0 or adjusted over the range 0.01 to 20; high performance travel rate may be set to 0 or adjusted over the range 5 to 25; high performance pressure rate may be adjusted over the range 15 to 150. Standard travel rate may be adjusted over the range 5 to 20.

Standard Gain—This is the instrument gain if the pressure sensor fails. Standard Tvl Rate—The standard travel rate. This is the travel rate feedback used by the instrument if the pressure sensor fails. High Perf. Gain—High performance gain. This is the normal gain value used by the instrument. High Perf. Tvl Rate—High performance travel rate. This is the normal travel rate feedback used by the instrument. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13-69

High Perf. Press Rate—High performance pressure rate. This is the normal pressure rate feedback used by the instrument.

13.6.2.6

Travel Control Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Control page. Parameters on this page may be modified with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. The Transducer block Configuration protection must be No (see Transducer block Mode page). For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Travel Cutoff Low—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the low cutoff point for the travel. When below this cutoff, the travel target is set to –23% of the ranged travel. Travel Cutoff Low is effectively deactivated by setting it to –25%. Valid values are –25% to 125% and is always less than Travel Cutoff High.

Maintenance Tip Travel Cutoff Low of 0.5% is recommended to help ensure maximum shutoff seat loading.

Travel Cutoff High—Percent of ranged travel. Defines the high cutoff point for the travel. When above this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123% of the ranged travel. Travel Cutoff High is effectively deactivated by setting it to 125%. Valid values are –25% to 125% and is always greater than Travel Cutoff Low.

13.6.2.7

Input Characterization Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Input Characterization page. To modify parameters on this page, the block mode

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-70

Detailed Setup

CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT %

QUICK OPENING

SQUARE ROOT

LINEAR

EQUAL PERCENTAGE

INDEX NUMBER

Figure 13-16. Input vs Output Values for Various Input Characteristics

must be Out of Service and the Transducer block Configuration protection must be No (see Transducer block Mode page). For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Input Characteristicâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Defines the relationship between the ranged travel and travel set point. You can select from the fixed input characteristics shown in figure 13-16 or you can define a custom characteristic. Figure 13-16 shows the relationship between the ranged travel and travel set point for the fixed input characteristics. Table 13-27 lists the values for these characteristics.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-71

Detailed Setup

Table 13-27. Input Characteristic Curve Values Set Point

Characterized Output (%)

Index Number

Percent

Linear

Equal Percentage

Quick Opening

Square Root

1 2 3 4 5

–25.00 –21.88 –18.75 –15.63 –12.50

–12.5 –10.94 –9.38 –7.81 –6.25

–3.18 –2.78 –2.38 –1.99 –1.59

–25.00 –25.00 –25.00 –25.00 –25.00

6 7 8 9 10

–9.38 –6.25 –3.13 0.00 3.13

–4.69 –3.13 –1.56 0.00 0.27

–1.19 –0.79 –0.40 0.00 23.93

–25.00 –25.00 –25.00 0.00 17.68

11 12 13 14 15

6.25 9.38 12.50 15.63 18.75

0.57 0.90 1.29 1.72 2.21

36.04 44.21 50.38 55.35 59.50

25.00 30.62 35.36 39.53 43.30

16 17 18 19 20

21.88 25.00 28.13 31.25 34.38

2.76 3.39 4.09 4.89 5.79

63.07 66.20 68.98 71.49 73.78

46.77 50.00 53.03 55.90 58.63

21 22 23 24 25

37.50 40.63 43.75 46.88 50.00

6.81 7.96 9.26 10.73 12.39

75.87 77.81 79.61 81.29 82.86

61.24 63.74 66.14 68.47 70.71

26 27 28 29 30

53.13 56.25 59.38 62.50 65.63

14.27 16.39 18.78 21.49 24.55

84.35 85.75 87.08 88.34 89.55

72.89 75.00 77.06 79.06 81.01

31 32 33 34 35

68.75 71.88 75.00 78.13 81.25

28.01 31.92 36.33 41.32 46.96

90.70 91.80 92.85 93.86 94.83

82.92 84.78 86.60 88.39 90.14

–Continued–

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-72

Detailed Setup

Table 13-27. Input Characteristic Curve Values (continued) Set Point

Characterized Output (%)

Index Number

Percent

Linear

Equal Percentage

Quick Opening

Square Root

36 37 38 39 40

84.38 87.50 90.63 93.75 96.88

53.33 60.53 68.67 77.87 88.26

95.77 96.67 97.55 98.39 99.21

91.86 93.54 95.20 96.82 98.43

41 42 43 44 45

100.00 103.13 106.25 109.38 112.50

100.00 125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00

46 47 48 49

115.63 118.75 121.88 125.00

125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00

Custom Pointsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Permits you to specify 49 points on a custom characteristic curve. Each point defines a travel target in percent of ranged travel for a corresponding travel set point in percent of ranged setpoint. Set point values range from â&#x20AC;&#x201C;25% to 125% in 3.125% increments. To define a custom characteristic, in the table under Database Dataset, position the cursor in the Tvl Target column for the set point you wish to define (49 set points are available). Six set points are displayed at one time; use the scroll arrows to display other set points. Enter the desired travel value corresponding to the set point. You can begin your custom characteristic by filling the ranged travel values with a predefined characteristic: linear, quick opening, or equal percentage. Click the Fill button and the ValveLink software will ask you to select one of the predefined characteristics. You can then modify the characteristic as described in the preceding paragraph. You can also select Import from the list. Selecting Import permits you import a file that contains the values to be used to fill in the characterization curve. This file must be a standard text file, editable with any text editor. It should contain the Y (Travel Target) values for each of the points on the custom characteristic curve. The points can be separated by tabs, spaces, or each point can be on a separate line (or any combination). VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-73

Detailed Setup

The custom characterization curve starts at –25% and continues to 125% with increments of 3.125%. This means there are a total of 49 points that should be provided. The following is a sample of the first five lines of a file with one point per line: –3.125 –1.562 0.0 0.244 1.562 If the above example file were imported, set point –25% (which is the first point on the curve) would be assigned a travel target of –3.125%, set point –21.875% (point 2 on the curve) would have a travel target of –1.562% and so on. All travel targets that do not have a value in the file will be left unchanged (points 6 through 49 in the above example). The above five points could also have been in the file on a single line as: –3.125 –1.562 0.0 0.244 1.562 With input characterization you can modify the overall characteristic of the valve and instrument combination. Selecting an equal percentage, quick opening, square root, or custom (other than linear) input characteristic modifies the overall valve and instrument characteristic. However, if you select the linear input characteristic, the overall valve and instrument characteristic is the characteristic of the valve, which is determined by the valve trim (i.e., the plug or cage). The factory default setting for input characterization is linear.

13.6.2.8

Deviation Alert Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Deviation Alert page. Parameters on this page may be modified with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Travel Dev Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables checking of the difference between the target and the ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. It remains

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-74

Detailed Setup

active until the difference is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Point.

Travel Dev. Alert Pt (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Alert point for the difference, expressed in percent, between the targeted travel and the ranged travel. When the difference exceeds the alert point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. Valid entries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set to 5%. Travel Dev. Alert DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. The travel deviation must fall below the travel deviation alert point minus the deadband value for a travel Deviation Alert to clear once it has been activated. Travel Dev. Time (sec)—Seconds. Time that the travel must exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point before the alert is active. Valid entries are 1 to 60 seconds. Typically this is set to 20 seconds.

13.6.2.9

Travel Accum Alert Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Accum Alert page. Table 13-28 lists the requirements for modifying these parameters in terms of block mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-28. Requirements for Modifying Transducer Block Parameters, Travel Accum Alert Page Parameter Travel Acc Alert Enable Tvl Accum Alrt Pt (%) Tvl Accum Alrt DB (%) Tvl Accumulator

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

All All All All

Mechanical

1. Parameters without any data protection listed are not affected by any type of protection mechanism.

Travel Acc Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables checking of the difference between the Travel Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the Travel Accumulator VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-75

Detailed Setup

Deadband exceeded, new Reference Point established

Deadband Reference Point Deadband (+/– 5%)

This amount of change is added to the Travel Accumulator.

Figure 13-17. Travel Accumulator Deadband (set at 10%)

Point. It is cleared after you reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than the alert point. Travel Accum Alrt Pt (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Value of the Travel Accumulator which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Accumulator Alert. Travel Accum Alrt DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. This is the area around the travel reference point established at the last increment of the accumulator. This area must be exceeded before a change in travel can be accumulated. See figure 13-17. Typically this is set between 2% and 5%. Travel Accumulator—Percent of ranged travel. Total change in travel since the accumulator was last cleared. Value of the Travel Accumulator increments when the magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel Accumulator Deadband. See figure 13-17. To reset the Travel Accumulator, set it to zero. The Travel Accumulator parameter is not downloaded when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters unless you set a system preference requesting it. To transfer this parameter setting to the instrument, either click the download arrow next to the field or set a system preference to automatically download the Travel July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-76

Detailed Setup

Accumulator parameter when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters. To set the system preference, select Customize ValveLink& Preferences, then check the Download box on the Config page.

13.6.2.10

Other Alerts Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Other Alerts page. Parameters on this page may be modified with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Alert Key—1 to 255. An identification number that permits grouping alerts. This number may be used to indicate to the operator the source of the alert, such as the instrument, plant unit, etc. Alert Priority—0 to 15. Permits assigning a priority to transducer block alarms. Temp Hi Alrt Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, the Temp Hi Alrt (Temperature High Alert) is active whenever the internal instrument temperature exceeds the Temperature High Alert Point. Temp Hi Alrt Pt. (C)—The Temperature High Alert Point, in degrees Celsius, for the Temperature High Alert. Temp Lo Alrt Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, the Temp Lo Alrt (Temperature Low Alert) is active whenever the internal instrument temperature is less than the Temperature Low Alert Point. Temp Lo Alrt Pt. (C)—The Temperature Low Alert Point, in degrees Celsius, for the Temperature Low Alert. Output Blk Tout Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, the Output Block Tout (Timeout) alarm is active when the Analog Output (AO) block does not update the set point to the transducer block within the time period specified in the Output Block Timeout parameter. Output Blk Timeout (sec)—0 to 800 seconds. The Output Blk (Block) Timeout parameter determines how long the transducer

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13-77

block waits for a set point change from the AO block before it activates the alarm. NVM Alert Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, the NVM Alert is active when the NVM write count exceeds the NVM Count Limit. NVM Count Limit—The number of NVM writes when exceeded activates the NVM Alert.

13.6.2.11

Mode Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Mode page. These parameters may be modified with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Block Mode Permitted—Auto, Out of Service, or Auto/Out of Service. The permitted mode defines the modes allowed for the block. The available permitted modes are restricted by the instrument to modes supported for the Transducer block. Any change request to the Target or Normal modes is checked against the permitted modes to ensure the requested mode is permitted. When setting the Permitted mode, there is no check against any of the other modes (Normal or Target). Therefore, the block may be in a Normal or Target mode that is not permitted because the permitted mode was modified after the Normal or Target mode was set. This will have no effect on the block until the user attempts to modify the Target or Normal mode. At this time these modes are tested against the Permitted modes, thus the user cannot change the Normal or Target modes to what was formerly permitted. Block Mode Normal—The Normal mode is the mode the block should be in during normal operating conditions. The Normal mode can only be set to a permitted mode (see permitted mode). The user or a host system can compare the actual mode to the normal mode and, based on the results, determine if the block is operating normally. Block Protection Enable: The following determines which of the types of protection are enabled. See table NO TAG to see which parameters are affected by the various types of protection.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-78

Detailed Setup

Mechanical—YES or NO. When enabled, prevents writing to transducer block parameters included in Mechanical data. Calibration—YES or NO. When enabled, prevents writing to transducer block parameters included in Calibration data. Configuration—YES or NO. When enabled, prevents writing to transducer block parameters included in Configuration data. Tuning—YES or NO. When enabled, prevents writing to transducer block parameters included in Tuning data.

13.6.2.12

Travel Alerts Hi/Lo Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Alerts Hi/Lo page. Parameters on this page may be modified with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Travel Hi Alert Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, checks the ranged travel against the Travel Hi Alert Point. The Travel Hi Alert is active whenever the ranged travel is greater than the Travel Hi Alert Point. Once the Travel Hi Alert is active, the ranged travel must fall below the Travel Hi Alert Point by the Travel Hi Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared See figure 13-18. Travel Hi Alrt Pt. (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Hi Alert. Valid entries are 0 to 100%. Travel Hi Alrt DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Travel required to clear a Travel Hi Alert once it is active. Valid entries are 0 to 100%. Travel Lo Alert Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, checks the ranged travel against the Travel Lo Alert Point. The Travel Lo Alert is active whenever the ranged travel is less than the Travel Lo Alert Point. Once the Travel Lo Alert is active, the ranged travel must rise above the Travel Lo Alert Point by the Travel Lo Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 13-18.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-79

Detailed Setup

Alert Activated

Travel Alert Point

Travel Alert Deadband

Alert is Cleared

Figure 13-18. Travel Alert Deadband (Travel Hi Alert Example)

Travel Lo Alrt Pt. (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Lo Alert. Valid entries are 0 to 100%. Travel Lo Alrt DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Travel required to clear a Travel Lo Alert once it is active. Valid entries are 0 to 100%.

13.6.2.13

Travel Alerts Hi Hi/Lo Lo Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Travel Alerts Hi Hi/Lo Lo page. Parameters on this page may be modified with the block in the Auto or Out of Service mode. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2. Travel Hi Hi Alert Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, checks the ranged travel against the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point. The Travel Hi Hi Alert is active whenever the ranged travel is greater than the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point. Once the Travel Hi Hi Alert is active, the ranged travel must fall below the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point by the Travel Hi Hi Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 13-18.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-80

Detailed Setup

Travel Hi Hi Alrt Pt. (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Hi Hi Alert. Valid entries are 0 to 100%. Travel Hi Hi Alrt DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Travel required to clear a Travel Hi Hi Alert once it is active. Valid entries are 0 to 100%. Travel Lo Lo Alert Enable—YES or NO. When enabled, checks the ranged travel against the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point. The Travel Lo Lo Alert is active whenever the ranged travel is less than the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point. Once the Travel Lo Lo Alert is active, the ranged travel must rise above the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point by the Travel Lo Lo Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 13-18. Travel Lo Lo Alrt Pt. (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Value of the travel which, when exceeded, activates the Travel Lo Lo Alert. Valid entries are 0 to 100%. Travel Lo Lo Alrt DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. Travel required to clear a Travel Lo Lo Alert once it is active. Valid entries are 0 to 100%.

13.6.2.14

Cycle Counter Alert Page The following are the parameters that appear on the Cycle Counter Alert page. Table 13-29 lists the requirements for modifying these parameters in terms of block mode and protection. For a description of how to move data between the Instrument and ValveLink Dataset columns, or vice versa, and how to save data to a dataset, see subsection 13.1.2.

Table 13-29. Requirements for Modifying Transducer Block Parameters, Cycle Counter Alert Page Parameter Cycle Counter Alert Enable Cycle Cnt Alrt Pt. Cycle Cnt DB (%) Cycle Count

Block Mode Required to Modify Parameter

Data Protection that Affects Parameter(1)

All All All All

Mechanical

1. Parameters without any data protection listed are not affected by any type of protection mechanism.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-81

Detailed Setup

Deadband exceeded, new Reference Point established

Deadband Reference Point Deadband (+/– 5%)

Point at which cycle is counted.

Figure 13-19. Cycle Counter Deadband (set at 10%)

Cycle Counter Alert Enable—YES or NO. Enables the checking of the difference between the Cycle Counter and the Cycle Counter Alert Point. Cycle Counter Alert is active when the value exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less than the alert point. Cycle Cnt Alrt Point—Value of the Cycle Counter which, when exceeded, activates the Cycle Counter Alert. Valid entries are 0 to 4 billion cycles. Cycle Cnt DB (%)—Percent of ranged travel. The area around the travel reference point established at the last increment of the Cycle Counter. This area must be exceeded before a change in travel can be counted as a cycle. See figure 13-19. Valid entries are 0% to 100%. Typical value is between 2% and 5%. Cycle Counter—Cycle Counter records the number of times the travel changes direction. The change in direction must occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it can be counted as a cycle. See figure 13-19. Reset the cycle counter by configuring it as zero. The Cycle Counter parameter is not downloaded when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters unless you set a July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-82

Detailed Setup

system preference requesting it. To transfer this parameter setting to the instrument, either click the download arrow next to the field or set a system preference to automatically download the Cycle Counter parameter when you download ALL parameters or current PAGE parameters. To set the system preference, select Customize ValveLink & Preferences& Config page. Click the Download check box to place a check in it.

13.7

Setting

Valve

Spec

Sheet

Selecting Spec Sheet from the menu bar allows you to set up and maintain specifications about the sliding stem or rotary valve to which the instrument is attached. You can set up one valve spec sheet for each tag. The values entered on the Valve Spec Sheet become the default values for the Valve Signature Diagnostic test. The valve spec sheet consists of five pages: the Valve page, the Trim page, the Actuator page, a Reference page, and a Notes page. The fields that appear on these pages are defined in the subsections that follow. To view the data on a page, click the tab for that page to bring it to the front. Before setting up valve specifications, you may want to establish defaults for units of measure by selecting Customize ValveLink & Preferences on the menu.

13.7.1

Setting Up and Maintaining a Valve Spec Sheet To set up a valve spec sheet for an instrument: 1. Open a tag. 2. From the menu bar, select Spec Sheet. 3. Click a page tab to work with the fields on a particular page. 4. Enter or change values in edit fields, as necessary. For help selecting appropriate values, refer to specifications published by the valve manufacturer. The ValveLink software uses default units of measure established through the Preferences selection on the Customize ValveLink menu. To override the default unit in a particular field, type in a different unit of measure. 5. When you finish working with the Valve Spec Sheet pages, click the Save Spec Sheet button.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

13-83

Detailed Setup

13.7.2

Valve Page The following define the fields on the Valve page. Manufacturer—Enter name of the valve manufacturer. Type—Select type of valve. Size—Select a valve size. If you enter the valve size as a fraction, ValveLink software converts your entry to a decimal. Class—Select valve pressure class rating. Rated Travel—Enter valve rated travel. For sliding-stem valves, enter rated travel in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For rotary valves, enter rated travel in degrees. Actual Travel—Enter valve actual travel. For sliding-stem valves, enter actual travel in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For rotary valves, enter actual travel in degrees. Stem/Shaft Diameter—Enter sliding-stem valve stem diameter, or the rotary valve shaft diameter, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the diameter as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Packing Type—Select type of packing used on the valve. Inlet Pressure—Enter inlet pressure to the valve in psi, bar, or kPa. Outlet Pressure—Enter outlet pressure from the valve in psi, bar, or kPa.

13.7.3

Trim Page The following define the fields on the Trim page. Seat Type—Select type of valve seat. Leak Class—Select shutoff leakage class of the valve.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-84

Detailed Setup

Port Diameter—Select valve port diameter in inches, millimeters, or centimeters. Port Type—For sliding-stem valves, select type of valve port. Flow Direction—For sliding-stem valves, select direction of flow through the valve—either UP or DOWN. Push Down To—For sliding stem valves, when pushing down on the valve stem, does the valve–OPEN or CLOSE. Flow Tends To—For sliding-stem valves, select whether flow tends to OPEN or CLOSE the valve. Unbalanced Area—For sliding-stem valves, enter the unbalanced area in square inches, square millimeters, or square centimeters.

13.7.4

Actuator Page The following define the fields on the Actuator page. Manufacturer—Enter name of the actuator manufacturer. Type—Select type of actuator. Size—Select the size of the actuator. Effective Area—Enter the effective area of the actuator in square inches, square millimeters, or square centimeters. Air—Select whether increasing air pressure to the actuator OPENS or CLOSES the valve. Actuator Style—For rotary valve actuators, select the style of actuator currently in use with the valve. Moment Arm—For rotary valve actuators, enter the length of the connecting arm between the valve shaft and the actuator rod, in inches, millimeters, or centimeters.

13.7.5

Reference Page Allows you to set up and maintain specifications about the valve to which the instrument is attached. The following define the fields on the Reference page.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Setup

13-85

Trim Style 1—Enter a description of the trim or internal parts of the valve. This field is usually used to identify the trim material. Trim Style 2—Enter a description of the trim or internal parts of the valve. This field is usually used to identify the flow characteristic of the trim such as Equal Percentage, Linear, or Quick Opening. Stroking Time Open—Enter required time, in seconds, to stroke the valve open. Stroking Time Close—Enter required time, in seconds, to stroke the valve closed. Dynamic Torque—For rotary valves, enter the calculated dynamic torque of the valve in pounds of force x inches (lbf in) or Newtons x meters (N m). Breakout Torque—For rotary valves, enter calculated breakout torque of the valve in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m).

13.7.6

Notes Page This page permits you to add or edit notes associated with the spec sheet. Type your note in the Notes box. Text automatically wraps to the next line as necessary; you do not need to press the Enter key at the end of each line. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor and select existing text to type over or delete. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Notes box to see more text.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

13-86

Detailed Setup

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-1

Detailed Calibration

Detailed Calibration 14.1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.1.1 14.1.1.1 14.1.1.2 14.1.1.3 14.1.2 14.1.3 14.1.4 14.1.5

14.2

Working with Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If You Canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Access Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Factory Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing and Restoring Field Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-2 14-3 14-4 14-4 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-6

Calibrating Analog Inputs (DVC5000 Series Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14.3 14.3.1 14.3.2

July 2000

Calibrating Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Auto Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Manual Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

14.4

Calibrating Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

14.5

Calibrating the Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

VL2000 Series

14-2

Detailed Calibration

The following subsections describe procedures for calibrating the travel, pressure, and travel sensor for the DVC5000 and DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers. You also have the option of restoring factory calibration to the instrument. This section also provides procedures for calibrating the analog input for a DVC5000 Series digital valve controller. The calibration feature may not be available with your software. To determine if this feature is available, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink.

14.1

Getting

Started1414

14.1.1

Working with Calibration

Note Before beginning calibration of DVC5000 Series instruments, review the Initial Setup page in the Detailed Setup window, subsection 13.4.1. For DVC5000f Series instruments, review the Valve, Actuator and Travel Control pages, subsections 13.6.2.2, 13.6.2.3, and 13.6.2.6.

Calibrating and setting up instruments are two different processes, with independent results. Setup uses the ValveLink software to set or change the relationship between the input signal and output pressure. When you calibrate an instrument, ValveLink uses the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s high and low range for Analog Input, Pressure Sensor, and Travel as the calibrated range. If later you reconfigure the instrument to operate over a different range, your changes do NOT affect the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s calibration. However, for greatest accuracy, the range should match the physically calibrated range. If you reconfigure an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s operating range, consider also re-calibrating. VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-3

Detailed Calibration

Before beginning calibration, open the instrument tag and check the tag information on the status bar to verify: The instrument is connected. The Instrument or Block Mode is set to Out Of Service. For DVC5000 Series instruments, the Instrument Protection is set to None. For DVC5000f Series instruments, the transducer block calibration protection should be No. Various screens appear during the calibration procedures. However, the following buttons are common to all screens: Next—Click this button to continue to the next step in the procedure. Back—Click this button to return to the previous step. Cancel—Click this button to abandon the remaining calibration steps. ValveLink will give you an opportunity to restore the instrument to its original status. Help—Click this button to see help on the calibration procedure.

14.1.1.1

Canceling Calibration If calibration stops abruptly, for example, if the 4 to 20 mA signal fails during a test, ValveLink notifies you with a message. Because ValveLink calibrates an instrument in steps, a failure does not stop

July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-4

Detailed Calibration

the entire calibration procedure. Rather, the current calibration step remains visible. From the system prompt, you can click the Cancel button to stop calibrating or click the Next button to retry the step. If you click the Cancel button, either from the system prompt or from the Calibration progress bar, ValveLink prompts, ”Calibration canceled. Instrument will be restored to its original state. OK to restore?” To restore the instrument’s previous calibration settings, click Yes. To leave the instrument in its current state without restoring, click No.

14.1.1.2

Low Power Warning For DVC5000 Series instruments, before calibrating an instrument, the ValveLink software checks to see if the analog input current is less than 3.8 mA. If it is, the system displays a message and asks whether you want to proceed. To continue calibrating, click Yes. To cancel and check the analog input current before continuing, click No.

14.1.1.3

If You Can’t Access Calibration If you cannot access calibration options from the menu, talk to your system administrator for security authorization.

14.1.2

Calibration Procedures The following calibration procedures are available from the calibration menu: Analog Input—This procedure permits calibrating the analog input sensor for a DVC5000 Series digital valve controller. Auto Travel—This procedure automatically calibrates the travel for a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. The calibration procedure uses the valve and actuator stops as the 0% and 100% calibration points. Manual Travel—This procedure permits manual calibration of the DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series travel. This calibration procedure allows you to determine the 0% and 100% calibration points.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Calibration

14-5

Pressure Sensor—This procedure permits calibrating the pressure sensor for a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. Restore Factory Settings—This procedure permits you to restore the calibration settings back to the factory settings. Travel Sensor Adjust—This procedure permits calibrating the travel sensor on a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. With DVC5000f Series instruments you can also: Store Field Settings—This procedure permits you to store the current values for the parameters listed in table 14-1 in the field setup section of the instrument’s non-volatile memory. Restore Field Settings—This procedure permits you to replace the current values for the parameters listed in table 14-1, as well as others, with the values that were last stored in the field setup section of the instrument’s non-volatile memory.

14.1.3

Calibration Screens The calibration screens typically displays the various procedural steps for the calibration process. Some procedures require you to adjust the instrument readback. The buttons shown in figure 14-1

Figure 14-1. Buttons Available for Adjusting Readback

are available for adjusting the readback. Use the appropriate button to increase or decrease the readback as desired. As shown, the left arrow provides the greatest amount of adjustment; the right arrow provides the least amount of adjustment. When making an adjustment, be sure to allow time for the adjustment to be sent and for the instrument to respond. July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-6

14.1.4

Detailed Calibration

Restoring Factory Calibration To restore the calibration settings back to the factory settings, open the instrument tag and be sure the instrument is connected to the network, the instrument mode is Out Of Service, and the instrument protection is set to None. Select Calibration from the menu bar. From the Calibration menu, select Restore Factory Settings. For DVC5000f Series instruments, at the warning message click Next to continue. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to continue. If the instrument is not connected to the network or if the instrument or block mode is not Out of Service, ValveLink cancels the calibration procedure. Resolve the error, then try again. Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

14.1.5

Storing and Restoring Field Settings With a DVC5000f Series digital valve controller, when you select Store Field Settings from the Calibration menu, the current values for the parameters listed in table 14-1 are stored in the Field Setup section of the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s non-volatile memory. You can also restore the current operating parameters listed in table 14-1 with the parameters stored in the Field Setup section of the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s non-volatile memory. From the Calibration menu select Restore Field Settings. Table 14-1. Factory and Field Setup Parameters Parameter Label

Parameter Label

Act. Fail Action Actuator Size Actuator Stops Calibration Date Calibration Loc.

High Perf Press Rate High Perf Tvl Rate Pressure Gain Pressure Offset Press Units

Calibration Person Crossover FB Temp Coef Feedback Connection Feedback High

Standard Gain Standard Tvl Rate Travel Cutoff High Travel Cutoff Low Tvl Sensor Motion

Feedback Low High Perf Gain

VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-7

Detailed Calibration

14.2

Calibrating (DVC5000

Analog Series

Inputs

only)

This procedure calibrates the instrument analog input sensor. Before beginning calibration, check the tag information on the status bar and verify the instrument is connected to the network and the Instrument Mode is set to Out Of Service. Also, verify the Instrument Protection is set to None.

Verify that the equipment is connected as shown in figure 14-2. Also verify that the mode switches on the instrument printed wiring board are set to point-to-point. If the switches are not set for point-to-point, refer to the appropriate instrument instruction manual for information on setting the switches. Perform the following steps to calibrate the analog input.

July 2000

Step 1:

Adjust the external 4 to 20 mA current source to the configured range value shown in the display. Click the Next button to continue.

Step 2:

Click the arrows to adjust the Input Readback until it matches the configured value, then click the Next button to continue. (The small arrows produce a fine adjustment and may require several clicks before a change is perceptible.) Be sure to allow time for the adjustment to be sent and for the instrument to respond.

Step 3:

Adjust the external 4â&#x20AC;&#x201C;20mA current source to the configured range value shown in the display. Click the Next button to continue. VL2000 Series

14-8

Detailed Calibration

PC with

Instrument

Figure 14-2. Example Analog Input Calibration Setup (HART Modem)

Step 4:

Click the arrows to adjust the Input Readback until it matches the configured value, then click the Next button to continue. Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

14.3

Calibrating

Travel

14.3.1

Auto Travel Calibration This procedure automatically calibrates the actuator travel for a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. Before beginning calibration, check the tag information on the status bar and verify the instrument is connected to the network. For DVC5000 Series instruments verify the Instrument Mode is set to Out Of Service and the Instrument Protection is set to None.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-9

Detailed Calibration

Note Auto calibration adjusts the instrument to apply a light seat load. To ensure a full shutoff seat load, configure the Travel Cutoff Low to 0.5%. See subsection 13.4.1 for DVC5000 Series instruments or subsection 13.6.2.6 for DVC5000f Series instruments.

Verify that the digital valve controller is correctly mounted on the actuator and that the equipment is connected as shown in figure 14-3. For DVC5000 Series instruments, also verify that the multidrop switch on the instrument printed wiring board is set to point-to-point. If the switch is not set for point-to-point, refer to the appropriate instrument instruction manual for information on setting switches. To start auto travel calibration, click the Calibration button on the tool bar or, from the menu bar, select Calibration & Auto Travel. Read the warning and click Next to continue. If this is a rotary valve actuator, auto travel calibration is automatic; no further user interaction is required. ValveLink automatically calibrates the instrument, using valve and actuator stops as the 0% and the 100% calibration points. If calibration is for a sliding-stem valve actuator, continue to Step 1. July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-10

Detailed Calibration

PC with

NOTE: 1

CURRENT SOURCE REQUIRED FOR DVC5000 SERIES INSTRUMENTS ONLY

Figure 14-3. Example Auto Travel Calibration Setup (DVC5000 Series with HART Modem Shown)

Step 1:

Select the desired crossover adjustment. There are three choices for adjusting the crossover: Manual, Last, or Default. Manual is the recommended choice. It permits you to manually set the crossover. If you select Manual, go to Step 2 for DVC5000 Series instruments. For DVC5000f Series instruments, go to Step 3. If you select Last, this is the last step. The crossover setting currently stored in the instrument from the last travel calibration is used, followed by a series of actions that will automatically calibrate the instrument. Use this selection if you cannot use manual, such as when you cannot see the valve. If you select Default, this is also the last step. A value for the crossover is written to the instrument, followed by a series of actions that will automatically calibrate the instrument. Use this selection only as a last resort. Default assumes a midrange position on the travel sensor as the crossover point. However, this may not be an ap-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Calibration

14-11

Note: The feedback arm is at the crossover point when the slot is perpendicular to the valve stem. Figure 14-4. Crossover Point

propriate value to use for crossover because of variations in mounting and travel sensor calibration. Step 2:

For DVC5000 Series instruments, select the crossover adjustment source, either Analog or Digital. Click the Next button to continue.

Step 3:

Adjust the feedback arm to the crossover point, see figure 14-4. Click the Next button to continue. For DVC5000 Series instruments, if you selected Analog in Step 2, adjust the current source until the feedback arm is at the crossover point. For DVC5000f Series instruments or if you selected Digital in Step 2 (DVC5000 Series instruments), use the

July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-12

Detailed Calibration

arrows to adjust the feedback arm to the crossover point. The small arrows produce a fine adjustment and may require several clicks before a change is perceptible. This is the last step. ValveLink automatically calibrates the instrument, using valve and actuator stops as the 0% and the 100% calibration points. Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

14.3.2

Manual Travel Calibration This procedure permits you to manually calibrate the actuator travel for a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. Before beginning calibration, check the tag information on the toolbar and verify the instrument is connected to the network. For DVC5000 Series instruments verify the Instrument Mode is set to Out Of Service and the Instrument Protection is set to None.

July 2000

Detailed Calibration

14.3.2.1

14-13

Manual Calibration of DVC5000f Series Instruments Read the warning and click Next to continue. Depending upon if you have a rotary valve actuator or a sliding-stem valve actuator, perform one or the other of the following procedures.

For rotary valve actuators: Step 1:

Use the arrows to adjust the travel set point until the valve is completely open. Click the Next button to continue. (The 100% travel point is normally where the valve is fully OPEN.)

Step 2:

Use the arrows to adjust the travel set point until the valve is completely closed. (The 0% travel point is normally where the valve is fully CLOSED.)

Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

For sliding-stem valve actuators: Step 1:

Select the desired crossover adjustment. There are three choices for adjusting the crossover: Manual, Last, or Default. Manual is the recommended choice. It permits you to manually set the crossover. If you select Manual, go to Step 2. If you select Last, go to Step 3. The crossover setting currently stored in the instrument is used. Use this selection if you cannot use manual, such as when you cannot see the valve. If you select Default, also go to Step 3. An approximate value for the crossover is written to the instrument. Use this selection only as a last resort. Default assumes a midrange position on the travel sensor is the crossover point. This is good only if you have been perfect in mounting the instrument and positioning the feedback arm on the travel sensor shaft.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-14

Detailed Calibration

Step 2:

Use the arrows to adjust the feedback arm to the crossover point, see figure 14-4. The small arrows produce a fine adjustment and may require several clicks before a change is perceptible.

Step 3:

Use the arrows to adjust the travel set point until the valve position is completely open. Click Next to continue.

Step 4:

Use the arrows to adjust the travel set point until the valve position is completely closed. Click Next to continue.

Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

14.3.2.2

Manual Calibration of DVC5000 Series Instruments Read the warning and click Next to continue. Depending upon if you have a rotary valve actuator or a sliding-stem valve actuator, perform one or the other of the following procedures.

For rotary valve actuators:

VL2000 Series

Step 1:

Adjust the input current until the valve moves, then reduce the current until the output pressure is 0.

Step 2:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0% travel, then click the Next button to continue. (The 0% travel point is normally where the valve is fully CLOSED.)

Step 3:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100% travel, then click the Next button to continue. (The 100% travel point is normally where the valve is fully OPEN.)

Step 4:

Adjust the current source SLOWLY until the valve is at 0% travel. Click the Next button to continue. (The 0% travel point is normally where the valve is fully CLOSED.)

Step 5:

Adjust the current source SLOWLY until the valve is at 100% travel. Click the Next button to continue. (The 100% travel point is normally where the valve is fully OPEN.) July 2000

14-15

Detailed Calibration

Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

For sliding-stem valve actuators: Step 1:

Adjust the current source until the feedback arm is at the crossover point, see figure 14-4. Click the Next button to continue. (The feedback arm is at the crossover point when the slot is perpendicular to the valve stem.)

Step 2:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0% travel, then click the Next button to continue. (The 0% travel point is normally where the valve is fully CLOSED.)

Step 3:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100% travel, then click the Next button to continue. (The 100% travel point is normally where the valve is fully OPEN.)

Step 4:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 50% travel, then click the Next button to continue.

Step 5:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0% travel, then click the Next button to continue. (The 0% travel point is normally where the valve is fully CLOSED.)

Step 6:

Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100% travel, then click the Next button to continue. (The 100% travel point is normally where the valve is fully OPEN.)

Step 7:

Adjust the current source SLOWLY until the valve is at 0% travel. Click the Next button to continue. (The 0% travel point is normally where the valve is fully CLOSED.)

Step 8:

Adjust the current source SLOWLY until the valve is at 100% travel. Click the Next button to continue. (The 100% travel point is normally where the valve is fully OPEN.)

Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

14.4

Calibrating

Pressure

The following procedures calibrate the pressure sensor of a DVC5000 or DVC5000f Series digital valve controller. July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-16

Detailed Calibration

PC with

Instrument

NOTE: 1

CURRENT SOURCE REQUIRED FOR DVC5000 SERIES INSTRUMENTS ONLY

Figure 14-5. Example Pressure Calibration Setup (DVC5000 Series with HART Modem Shown)

Before beginning calibration, check the tag information on the status bar and verify the instrument is connected to the network. For DVC5000 Series instruments, verify the Instrument Mode is set to Out Of Service and the Instrument Protection is set to None.

Verify that the digital valve controller is correctly mounted on the actuator and that the equipment is connected as shown in figure 14-5. For DVC5000 Series instruments, also verify that the multidrop switch on the instrument printed wiring board is set to point-to-point. VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-17

Detailed Calibration

If the switch is not set for point-to-point, refer to the appropriate instrument instruction manual for information on setting switches. To start pressure sensor calibration, from the menu bar, select Calibration & Pressure Sensor.

14.4.1

Pressure Sensor Calibration for DVC5000f Series Instruments Read the warning and click Next to continue. Perform the following procedure to calibrate the pressure sensor on DVC5000f Series instruments. Step 1:

Wait until the valve is completely closed, then enter the pressure reading on the external actuator pressure gauge. Click the Next button to continue.

Step 2:

Wait until the valve is completely open, then enter the pressure reading on the external actuator pressure gauge. Click the Next button to continue.

Click OK to complete the procedure.

14.4.2

Pressure Sensor Calibration for DVC5000 Series Instruments Read the warning and click Next to continue. Perform the following procedure to calibrate the pressure sensor on DVC5000 Series instruments.

July 2000

Step 1:

Adjust the external 4â&#x20AC;&#x201C;20 mA current source to a value between 4 and 20 mA, then click the Next button to continue.

Step 2:

Wait until the actuator pressure is completely exhausted, then click the arrows to adjust the displayed pressure until it matches the reading on the external actuator pressure gauge. Click the Next button to continue. (The small arrows produce a fine adjustment and may require several clicks before a change is perceptible.) Be sure to allow time for the adjustment to be sent and for the instrument to respond. VL2000 Series

14-18

Detailed Calibration

Step 3:

14.5

Calibrating

Wait until the actuator pressure has reached full supply, then click the arrows to adjust the displayed pressure until it matches the reading on the external actuator pressure gauge. Click the Next button to continue. Click OK to complete the calibration procedure.

the

Travel

Sensor

This procedure calibrates the DVC5000 and DVC5000f Series digital valve controller travel sensor.

To adjust the travel sensor, select Travel Sensor Adjust from the calibration menu (from the menu bar select Calib& Travel Sensor Adjust). For DVC5000 Series instruments, the instrument mode must be Out Of Service to calibrate the travel sensor. If the instrument mode is not Out Of Service, the ValveLink software prompts you to change the instrument mode. Also, the instrument protection must be set to None. If not, the ValveLink software prompts you to change the instrument protection. For more information on changing an instruments mode and protection, see subsections 5.1.4 and 5.1.5. For DVC5000f Series instruments, the AO block must be Out of Service. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment procedure, ValveLink software warns you the instrument and actuator pressure should be disconnected. Click OK to continue. Perform one of the following procedures to calibrate the travel sensor, depending on the type of instrument and the mounting. VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-19

Detailed Calibration

14.5.1

DVC5010, DVC5010f, DVC5030 and DVC5030f on Fisher Actuators, DVC5040 and DVC5040f Digital Valve Controllers The travel sensor is normally adjusted at the factory and should not require adjustment. However, if the travel sensor has been replaced, adjust the travel sensor by performing the following procedure. See the “Maintenance” section, of the instrument instruction manual for travel sensor replacement procedures. Step 1:

Remove supply air and remove the instrument from the actuator.

Note The alignment pin (key 46) is stored inside the digital valve controller housing.

Step 2:

As shown in figure 14-6, align the feedback arm (key 79) with the housing by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the housing.

Step 3:

Depending on the instrument, perform one or the other of the following: For DVC5000 Series instruments, connect a current source to the instrument LOOP – and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the HART modem or multiplexer to the instrument. For DVC5000f Series instruments, connect the instrument to the fieldbus segment or to a FOUNDATION fieldbus power hub.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

14-20

Detailed Calibration

Alignment Pin (key 46)

Feedback Arm (key 79)

Bias Spring (key 78)

.75 1A

1.5 2

Travel Sensor Shaft

Figure 14-6. Type DVC5010 Digital Valve Controller Showing Feedback Arm in Position for Travel Sensor Adjustment

Step 4:

Loosen the screw that secures the feedback arm to the travel sensor shaft.

Step 5:

Depending on the instrument, perform one or the other of the following: For DVC5000 Series instruments, note the hardware revision and adjust the travel sensor counts to the value listed in table 14-2. For DVC5000f Series instruments, adjust the travel sensor counts to the value listed in table 14-3.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

14-21

Detailed Calibration

Table 14-2 DVC5000 Series Digital Valve Controller Travel Sensor Counts Travel Sensor Counts

Digital Valve Controller Type

Hardware Rev 2

Hardware Rev 3, 4, and 5

DVC5010 or DVC5040

2000 ±300

4000 ±300

DVC5020

6700 ±300

7200 ±300

DVC5030 mounted on actuator Types 1051, 1052, and 1066SR

2000 ±300

3500 ±300

DVC5030 mounted on other actuators

clockwise shaft rotation(1) 10000 ±300

counterclockwise shaft rotation(1) 2000 ±300

counterclockwise shaft rotation(1) 3500 ±300

1. Travel sensor shaft rotation for actuator increasing air pressure, when viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft.

Table 14-3 DVC5000f Series Digital Valve Controller Travel Sensor Counts Digital Valve Controller Type

Travel Sensor Counts

DVC5010f, DVC5030f, or DVC5040f

15000 ±2000

DVC5020f

30000 ±2500

14.5.2

Step 6:

While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten the screw that secures the feedback arm to the travel sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain within the tolerances listed in table 14-2 or 14-3. Paint the screw to discourage tampering with the connection.

Step 7:

Remove the alignment pin and store it in the instrument housing.

Step 8:

Install the digital valve controller on the actuator as described in the “Installation” section of the instrument instruction manual.

DVC5020 and DVC5020f Digital Valve Controllers The travel sensor is normally adjusted at the factory and should not require adjustment. However, if the travel sensor has been replaced, adjust the travel sensor by performing the following procedure. See the “Maintenance” section of the instrument instruction manual for travel sensor replacement procedures. Step 1:

July 2000

Remove supply air and remove the instrument from the actuator. VL2000 Series

14-22

Detailed Calibration

Step 2:

See figure 14-7 for parts identification. Disconnect the bias spring (key 82) from the feedback arm assembly (key 84) and the arm assembly (key 91). Remove the mounting bracket (key 74) from the back of the digital controller.

Step 3:

Depending on the instrument, perform one or the other of the following: For DVC5000 Series instruments, connect a current source to the instrument LOOP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the HART modem or multiplexer to the instrument. For DVC5000f Series instruments, connect the instrument to the fieldbus segment or to a FOUNDATION fieldbus power hub.

Step 4:

Loosen the screw that secures the arm assembly to the travel sensor shaft.

Step 5:

Hold the arm assembly (key 91) so that the arm assembly points toward the terminal box and the arm is parallel to the back of the housing, as shown in figure 14-8.

Step 6:

Step 7:

VL2000 Series

While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten the screw that secures the arm assembly to the travel sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain within the tolerances listed in table 14-2 or 14-3. Paint the screw to discourage tampering with the connection. July 2000

14-23

Detailed Calibration

MOUNTING ADAPTER (KEY 117)

CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET (KEY 116)

MOUNTING BRACKET (KEY 74)

BIAS SPRING (KEY 82)

CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD (KEY 92)

ARM ASSEMBLY PIN

ARM ASSEMBLY (KEY 91)

FEEDBACK ARM TORSION SPRING (KEY 93)

FEEDBACK ARM ASSEMBLY (KEY 84)

Figure 14-7. Type DVC5020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Type 1052, Size 33 Actuator

Step 8:

July 2000

Apply lubricant (key 63) to the pin portion of the arm assembly (key 91). VL2000 Series

14-24

Detailed Calibration

BACK EDGE OF ARM PARALLEL W/BACK OF HOUSING

ARM ASSEMBLY ARM ASSEMBLY PIN

TRAVEL SENSOR SHAFT

BACK OF HOUSING

Figure 14-8. Type DVC5020 Travel Sensor Arm/Housing Back Plane Alignment

14.5.3

Step 9:

Replace the mounting bracket on the back of the instrument and reconnect the bias spring between the feedback arm assembly and the arm assembly on the travel sensor shaft.

Step 10:

Install the digital valve controller on the actuator as described in the “Installation” section of the instrument instruction manual.

DVC5030 and DVC5030f Digital Valve Controller on Other Actuators When using a flexible coupler to connect the travel sensor shaft to the actuator shaft of other than Fisher actuators, travel sensor adjustment is part of the installation procedure for Type DVC5030 and DVC5030f digital valve controllers. Install the digital valve controller as described in the “Installation” section of the instrument instruction manual. When you are ready to perform the step that requires travel sensor adjustment, perform one or the other of the following procedures, depending on the instrument:

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Detailed Calibration

14.5.3.1

14.5.3.2

July 2000

14-25

DVC5030f Series Instruments Step 1:

Connect the instrument to the fieldbus segment or to the FOUNDATION fieldbus power hub.

Step 2:

Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set the AO block mode to Out of Service.

Step 3:

Adjust the travel sensor counts to the value listed in table 14-3.

Step 4:

Tighten the coupler set screw to secure the coupler to the shaft connector cap pin, tie bar assembly, or spindle. If the coupler set screw is not accessible due to obstructions, loosen the coupler set screw on the travel sensor shaft and rotate the coupler. Then, tighten the coupler set screw and repeat Step 3.

Step 5:

After completing the travel sensor adjustment, perform the remainder of the installation procedure in the “Installation” section instrument instruction manual.

DVC5030 Series Instruments Step 1:

Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP – and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the HART modem or multiplexer to the instrument.

Step 2:

Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the protection to None.

Step 3:

Note the travel sensor shaft rotation with increasing air pressure.

Step 4:

Note the hardware revision and adjust the travel sensor counts to the value listed in table 14-2. VL2000 Series

14-26

VL2000 Series

Detailed Calibration

Step 5:

Step 6:

After completing the travel sensor adjustment, perform the remainder of the installation procedure in the â&#x20AC;&#x153;Installationâ&#x20AC;? section of the instrument instruction manual.

July 2000

15-1

Diagnostics

Diagnostics1515 15.1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 Working with Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.1 Running a Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.2 Cancelling a Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.3 Low Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.4 Setting the Collection Interval for Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . 15.1.2 Selecting Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-4 15-4 15-4 15-5 15-5 15-5 15-6

15.2

Tests to Check and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 15.2.1 Viewing Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 15.2.1.1 Viewing the DVC5000 Series Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 15.2.1.1.1 Monitor Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 15.2.1.1.2 Alerts Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 15.2.1.1.3 Device Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 15.2.1.1.4 Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 15.2.1.2 Viewing the DVC5000f Series Instrument Status . . . . . . . . 15-18 15.2.1.2.1 Monitor Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 15.2.1.2.2 Alerts - Transducer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 15.2.1.2.3 Alarms - Transducer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24 15.2.1.2.4 Alarms - Resource Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25 15.2.1.2.5 Device - Transducer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26 15.2.1.2.6 Device - Resource Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28 15.2.1.2.7 Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29 15.2.2 Trending (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29 15.2.2.1 Setting Up for Trending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29 15.2.2.2 The Trend List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31 15.2.2.3 Viewing Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31 15.2.2.4 The Trend Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32 15.2.2.4.1 Control Trend Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33 15.2.2.4.2 Travel Activity Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36 15.2.2.4.3 Travel History Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36 July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-2

Diagnostics

15.2.3

15.3

Viewing the Alert Record (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38

Tests to Diagnose an Instrument and Valve . . . . . 15-40

15.3.1 Diagnostic Test Page Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.1 Inputs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.2 Config Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.2.1 Dynamic Scan Tests (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.2.2 Total Scan Test (DVC5000f Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.3 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.4 Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1.5 Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Running a Total Scan Test (DVC5000f Series) . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.1 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.2 Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.3 Analyzed Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.3.1 Sliding-Stem Valves, Analyzed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.3.2 Rotary Valves, Analyzed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.4 Valve Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.5 Trim Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.6 Actuator Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.7 Reference Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.8 Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Running the Dynamic Error Band Test (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3.1 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3.2 Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3.3 Analyzed Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.4 Running the Drive Signal Test (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . . . 15.3.4.1 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.4.2 Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.5 Running the Output Signal Test (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . 15.3.5.1 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.5.2 Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.6 Running the Step Response Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.6.1 Input Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.6.2 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VL2000 Series

15-41 15-41 15-43 15-43 15-46 15-47 15-50 15-50 15-51 15-52 15-52 15-53 15-53 15-55 15-56 15-58 15-59 15-60 15-61 15-62 15-64 15-64 15-65 15-66 15-68 15-68 15-69 15-70 15-71 15-72 15-73 15-75

July 2000

15-3

Diagnostics

15.3.6.3 15.3.6.4 15.3.7

Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzed Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Valve Signature Test (DVC5000 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.1 Graph Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.2 Data Points Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.3 Analyzed Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.3.1 Sliding-Stem Valves, Analyzed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.3.2 Rotary Valves, Analyzed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.4 Valve Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.5 Trim Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.6 Actuator Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.7 Reference Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.7.8 Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.8 Running the Stroke Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

July 2000

15-75 15-76 15-77 15-79 15-80 15-81 15-81 15-82 15-83 15-85 15-87 15-88 15-89 15-90

VL2000 Series

15-4

Diagnostics

The following subsections describe the Diagnostics feature of ValveLink software. Diagnostics allows you to actively diagnose and troubleshoot instruments and control valves. There are two types of diagnostics available: checks and tests. Diagnostic checks allow you to display and monitor an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s condition. Diagnostic checks available include: Viewing Instrument Status (subsection 15.2.1) Diagnostic tests permit you to run interactive tests that move the valve, poll for data, and display the data graphically. Diagnostic tests available include: Dynamic Error Band Test (subsection 15.3.3) Drive Signal Test (subsection 15.3.4) Output Signal Test (subsection 15.3.5) Step Response Test (subsection 15.3.6) Valve Signature Test (subsection 15.3.7) Stroke Valve Test (subsection 15.3.8) For DVC5000 Series instruments communicating via multiplexers, you can also trend valve performance. Some diagnostic tests may not be available with your installed configuration of the software. To see which tests are available, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink.

15.1

Getting

Started

15.1.1

Working with Diagnostics

15.1.1.1

Running a Diagnostic Test To use the diagnostic feature you must first open or activate an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. After you open a tag, the software loads the instrument mode, control mode and key data.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-5

To setup, calibrate, or test an instrument, you must have the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag open or active. The status bar always displays data from the open tag. To open a tag, you can select File and, from the ValveLink main menu, select a tag from the list, or you can double click on the desired tag. If you close a tag window, you also close the tag. To continue working with a tag, do not close its window. Instead, select another option from the ValveLink menu. A new tag window replaces the previous window.

15.1.1.2

Cancelling a Diagnostic Test While running diagnostic tests, ValveLink displays a progress bar in a window with a Cancel button. To cancel a test in progress, click the Cancel button. The system pauses as ValveLink restores the instrument configuration and prepares the instrument to be used for other tests. If a diagnostic test stops abruptly, for example, if the 4 to 20 mA signal fails during a test, ValveLink attempts to restore the instrument setup. If ValveLink cannot restore the setup, the system notifies you with a message. To correct the error, use Detailed Setup to manually restore the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s configuration from the database.

15.1.1.3

Low Power Warning For DVC5000 Series instruments, ValveLink checks to see if the analog input current is less than 3.8 mA before running a diagnostic test which moves the valve. If it is, the system displays a message and asks whether you want to proceed. To continue with the test, click Yes. To cancel and check the analog input current before continuing, click No.

15.1.1.4

Setting the Collection Interval for Diagnostic Tests To set the collection interval for diagnostic tests, open the Preferences window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Preferences.) If the Diagnostics page is not displayed, click on the Diagnostics tab to display the page.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-6

Diagnostics

Enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, between collecting data points for graphing while the ValveLink software polls for data during diagnostic tests. Lower values will cause more points to be generated. However, too low a value may cause communication errors to occur. A typical collection interval is 150 milliseconds. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the Save button to save your changes. Click OK to close the confirmation message.

15.1.2

Selecting Units of Measure To select the units of measure, open the Preferences window. (From the menu bar select Customize ValveLink, then select Preferences.) If the Units page is not displayed, click on the Units tab to display the page. To select a desired unit of measure, click on the appropriate options button. You can select units of measure from any of the three systems displayed. Not all units need be from the same system. For example, you can specify length in inches, pressure in bar, and torque in kgf meter. When you finish entries in all of the Preferences pages, click the Save button to save your changes. Click OK to close the confirmation message.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-7

Diagnostics

Figure 15-1. ValveLink Instrument Status Window, Monitor Page Shown

15.2

Tests

Check

and

15.2.1

Viewing Instrument Status

Monitor

The Instrument Status window provides instrument signal values, alerts, serial numbers, last calibration location and date, hardware and software revision dates for an open tag. When you first open a tag, ValveLink automatically opens the Instrument Status window for that tag. Figure 15-1 shows a typical Instrument Status window. When you make a menu selection, the new window replaces the Instrument Status window. To re-display the Instrument Status window: For an instrument with an open tag you can either: Click the Instrument Status button on the toolbar, or July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-8

Diagnostics

Right click the instrument tag then select Status from the dropdown menu, or Select Diagnostics from the menu bar, then select Status from the Diagnostics menu To monitor the instrument and update the data, click the Start Monitoring button near the bottom of the window. When you start monitoring, ValveLink polls the instrument in a cyclic mode. To stop monitoring, click the End Monitoring button. To save the new instrument information to the ValveLink database, click the Save Dataset button. To review previously saved data, click the list box arrow near the Dataset box. Click on the desired dataset from the list to select it.

15.2.1.1

Viewing the DVC5000 Series Instrument Status The Instrument Status window for DVC5000 Series instruments consists of four pages: Monitor, Alerts, Device, and Notes. To view the data on a page, click the tab for that page to bring it to the front. The following define the fields displayed on the pages of the Instrument Status Window.

15.2.1.1.1

Monitor Page The following lists the items that appear on the Monitor page as defaults. You can select other items for display (described after the list of default items) by clicking on an item, then clicking the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. Travel Set Point, Travel, Actuator Pressure, Drive Signal, Input Current, Travel Deviation, and Temperature are available in both digital format as well as in bar graph format. Travel Set Pointâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Available in digital or bar graph format. Requested valve position. If the zero control signal equals valve closed then for a ranged input of 0% the travel set point equals 0%. If the zero control signal equals valve open, then for a ranged input of 0% the travel set point equals 100%. Travelâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Available in digital or bar graph format. Stem or shaft position in percent of ranged travel.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-9

Diagnostics

Actuator Pressure—Available in digital or bar graph format. The instrument’s output pressure in kPa, bar or psi. Drive Signal—Available in digital or bar graph format. Indicates the drive signal, in percent of the maximum drive, going to the I/P converter from the printed wiring board.

Note In most applications, the drive signal ranges between 50% and 75% of the maximum drive signal in a control range of 10% – 90%. If an instrument shows drive signals consistently greater or less than this range, consider running additional diagnostic tests.

Input Current—Available in digital or bar graph format. The instrument’s input current in milliamperes. Travel Deviation—Available in digital or bar graph format. Percent (%) of ranged travel. Indicates the difference between the target and the ranged travel. Cycle Count—Indicates the number of times the travel changes direction. The change in direction must occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it is counted as a cycle. The Cycle Counter can be reset during Detailed Setup.

Note The Cycle Counter records the number of times the travel changes direction. The change in direction must occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it is counted as a cycle.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-10

Diagnostics

Travel Accumulator—Percent of ranged travel. Total change in travel since the accumulator was last cleared. Value of the Travel Accumulator increments when the magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel Accumulator Deadband. The Travel Accumulator can be reset during Detailed Setup. Temperature—Available in digital or bar graph format. The instrument’s internal temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. The temperature sensor is on the instrument printed wiring board. Input Characterization—Defines the relationship between the ranged travel and ranged setpoint. Ranged setpoint is the input to the characterization function. If the zero control signal equals closed, then a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 0%. If the zero control signal equals open, a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%. Ranged travel is the output from the characterization function. Four Input Characterizations are available: Linear, Equal Percentage, Quick Opening, or Custom. The following lists the items that are available by clicking on one of the displayed items, then clicking the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. Control Mode—Indicates instrument control mode: Analog, Digital, or Test. Instrument Mode—Indicates if the instrument is In Service or Out Of Service. If the instrument is Out Of Service the valve position does not change with changes in input current. Free Time—Percent of time the microprocessor (MPU) is idle. A typical value is 25%. The actual value depends on the number of functions in the instrument that are enabled and on the amount of communication currently in progress. Burst Mode—(DVC5000 Series with firmware rev. 5 only) When active, indicates the burst mode is currently enabled.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-11

Diagnostics

15.2.1.1.2

Alerts Page

Note Alerts are not available with instrument level HC.

There are four columns on the Alerts page: Status, Enabled, Current Value, and Alert Point. A red indicator in the Status column appears when the alert is active. A YES in the Enabled column indicates that if the Current Value exceeds the alert point for the alert condition, the instrument will send an alert. See Section 3 for information on setting alert options. The values in the Current Value column are the values polled from the instrument if actively monitoring, or the last values polled if viewing a saved dataset. The values in the Alert Point column are the values, if exceeded, which will cause an alert to activate when the alert is enabled. The alert points are set from the Detailed Setup window. The following lists the items that appear on the page by default. You can select other items for display (described after the list of default items) by clicking on an item, then click the list arrow. From the dropdown list, select the item you wish to display.

Note For firmware revision 3 or later, if the Instrument Mode is set to Out Of Service, a warning informs you that the monitor cannot identify travel alerts. To monitor for travel alerts, change the Instrument Mode to In Service and run the Alert Monitor again.

Travel Hiâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Hi Alert Point. The Travel Hi alert is active if the ranged travel is greater than July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-12

Diagnostics

Alert is active

Travel Hi Alert Point

Travel Alert Deadband

Ranged Travel Alert is Cleared

Figure 15-2. Travel Alert Deadband, Travel Hi Alert Example

the Travel Hi Alert Point. Once the Travel Hi alert is active, the ranged travel must fall below the Travel Hi Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-2. Travel Lo—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Lo Alert Point. The Travel Lo alert is active if the ranged travel is less than the Travel Lo Alert Point. Once the Travel Lo alert is active, the ranged travel must rise above the Travel Lo Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-2. Travel Hi Hi—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point. The Travel Hi Hi alert is active if the ranged travel is greater than the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point. Once the Travel Hi Hi alert is active, the ranged travel must fall below the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-2. Travel Lo Lo—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point. The Travel Lo Lo alert is active if the ranged travel is less than the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point. Once the Travel Lo Lo alert is active, the ranged travel must rise above the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-2. VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-13

Diagnostics

Travel Deviation—Checks the difference between the target and the ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. It remains active until the difference is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Point.

Cycle Count—Checks the difference between the Cycle Counter and the Cycle Counter Alert point. The Cycle Counter Alert is active when the value exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert point. It is cleared after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less than the alert point. Travel Accumulator—Checks the difference between the Travel Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than the alert point. Aux Terminal—Checks the status of an auxiliary input, which is a discrete input. The Auxiliary Input Alert is active when its auxiliary input terminals are closed (shorted). Configuration Changed—When active, indicates that the instrument’s configuration has changed and the configuration changed flag has not been cleared by the ValveLink software or another primary master. The following lists the items that are available by clicking on one of the displayed items, then clicking the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-14

Diagnostics

Analog Input Saturated—When active, indicates the analog input is at the limit of the instrument’s ability to read it. Internal Sensor Out of Limits—When active, indicates a possible problem with the pressure sensor or the pwb assembly submodule. Variable Out of Range—When active, indicates a possible problem with the actual analog input signal, the I/P converter submodule, the pneumatic relay submodule, or the pwb assembly submodule. Calibration in Progress—When active, indicates that the ValveLink software is currently running, or has recently completed, a calibration sequence on the instrument. Diagnostic in Progress—When active, indicates that ValveLink is currently running, or has recently completed, a diagnostic test on the instrument. The failure conditions listed, including Watch Dog Timer and No Free Time, are those conditions that, when they occur, could cause an instrument to shut down. Upon shutdown, the instrument attempts to drive its output pressure to the zero input condition and the instrument no longer executes its control function. In addition, the instrument sets the appropriate status indicator to active. After correcting the problem that caused the shutdown, restart the instrument by removing power, then applying power. Instrument shutdown is enabled from the Detailed Setup window. A YES in the Enabled column does not indicate that the instrument will shutdown when the failure status is active. It only means if the condition occurs the instrument will send an alert. See Section 3 for information on setting alert options. A NO in this column indicates that when the failure condition occurs the instrument will not report the alert. A red indicator In the status column (active) indicates the failure condition exists. Travel Sensor Fail—When active, indicates a possible failure of the travel sensor assembly. The status is active when the sensed travel is outside the range –25% to 125% of the calibrated travel. Check the instrument mounting and travel sensor adjustment. In addition, check that the electrical connection from the travel sensor VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-15

Diagnostics

is properly plugged into the printed wiring board assembly. If the status is still active after restarting, replace the printed wiring board assembly. Temperature Sensor Fail—When active, indicates the instrument temperature sensor failed, or the sensor reading is outside of the range –40 to 80 degrees Celsius (–40 to 176 degrees Fahrenheit). The temperature reading is used internally for temperature compensation of inputs. Try restarting the instrument. If the status is still active after restart, replace the pwb assembly. Pressure Sensor Fail—When active, indicates the output pressure is outside the range –24 to 125% of the calibrated pressure for more than 30 seconds. To clear an active status, check the instrument supply pressure. If the failure persists, check that the pwb assembly is properly mounted on the module base assembly, and that the pressure sensor O-ring is properly installed. If the status is still active after restarting the instrument, replace the pwb assembly.

Note An active status for a Pressure Sensor Fail condition does not cause the instrument to shut down. Shutdown Enabled is not applicable for this failure condition.

Drive Current Fail—(DVC5000 Series with firmware rev. 5 only) When active, indicates the drive current does not match the drive signal. Critical NVM Fail—When active, indicates the Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) integrity test failed. NVM stores configuration restart data. To clear an active status, try restarting the instrument. If the status is still active after restart, replace the pwb assembly. Watch Dog Timer—When active indicates a failure on the pwb assembly submodule. To clear an active status, try restarting the July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-16

Diagnostics

instrument. If the status is still active after restart, replace the pwb assembly. Shutdown Enabled is always YES for this failure condition; you cannot disable it. RAM Failure—When active, indicates the Random Access Memory (RAM) integrity test failed. RAM stores dynamic data. To clear an active status, try restarting the instrument. If the status is still active after restart, replace the pwb assembly. No Free Time—When active, indicates the instrument is unable to complete all of its configured tasks. This failure does not occur with a properly functioning instrument.

Maintenance Tip You can enable or disable shutdown for a hard failure condition from the Self Test Shut Down page in the Detailed Setup window.

15.2.1.1.3

Device Page Message—A text message of up to 32 characters entered through Detailed Setup. May be used to record maintenance history. Descriptor—Brief description of the instrument. Instrument Serial Number—This field contains the serial number assigned to the instrument by the factory. HART Universal Revision—Revision level of the HART Universal Commands which are the communications protocol for the instrument. Hardware Revision—Revision level of the instrument hardware.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-17

Diagnostics

Device Revision—Revision level of the software for communications between the ValveLink software and the instrument. Firmware Revision—The revision level of the instrument firmware. This value is entered at the factory. Device ID—A unique identifier assigned to the instrument by the factory. This value cannot be changed. Instrument Level—Indicates the instrument level AC—Auto Calibrate HC—HART Communicating SD—Standard Diagnostics AD—Advanced Diagnostics Table 15-1 lists the functions available for each instrument level. Table 15-1. Functions Available for Instrument Level Instrument Level

Functions Available

Communicates with Model 275 HART Communicator. Provides initial setup and calibration

Communicates with Model 275 HART Communicator and ValveLink software Provides initial setup and calibration, travel cutoffs and limits, minimum opening and closing times, input characterization (linear, equal percentage, quick opening, and custom). Diagnostics limited to travel, cycle counter, drive signal, and pressure readback.

Includes all functions listed above plus: Alerts; travel deviation, travel alert 1 & 2 (high and low), travel limits & cutoffs (high and low), drive signal, auxiliary terminal, cycle counter, travel accumulation. Provides all off–line diagnostic tests (dynamic error band, drive signal, output signal, and step response) except valve signature.

Includes all functions listed above plus valve signature diagnostic test

Pressure Sensor—Indicates if the instrument includes a pressure sensor. Valve Serial Number—The serial number of the valve with which the instrument is associated. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-18

Diagnostics

Calibration Locationâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;The location of the last instrument calibration: Factory or Field. Calibration Dateâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;This field can be used to display either the date of the last calibration or the date of the next calibration.

Maintenance Tip Many of the data fields stored in the instrument can be changed from the Detailed Setup window.

15.2.1.1.4

Notes Page The Notes page permits you to add a description to the dataset name and permits adding notes that are included with the test data in a dataset. To add a description to the dataset name, type the description in the Dataset Description box. When you save your notes the description is added to the Dataset box at the top of the Instrument Status window. To enter notes, begin typing your note in the Notes box. Text automatically wraps to the next line as necessary; you do not need to press the Enter key at the end of each line. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor and select existing text to type over or delete. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Notes box to see more text.

15.2.1.2

Viewing the DVC5000f Series Instrument Status The Instrument Status window for DVC5000f Series instruments consists of seven pages: Monitor, Alerts - Transducer, Alarms Transducer, Alarms - Resource, Device - Transducer, Device - Re-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-19

source, and Notes. To view the data on a page, click the tab for that page to bring it to the front. The following define the fields displayed on the pages of the Instrument Status Window.

15.2.1.2.1

Monitor Page The following lists the items that appear on the Monitor page as defaults. You can select other items for display (described after the list of default items) by clicking on an item, then click the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. Travel Set Point, Travel, Actuator Pressure, Drive Signal, Travel Deviation, and Temperature are available in both digital format as well as in bar graph format. Travel Deviation—Available in digital or bar graph format. Percent (%) of ranged travel. Indicates the difference between the target and the ranged travel. Drive Signal—Available in digital or bar graph format. Indicates the drive signal, in percent of the maximum drive, going to the I/P converter from the printed wiring board. Cycle Count—Indicates the number of times the travel changes direction. The change in direction must occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it is counted as a cycle. See figure 15-3. The Cycle Counter can be reset during Detailed Setup.

Note The Cycle Counter records the number of times the travel changes direction. The change in direction must occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it is counted as a cycle.

Travel Accumulator—Percent of ranged travel. Total change in travel since the accumulator was last cleared. Value of the Travel July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-20

Diagnostics

Accumulator increments when the magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel Accumulator Deadband. See figure 15-3. The Travel Accumulator can be reset during Detailed Setup. Temperature—Available in digital or bar graph format. The instrument’s internal temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. The temperature sensor is on the instrument printed wiring board. Input Characterization—Defines the relationship between the ranged travel and ranged setpoint. Ranged setpoint is the input to the characterization function. If the zero control signal equals closed, then a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 0%. If the zero control signal equals open, a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%. Ranged travel is the output from the characterization function. Four Input Characterizations are available: Linear, Equal Percentage, Quick Opening, or Custom. NVM Write Count—Indicates the number of writes to non-volatile memory. Transducer Block Mode—The actual mode of the transducer block. The actual mode may differ from the target mode due to operating conditions of the block. Resource Block Mode—The actual mode of the resource block. The actual mode may differ from the target mode due to operating conditions of the block. Output Block Mode—The actual mode of the analog output (AO) block. The actual mode may differ from the target mode due to operating conditions of the block. The following lists the items that are available by clicking on one of the displayed items, then clicking the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. Fault State—When Set, indicates a loss of communication to the output block or a physical contact. When fault state is active, the AO function block performs its FState functions. Travel Set Point—Available in digital or bar graph format. Requested valve position considering the zero control signal. If the zero VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-21

Diagnostics

control signal equals valve closed then for a ranged input of 0% the travel set point equals 0%. If the zero control signal equals valve open, then for a ranged input of 0% the travel set point equals 100%. Travel—Available in digital or bar graph format. Stem or shaft position in percent of ranged travel. Actuator Pressure—Available in digital or bar graph format. The instrument’s output pressure in kPa, bar or psi.

15.2.1.2.2

Alerts - Transducer Page There are four columns on the Alerts page: Status, Enabled, Current Value, and Alert Point. A red indicator in the Status column appears when the alert is active. A YES in the Enabled column indicates that if the Current Value exceeds the alert point for the alert condition, the instrument will send an alert. See Section 3 for information on setting alert options. A NO in this column indicates that no alert is sent for this alert condition. The values in the Current Value column are the values polled from the instrument if actively monitoring, or the last values polled if viewing a saved dataset. The values in the Alert Point column are the values, if exceeded, which will cause an alert to activate when the alert is enabled. The alert points are set from the Detailed Setup window. The following lists the items that appear on the page by default. You can select other items for display (described after the list of default items) by clicking on an item, then click the list arrow. From the dropdown list, select the item you wish to display.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-22

Diagnostics

Alert is active

Travel Hi Alert Point

Travel Alert Deadband

Ranged Travel Alert is Cleared

Figure 15-3. Travel Alert Deadband, Travel Hi Alert Example

Travel Hi—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Hi Alert Point. The Travel Hi alert is active if the ranged travel is greater than the Travel Hi Alert Point. Once the Travel Hi alert is active, the ranged travel must fall below the Travel Hi Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-3. Travel Lo—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Lo Alert Point. The Travel Lo alert is active if the ranged travel is less than the Travel Lo Alert Point. Once the Travel Lo alert is active, the ranged travel must rise above the Travel Lo Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-3. Travel Hi Hi—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point. The Travel Hi Hi alert is active if the ranged travel is greater than the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point. Once the Travel Hi Hi alert is active, the ranged travel must fall below the Travel Hi Hi Alert Point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-3. Travel Lo Lo—Checks the ranged travel against the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point. The Travel Lo Lo alert is active if the ranged travel is less than the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point. Once the Travel Lo Lo alert is active, the ranged travel must rise above the Travel Lo Lo Alert Point VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-23

by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure 15-3. Travel Deviation—Checks the difference between the target and the ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. It remains active until the difference is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Point. Cycle Count—Checks the difference between the Cycle Counter and the Cycle Counter Alert point. The Cycle Counter Alert is active when the value exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert point. It is cleared after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less than the alert point. Travel Accumulator—Checks the difference between the Travel Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than the alert point. Temperature Hi—Checks the instrument’s internal temperature against the Temperature Hi Alert Point. The Temperature Hi alert is active if the instruments internal temperature is greater than the Temperature Hi Alert Point. Temperature Lo—Checks the instrument’s internal temperature against the Temperature Lo Alert Point. The Temperature Lo alert is active if the instruments internal temperature is less than the Temperature Lo Alert Point. NVM Write Limit—Checks the number of NVM writes against the NVM Count Limit. The NVM Write Limit alert is active if the number of NVM writes exceeds the NVM Count LImit. The following lists the items that are available by clicking on one of the displayed items, then clicking the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. Drive Signal—Checks the drive signal against the drive signal alert point. The Drive Signal alert is active if the drive signal has exceeded the Drive Signal Alert Point for a time period greater than the Drive Signal Alert Time. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-24

Diagnostics

Travel Set Point Time Out—When active, indicates the transducer block has not received a set point from the analog output block within the Output Blk Timeout period. I/P Feedback—Checks the I/P feedback current against the I/P Feedback alert point. The I/P Feedback alert is active if the I/P feedback current has exceeded the I/P Feedback Alert Point for a time period greater than the I/P Feedback Alert Time.

15.2.1.2.3

Alarms - Transducer Page The red indicator in the Status column appears when the alert is active. The following lists the items that appear on the page by default. You can select other items for display (described after the list of default items) by clicking on an item, then click the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. Other Than Block Alert—Indicates an alarm exists other than a block error. Local Override—Indicates transducer block has started offline diagnostics. Target and actual modes are Auto. Instrument Fault State—Indicates a condition set by loss of communication to an output block, fault promoted by an output block, or a loss of physical contact. Maint Need Soon—Indicates an NVM failure on write or a pressure sensor failure. Memory Failure—Indicates an NVM failure on read or write. Maint Needed Now—Indicates travel sensor reading is not between Feedback Low and Feedback High values, an I/O processor error, or an NVM failure on read. Out of Service—Indicates the actual block mode is Out of Service. If the target mode is not Out of Service, an actual block mode of Out of Service could indicate a travel sensor failure, an I/O processor error, a drive failure, a pressure sensor failure, an output block time out, or an NVM failure on read.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-25

Travel Sensor High Error—Indicates the travel sensor has exceeded the normal range of operation at the high end. Check the instrument mounting and travel sensor adjustment. Check the electrical connection between the travel sensor and printed wiring board assembly. Travel Sensor Low Error—Indicates the travel sensor has exceeded the normal range of operation at the low end. Check the instrument mounting and travel sensor adjustment. Check the electrical connection between the travel sensor and printed wiring board assembly. Voltage Reference Error—Indicates the voltage reference for the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter is out of tolerance. The following lists the items that are available by clicking on one of the displayed items, then clicking the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display. I/O Processor Other Error—Indicates an I/O processor failure or the data it received is not reliable. I/O Config Error—Indicates data received by the I/O processor is not reliable. I/O Processor Time Out—Indicates I/O processor could not process data within the allotted time. Pressure Sensor Failure—Indicates the output pressure is outside the normal operating range. Check supply pressure or check to be sure printed wiring board assembly is properly installed. Simulate Jumper—Indicates the simulate jumper is installed.

15.2.1.2.4

Alarms - Resource Page The red indicator in the Status column appears when the alert is active. The following lists the items that appear on the page by default. You can select any of these items for display by clicking on an item, then click the list arrow. From the drop-down list, select the item you wish to display.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-26

Diagnostics

Out of Service—Indicates the actual block mode is Out of Service. If the target mode is not Out of Service, an actual block mode of Out of Service could indicate a hardware or memory failure. Simulation Active—Indicates the simulate jumper is installed. Instrument Fault State—Indicates a condition set by loss of communication to an output block, fault promoted by an output block, or a loss of physical contact. Maint Need Soon—Indicates an NVM failure on write. Maint Needed Now—Indicates NVM failure on read or write. Memory Failure—Indicates an NVM failure on read or write. Lost Static Data—Indicates reinitialization of static data on power up or Restart with Defaults has been executed. This alarm is cleared when the actual block mode is Auto. Lost NVM Data—Indicates reinitialization of NVM data on power up or Restart with Defaults has been executed. If no NVM failure exists, this alarm is cleared when the actual block mode is Auto Other Than Block Alert—Indicates an alarm exists other than a block error.

15.2.1.2.5

Device - Transducer Page The following defines the fields that appear on the Device - Transducer page. Block Tag—A unique name for the transducer block. Tag Description—A description of the block to assist with further block identification. Message—A text message of up to 32 characters entered as part of detailed setup. May be used to record maintenance history. ValveLink Compatibility Revision—Indicates the diagnostic and calibration revision in the instrument.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-27

Hardware Revision—Indicates the revision number of the instrument electronics. Device ID—A unique identifier for the device assigned by the factory. Diagnostic Level—Indicates the diagnostic capabilities included in the instrument: Public, Standard, or Advanced. Control Level—Indicates the control capabilities included in the instrument: AO only, AO and PID, or DI and DO. Pressure Sensor—Indicates if a pressure sensor is installed on the printed wiring board assembly. Instrument Serial Number—Serial number assigned to the printed wiring board. This number is entered as part of detailed setup. Instrument Model Number—Indicates the instrument type number DVC5010f, DVC5020f, DVC5030f, or DVC5040f. This number is entered as part of detailed setup. Valve Serial Number—The serial number from the valve nameplate. This number is entered as part of detailed setup. Valve Manufacturer—The name of the company that manufactured the valve on which the instrument is mounted. This name is entered as part of detailed setup. Valve Model—The valve type or design. (for example, 8532, CE, etc.) on which the instrument is mounted. The model is entered as part of detailed setup. Valve Style—The style of valve, sliding-stem or rotary, on which the instrument is mounted. The style is entered as part of detailed setup. Actuator Serial Number—The serial number from the actuator nameplate. This number is entered as part of detailed setup. Actuator Manufacturer.—The name of the company that manufactured the actuator on which the instrument is mounted. This name is entered as part of detailed setup. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-28

Diagnostics

Actuator Model—The actuator type on which the instrument is mounted. The model is entered as part of detailed setup. Calibration Person—The name of the person responsible for the last instrument calibration. This name is entered as part of detailed setup. Calibration Location—The physical location where the last instrument calibration was performed (for example, factory, NIST, ACME Labs.). The location is entered as part of detailed setup. Calibration Date—The date of the last instrument calibration in the format mm/dd/yy, where mm equals month 01 to 12 dd equals day of the month 01 to 31 yy equals year The instrument is Y2K compliant, 00 is the year 2000. The date is entered as part of detailed setup.

15.2.1.2.6

Device - Resource Page Block Tag—A unique name for the resource block. Tag Description—A description of the block to assist with further block identification. Mfg ID—The manufacturer of the device where this block is located, used by the interface device to locate the DD file for this device. Device Type—Identifies the type of device where this block is located, used by the interface device to locate the DD file for this device. Device Revision—Manufacturer revision number associated with this device, used by the interface device to locate the DD file for this device. DD Revision—Revision of the device description (DD) associated with this device, used by the interface device to locate the DD file for this device.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-29

Max Unack Notificationsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;The maximum number of alert notifications that are unacknowledged by the receiving device. This value is the sum of the hexadecimal values for all unacknowledged alerts. Instrument Stateâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;The current state of the instrument. See the instrument instruction manual for a detailed description.

15.2.1.2.7

15.2.2

Trending (DVC5000 Series Only) Trending is only available for DVC5000 Series instruments communicating over a multiplexer network. Trending provides an easy visualization of valve response to a control system output. Trending is a diagnostic intended to monitor standard instrument parameters during normal process operations. You can view live data received over the multiplexer network or you can view archived data or data saved in a dataset.

15.2.2.1

Setting Up for Trending Before you can begin trending, you must specify the tags of the instruments that will be communicating the data you wish to trend.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-30

Diagnostics

Figure 15-4. Network Alert Scan Setup Window

These tags are identified through the Network Alert Scan Setup window, shown in figure 15-4. To identify these tags, open the Network Alert Scan window: Click the Network Scan button on the tool bar, or From the menu bar select Network, then select Network Scan. On the Network Alert Scan window, click the Setup button. Only tags that are available to communicate via a multiplexer can be scanned. To search the database for tags to scan, enter a tag or several characters of a tag in the Tag or Partial Tag box and press the Tab key. The software lists tags that match your entry in the Tags box. To list the tags to scan, in the Tags box, select the tags to be trended, then click the Add Selected Tags to the Scan List button to place them in the List of Tags to Scan box. To remove a tag from the List of Tags to Scan box, click on the tag to highlight it then click the Remove Tags from Scan List button. You can have the ValveLink software store the trend data for up to 1, 2, 7, 14, or 30 days in a buffer. Each tag has its own buffer. To set VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-31

the buffer size, click the Trending Setup button. Click the list arrow in the Buffer Size column for the instrument tag to select the buffer size. A buffer size of 0 disables trending for the instrument. When finished setting up the buffer sizes, click the Save button to save the buffer size information. On the Network Alert Scan Setup window, click the Save button to save the setup information. To start scanning the instruments, click the Start Scan button on the Network Alert Scan window. Scanning begins for the selected tags. To stop scanning, click the Stop Scan button.

15.2.2.2

The Trend List If the network is being actively scanned, you can see a list of all tags currently trended. To see the trend list, from the menu bar, select Network. From the Network menu, select Trend List. For each tag listed, the time last updated is displayed, along with the most recent travel, input, pressure, and temperature data. This list is constantly updated as data is received from the instruments.

15.2.2.3

Viewing Trends To view trend data for an instrument: 1. Open an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. 2. After opening a tag, either Click the Trend button on the toolbar, or Right click the tag and select Trend from the drop-down menu, or Select Diagnostics from the menu bar, then select Trend from the Diagnostics menu. 3. To display data as it is recorded, be sure the instrument is being scanned and the Live Data option button at the top of the trend window is selected. To view the various trend types, click the appropriate page tab. 4. To save data to a dataset, click the Pause button on the Control Trend page, then click the Save Dataset button.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-32

Diagnostics

Trending Started

Figure 15-5. ValveLink Trend Window

5. To view previously saved data, select the Dataset option button at the top of the trend window, select the desired dataset. To view the various trend types, click the appropriate page tab.

15.2.2.4

The Trend Window The Trend window is shown in figure 15-5. The following describes the options and buttons on the trend window. Live Dataâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Click this option button to update trends as data is received from the instrument. If the network is not being scanned, or for some reason the ValveLink software is not communicating with the instrument, the word Unavailable will appear after Live Data. When you click the pause button on the Control Trend page, Live Data changes to Paused to indicate the trend display update is paused. Datasetâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;While the trend display is paused, click this option button to review trend data stored in a dataset. Click the list arrow on the datasets list box to see a list of the datasets available.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-33

Archive—Click this option button to review trend data stored in an archive file. An archive file must be open before this option is available. You can review trend data stored in the archived buffer or in an archived dataset. Click the list arrow to see a list of archived datasets. For more information on archives, see the descriptions for the Save Archive and Open Archive buttons. Open Archive—Displays browse dialog box to permit selecting an archive file to open. In the Open dialog box, select the archive file you wish to open and click the Open button. Once open you can review the trend data in the archive file. See the Archive description above. Save Archive—Information in the trend buffer and the datasets is saved on the hard drive of the computer where the ValveLink software is installed. You can save the contents of the entire trend buffer and all saved datasets to an archive file. Archive permits you to backup the trend data on the same hard drive or on a network drive. Archived data is saved in a file with the extension .VTA. When you click the Save Archive button, the browse dialog box opens permitting you to specify a directory and filename for the archive file. Save Dataset—Clicking this button saves trend data from the current trend window to a dataset in the ValveLink database. The dataset is named with the date and time the data was saved. Delete Dataset—Clicking this button deletes the selected dataset from the ValveLink database or from the archive file. (Click the Datasets option button near the top of the window then select a dataset to delete from the Datasets: box.) Close Tag—Clicking this button closes the open tag and its current window. Help—Clicking this button provides help for the trend window. The trend window consists of three pages: Control Trend, Travel Activity, and Travel History. Some of the pages provide additional buttons. Refer to the appropriate subsection for the page to see a description of the functions provided by these buttons.

15.2.2.4.1

Control Trend Page As shown in figure 15-6, control data is presented in a strip chart format on the Control Trend page. You can display the trends of two

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-34

Diagnostics

Figure 15-6. Example Trend Window Control Trend Page

parameters simultaneously, one on the left Y axis and one on the right Y axis. You can select to display the trend for travel (in percent), input current (in mA), input set point (in percent), actuator pressure (in pressure units), or temperature (in temperature units) on either Y axis. The pressure units and temperature units are defined for the instrument as part of detailed setup. The X axis is always time. While displaying data actively being collected, the strip chart displays the most recent hour. To view more than an hours data, pause the trend by clicking the button. This does not stop the ValveLink software from Pause continuing to collect trend data. Pausing the trend only stops the trend chart from being updated. To start updating the trend display again, click the Resume

button.

While the trend display is paused, you can change the time scale of the trend chart. To change the time scale, on the trend chart display, position the mouse cursor at one corner of a box that includes the area on which you want to zoom in. Click and hold down the left mouse button while you drag the cursor to form a box around the area you would like to zoom in on. Releasing the mouse button VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-35

causes zoom to occur. To zoom out, click the Zoom Out button. Each click of the Zoom Out button doubles the time displayed. You can display data for up to a one week time period. While the trend display is zoomed in you can move forward and back along the time scale. Clicking the Oldest Data button moves the left end of the time scale to the beginning of the trend buffer or databutton moves the right end of the set. Clicking the Newest Data time scale to the end of the trend buffer or dataset. Clicking the Oldbutton moves the time scale back half the time diser Data played. For example, if the time scale is from 10:56 to 11:06 then a time period of 10 minutes is being displayed. Clicking the Older Data button will move the display back in time 5 minutes; the time scale will be from 10:51 to 11:01. Clicking the Newer Data moves the time scale forward half the time displayed.

button

The following describes the other buttons that appear on the Control Trend page. View Full Screen—Click on this button to enlarge the graph display to fill the screen. To return the display to its original size, click the Return to Test View button. Change Graph Display—Adds or removes highlights to individual data points on the graph. Add Grid Lines—Adds grid lines to the graph display. Click the button once to add horizontal and vertical grid lines at axis major divisions. Click a second time to add grid lines at axis major and minor divisions. Click the button a third time to remove the gridlines. Display a Graph Legend—Displays a quick reference for the colored lines on the graph. To remove the legend, click the button again. Copy Graph to Clipboard—Copies the graph into the Windows clipboard. You can then paste the graph from the clipboard into another Windows application. Print the Graph—Prints the graph on the system printer.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-36

Diagnostics

Figure 15-7. Trend Window Travel Activity Page

15.2.2.4.2

Travel Activity Page As shown in figure 15-7, the travel activity page displays the travel cycles and the percent of travel accumulation that occurred during the trend period. While the trend display is paused, you can change the time scale of the trend chart. To change the time scale, on the trend chart display, position the mouse cursor at one corner of a box that includes the area on which you want to zoom in. Click and hold down the left mouse button while you drag the cursor to form a box around the area you would like to zoom in on. Releasing the mouse button causes zoom to occur. To zoom out, click the Zoom Out button. Each click of the Zoom Out button doubles the time displayed. You can display data for up to a one week time period. For an explanation of the other buttons on the Travel Activity page, see the Control Trend page description.

15.2.2.4.3

Travel History Page Figure 15-8 shows the Travel History page. The Travel History page provides a travel histogram that shows you where the valve spends

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-37

Figure 15-8. Trend Window Travel History Page

the majority of its time. This information can be used to determine if the valve is correctly sized. For example, figure 15-8 shows that the valve spends nearly 25% of its time between 0 and 10% travel. The following is a description of the buttons on the Travel History page. View Full Screen—Click on this button to enlarge the graph display to fill the screen. To return the display to its original size, click the Return to Test View button. Add Grid Lines—Adds grid lines to the graph display. Click the button once to add horizontal grid lines at axis major divisions. Click a second time to add grid lines at axis major and minor divisions. Click the button a third time to remove the gridlines. Copy Graph to Clipboard—Copies the graph into the Windows clipboard. You can then paste the graph from the clipboard into another Windows application. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-38

Diagnostics

Print the Graphâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Prints the graph on the system printer.

15.2.3

Viewing the Alert Record (DVC5000 Series Only)

Note Alerts are not available with instrument level HC.

DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 have an alert record that can store alerts from any of the enabled alert groups: Valve Alerts, Failure Alerts or Miscellaneous Alerts. Table 15-2 lists the alerts included in each of the groups. The alert record also includes the date and time (from the instrument clock) the alert occurred. To view the alert record, select Instrument Alert Record from the Diagnostics menu. The recorded alerts and the time and date the first alert occurred is displayed. Click the Clear Record button to clear the alert record. All alerts in enabled groups must be inactive before the alert record can be cleared.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-39

Diagnostics

Note Prior to travel calibration the alert record is cleared and all alert groups are disabled. At the end of travel calibration, all alert groups originally enabled are re-established as enabled. However, because the alert record was cleared, all alerts that were stored in the record are lost. The alert record is also cleared any time the instrument is placed In Service.

Table 15-2. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record Alert Group

Valve Alerts

Failure Alerts

Miscellaneous Alerts

July 2000

Alerts Include in Group Travel Lo Travel Hi Travel Lo Lo Travel Hi Hi Travel Deviation Drive Signal No Free Time RAM Fail Drive Current Fail NVM Fail Temperature Sensor Fail Pressure Sensor Fail Travel Sensor Fail Auxiliary Input

VL2000 Series

15-40

Diagnostics

Maintenance Tip You can set the instrument clock and enable or disable one or all of the alert groups from the Alert Record and Burst page in the Detailed Setup window.

15.3

Tests Valve

Diagnose

Instrument

and

This section specifies additional general requirements for ValveLink diagnostics that can activate a diagnostic test, poll for the resulting data, and display the data graphically. These tests are: Total Scan Dynamic Error Band Drive Signal Output Signal Step Response Valve Signature Stroke Valve The total scan test is available only for DVC5000f Series instruments. The step response test and valve signature tests may not be available with your software. To determine if these tests are available, see the ValveLink Help screen, About ValveLink. Except for the stroke valve test, each diagnostic window includes five pages: Inputs, Config, Graph, Data Points, and Notes. The stroke valve test has only the Inputs and Config pages. The Inputs, Config, and Notes pages are described in the following subsections. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-41

The Graph and Data Points pages are described in the subsection describing the specific test. The dynamic error band window has an additional page: Analyzed. This page is described in subsection 15.3.3, Dynamic Error Band. The Total Scan and Valve Signature windows have five additional pages: Analyzed, Valve, Trim, Actuator, and Reference. These pages are described in subsection 15.3.7, Valve Signature. Except for the stroke valve test, each diagnostic test window contains buttons that provide the following functions: Run Diagnostic—Clicking on this button sends a specific command to the instrument to execute the relevant diagnostic test. Before the diagnostic command is sent, you are prompted by a dialog box to confirm the action. When the diagnostic test begins, the ValveLink software starts a polling process that retrieves the data from the diagnostic test. This process stops only when the diagnostic test has completed or if you click the Cancel button on the progress box. Data polled from the instrument is displayed graphically on the Graph page. Save Dataset—Clicking this button saves diagnostic data to a dataset in the ValveLink database. The dataset is named with the date and time the data was saved and an optional descriptor. Delete Dataset—Clicking this button deletes the selected dataset from the ValveLink database. Select the dataset to delete from the Datasets box near the top of the window. Close Tag—Clicking this button closes the open tag and its current window. Help—Clicking this button provides help for the relevant diagnostic test. Some of the pages provide additional buttons. Refer to the appropriate subsection for the page to see a description of the functions provided by these buttons.

15.3.1

Diagnostic Test Page Descriptions

15.3.1.1

Inputs Page For a description of the Inputs page for the Step Response test, see subsection 15.3.6. For a description of the Inputs page for the stroke

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-42

Diagnostics

valve test, see subsection 15.3.8. For all other diagnostic tests, this page enables you to enter the parameters for executing the diagnostic test. These include: Input Start—Enter a value for the starting point of the test as a percent (%) of the ranged input. Input End—Enter a value for the ending point of the test as a percent (%) of the ranged input. Scan time—Enter the time for the test to move from the Input Start point to the Input End point. This will also be the time to move from the Input End point back to the Input Start point. The scan time you enter is the ramp time—the amount of time the instrument is moving through the input percentages selected. The test automatically continues to scan for an additional 15 seconds. Table 15-3 lists suggested scan times. Table 15-3. Suggested Scan Times For Actuator Diaphragm and Piston Areas Actuator Diaphragm Area

Actuator Piston Area

Suggested Scan Time, Seconds

Up to 100 square inches 100 to 199 square inches 200 to 299 square inches 300 or more square inches

Up to 75 square inches 75 to 149 square inches 150 to 224 square inches 225 or more square inches

50 100 150 200

The following two items appear on the Inputs page for the Total Scan test. Use Cutoffs—Permits you to indicate if the travel cutoffs should be used during the test. The cutoffs that are used are indicated on the Configuration page. If you wish to include travel cutoffs, place a check in the checkbox by clicking on it. Use Characterization—This is not user selectable. This checkbox is always checked indicating that whatever input characterization is defined for the instrument will be used during the test. The input characterization defined for the instrument is shown on the Configuration page. Input characterization is defined as part of detailed setup. VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-43

Diagnostics

Figure 15-9. Example Diagnostic Test Config Page

15.3.1.2

Config Page

15.3.1.2.1

Dynamic Scan (DVC5000 Series Instruments) Figure 15-9 shows a typical configuration page for the DVC5000 Series diagnostic scan tests. The configuration page is divided into three columns: In Service & During Test, In Service, and During Test. The In Service & During Test column reflects the current configuration settings for those items listed. The instrument uses these values while in service or during the test. The values in the In Service column reflect the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s current configuration settings for the items listed. The values in the During Test column are the values the instrument will be using while running a diagnostic test. To allow testing the full

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-44

Diagnostics

range of the instrument, ValveLink software temporarily changes the instrument’s configuration settings to the preset values listed in this column while running the diagnostic test. After completing the test, ValveLink restores the instrument’s configuration settings to the values listed in the In Service column. To have the ValveLink software poll the instrument and display the current configuration data, click the Read Inst button at the bottom of the page. The following describes the items on the configuration page for DVC5000 Series instruments. Input Range Low—mA or percent (%) of 4–20 mA range. Analog input that corresponds to the Travel Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. Valid range is 4–24 mA or 0% to 125%, and is always less than Input Range High. Typical value is 4 mA. Input Range High—mA or percent (%) of 4–20 mA range. Analog input that corresponds to the Travel Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. Valid range is 4–24 mA or 0% to 125%, and is always greater than Input Range Low. Typical value is 20 mA. Travel Range Low—Percent (%) of calibrated travel. Value is the travel (in percent of calibrated travel) that corresponds to the Input Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. Travel Range High—Percent (%) of calibrated travel. Value is the travel (in percent of calibrated travel) that corresponds to the Input Range High or Low, depending on the Zero Control Signal. Zero Control Signal—Identifies whether the valve is fully open or fully closed when the input is 0%. Travel Limit Low—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Defines the minimum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for the valve. During operation, the travel target will not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit Low is set, the Travel Cutoff Low is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. To deactivate Travel Limit Low, set it to -25%. Valid values are –25% to 100% and always less than Travel Limit High. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-45

Travel Limit High—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Defines the maximum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for the valve. During operation, the travel target will not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit High is set, the Travel Cutoff High is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. Valid values are 0% to 125% and always greater than Travel Limit Low. Travel Cutoff Low—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Defines the low cutoff point for the travel. Below this cutoff, the drive signal is set to minimum when Zero Control Signal is closed or maximum when Zero Control Signal is open. Below this cutoff, the travel target is set to –23% of the ranged travel. No rate limiting is in effect when the low cutoff is exceeded. When Travel Cutoff Low is set, the Travel Limit Low is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. Valid values are -25% to 100%, and always less than Travel Cutoff High. Travel Cutoff High—Percent (%) of ranged travel. Defines the high cutoff point for the travel. Above this cutoff, the drive signal is set to maximum when Zero Control Signal is closed or minimum when Zero Control Signal is open. Above this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123% of the ranged travel. No rate limiting is in effect when the high cutoff is exceeded. When a Travel Cutoff High is set, the Travel Limit High is deactivated, since only one of these parameters can be active. Valid values are 0% to 125% and always greater than Travel Cutoff Low. Characteristic—Defines the relationship between the ranged travel and ranged input. Possible values include Linear, Equal Percentage, Quick Opening, or Custom. Tuning Set—One of eleven preset tuning sets or user adjustable values for high performance and standard gain and rate. Instruments with firmware revision 5 or later normally use the high performance values. However, should the pressure sensor fail, the unit will continue to operate using the standard values. Instruments with firmware revisions 3 and 4 use the standard values only. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-46

Diagnostics

Standard Gain—Amount of change in the output proportional to the amount of change in the input. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revisions 3 and 4 always use the standard gain values. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 or later use the standard gain values if the pressure sensor fails. Standard Travel Rate—Amount of change in the travel proportional to the rate of change in the input. DVC5000 Series instruments firmware revisions 3 and 4 always use the standard travel rate values. DVC5000 Series instruments with firmware revision 5 or later use the standard travel rate values if the pressure sensor fails. High Perf. Gain—High performance gain, normally used by an instrument with firmware revision 5 or later. High Perf. Travel Rate—High performance travel rate, normally used by an instrument with firmware revision 5 or later. High Perf. Pressure Rate—High performance pressure rate, normally used by an instrument with firmware revision 5 or later.

15.3.1.2.2

Total Scan Test (DVC5000f Series Instruments) The Configuration page for the Total Scan test indicates the values that will be used during the test. Travel Cutoff Lo—Defines the low cutoff point for the travel in percent (%) of ranged travel. When below this cutoff, the travel target is set to –23.0% of the ranged travel. Valid values are -25% to 125%, and always less than Travel Cutoff Hi. Travel Cutoff Hi—Defines the high cutoff point for the travel in percent (%) of ranged travel. When above this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123.0% of the ranged travel. Valid values are -25% to 125%, and always greater than Travel Cutoff Lo. Cutoffs Enabled—Indicates if travel cutoffs should be used during the test. Whether or not cutoffs are enabled is determined by the Use Cutoffs checkbox on the Inputs page.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-47

Characteristic—Defines the relationship between the ranged travel and ranged input. Possible values include Linear, Equal Percentage, Quick Opening, or Custom. Characteristic Enabled—Always enabled. The characteristic indicated above will be used during the test. Zero Control Signal—Identifies whether the valve is fully open or fully closed when the input is 0%. Tuning Set—One of eleven preset or user adjustable values for high performance and standard gain and rate. Standard Gain—Amount of change in the output proportional to the amount of change in the input. The standard gain values are used if the pressure sensor fails. Standard Travel Rate—Amount of change in the travel proportional to the rate of change in the input. The standard travel rate values are used if the pressure sensor fails. High Perf. Gain—High performance gain, normally used by the instrument. High Perf. Travel Rate—High performance travel rate, normally used by the instrument. High Perf. Pressure Rate—High performance pressure rate, normally used by the instrument.

15.3.1.3

Graph Page The following describes functions provided by the buttons on the Graph page, shown in figure 15-10. For a description of the graph, refer to the subsection that relates to the specific test. The following describes the buttons that appear at the bottom of the graph page. View Full Screen—Click this button to enlarge the graph display to fill the screen. To return the display to its original size, click the Return to Test View button.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-48

Diagnostics

Figure 15-10. Example Diagnostics Test Graph Page

Zoom Out— Click this button to return the display to its original size after zooming in. To zoom in, position the mouse cursor at one corner of a box that includes the area on which you want to zoom in. Click and hold down the left mouse button while you drag the cursor to form a box around the area on the graph you would like to zoom in on. Releasing the mouse button causes zoom to occur. To zoom out, click the Zoom Out button at the bottom of the page. Zoom Back—You can zoom in multiple levels using the technique described for the Zoom Out button. The Zoom Back button allows you to zoom out one level at a time. On the Graph page for the Total Scan, Dynamic Error Band, and Valve Signature tests, an additional button appears at the bottom of the graph page. The function of this button is as follows: Add Overlay—This button permits plotting the data from a previously saved dataset on top of the graph currently displayed. ClickVL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-49

Dataset List Box

Tags List Box

Figure 15-11. Select Overlay Dialog Box

ing the Add Overlay button causes the Select Overlay dialog box, shown in figure 15-11, to appear. In the Tags Found list box, click on the desired database tag to highlight it. You can use tag groups to limit the number of tags. When you select a tag, a second list box lists the datasets available for the selected tag. Double clicking the dataset or highlighting a dataset and clicking the View Overlay button selects the dataset to be overlaid. If the instrument type or valve type of the selected dataset do not match the currently displayed data, a message informs you that they must match. To remove the overlaid graph, click the Remove Overlay button. While displaying an overlay graph, the Inputs page shows data for both the current graph and the overlaid graph. The Add Overlay button does not appear on the full-screen view of a graph. However, if a curve has been overlaid and the user selects Full Screen, the full screen will show the overlay. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-50

Diagnostics

A graph toolbar to the right of the graph allows quick and easy access to many graph functions such as printing the graph, saving it to the windows clipboard, adding grid lines, or adding a legend. The following describes the buttons on the graph toolbar. Change Graph Display—Adds or removes highlights to individual data points on the graph. Add Grid Lines—Adds grid lines to the graph display. Click the button once to add horizontal and vertical grid lines at axis major divisions. Click a second time to add grid lines at axis major and minor divisions. Click the button a third time to remove the gridlines. Display a Graph Legend—Displays a quick reference for the colored lines on the graph (refer to the subsection that relates to the specific test for a detailed description). To remove the legend, click the button again. Copy Graph to Clipboard—Copies the graph into the Windows clipboard. You can then paste the graph from the clipboard into another Windows application. Print the Graph—Prints the graph on the system printer.

15.3.1.4

Data Points Page For a description of the Data Points page refer to the subsection for the specific test.

15.3.1.5

Notes Page Permits you to add a description to the dataset name and notes that are included with the test data in a dataset. To add a description to the dataset name, type the description in the Dataset Description box. When you save your notes the description is added to the Dataset box at the top of the diagnostics window. To enter notes, begin typing in the notes box. Use the scroll bar to see all of the text in the notes box. To change text, select text with the mouse, then click the right mouse button to access the editing

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-51

commands. To add more text, position the cursor in the box and begin typing. To save your notes and description to a dataset, click the Save button.

15.3.2

Running a Total Scan Test (DVC5000f Series Only) DVC5000f Series digital valve controllers permit running a single diagnostic test to gather data for all the dynamic scan tests. The dynamic scan tests consist of dynamic error band, valve signature, output signal, and drive signal. A list box on the Total Scan Graph page permits you to select one of the dynamic scan tests and graph the data for that test. Before running the Total Scan test, the AO block mode must be Out of Service. When you finish running tests, change the mode back to Auto. To change from Auto to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or right click the instrument tag and select Block Mode from the drop-down menu. You can also select Mode from the Instrument Setup menu then select Block. To run a Total Scan test: 1. Open or activate an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. 2. After opening or activating a tag, either Click the Dynamic Error Band or Valve Signature button on the toolbar, or Select Diagnostics from the menu bar, then select Dynamic Scan from the Diagnostics menu. Select Total Scan from the Dynamic Scan menu. 3. On the Inputs page, enter values in the Input Start, Input End, and Scan Time fields, as necessary. Select if you want to use cutoffs. 4. Click the Run Diagnostic button near the bottom of the window. A progress bar in the upper left corner indicates the progress of the test and when the test is completed. 5. To review results, click the tab of any page: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, or Notes. 6. Click the Save Dataset button to save the new data to the ValveLink database.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-52

Diagnostics

7. To review previously saved data, in the Datasets: box near the top of the Total Scan window, select the desired dataset. 8. To review results, click any tab on the window to display its page. 9. To run another new diagnostic test, select New in the Datasets box, then repeat steps 3 through 8. The Total Scan window includes ten pages: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, Notes, Valve, Trim, Actuator, and Reference. The Inputs, Config, and Notes pages are described in subsection 15.3.1. The following subsections describe the Graph, Data Points, and Analyzed pages.

15.3.2.1

Graph Page The Graph page displays graphically the data collected from the Total Scan test. Data is displayed according to the test selected. To select a test, click the list box arrow on the Graph page and select a dynamic scan test from the drop-down menu. For a Dynamic Error Band test, the X axis shows INPUT in percent of ranged Input and the Y axis shows TRAVEL in percent of ranged travel. For a Valve Signature test, the X axis shows ACTUATOR PRESSURE in psig, bar, or kPa, depending on the units stored in the instrument. The Y axis shows TRAVEL in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For a Drive Signal test, the X axis shows INPUT in percent of ranged input and the Y axis shows DRIVE SIGNAL in percent of maximum drive. For the Output Signal test, the X axis shows DRIVE SIGNAL in percent of maximum drive and the Y axis shows TRAVEL in percent of ranged travel. The red and blue lines on the graph represent the two sweeps of the test. The RED line represents the first sweep of the test while the BLUE represents the second sweep. The GREEN line represents the least square best fit calculation. For a description of the buttons on the graph page, see subsection 15.3.1.3

15.3.2.2

Data Points Page The Data Points page lists data points collected from the diagnostic test. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to view all of

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-53

the data points. The “Travel Set Point” and “Travel” columns identify travel data in percent of ranged travel. The “Drive” column identifies the drive signal in percent of maximum drive. The “Actuator Pressure” column identifies actuator pressure in psi, bar, or kPa, depending upon the units stored in the instrument. Click the Write to File button to save the data to a file as tab-delimited ASCII text. You can use this data with a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

15.3.2.3

Analyzed Page The ValveLink software analyzes the information collected from the Total Scan test and displays the analyzed data on this page. For sliding-stem valves, the software calculates and displays friction, spring rate, bench set, and seat load data. For rotary valves, the ValveLink software calculates and displays torque, spring rate, and bench set data. The following define the fields on the Analyzed page. The units of measure used in this test depend on options selected through the Preferences selection on the Customize ValveLink menu.

15.3.2.3.1

Sliding-Stem Valves, Analyzed Data Zero Ranged Travel at—Travel set point, in percent, that corresponds with a ranged travel of zero. ValveLink establishes a best fit line through the Dynamic Error Band data and projects this to a ranged travel of zero. ValveLink converts the X axis point where the ranged travel is zero from input percent. Full Ranged Travel at—Travel set point, in percent, that corresponds with the point where ranged travel is maximum, that is, the point where the travel no longer increases with an increase in travel set point (or decrease in set point when Zero Control Signal = Open). Average Dynamic Error—The calculated average difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel. Maximum Dynamic Error—The calculated maximum difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-54

Diagnostics

Minimum Dynamic Error—The calculated minimum difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel. Dynamic Linearity (Ind.)—Linearity (Independent) is the maximum deviation from a straight line best fit to the opening and closing curves and a line representing the average value of those curves. Friction is a major cause of dead band in control valves. Packing friction is the primary source of friction in sliding stem valves. Rotary valves are often susceptible to friction caused by the high seat loads required to obtain shut-off. Minimum Friction—Minimum friction, within 10% to 90% of travel, measured in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, for the valve and actuator. Maximum Friction—Maximum friction, within 10% to 90% of travel, measured in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, for the valve and actuator. Average Friction—Average friction, within 10% to 90% of travel, measured in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, for the valve and actuator. Spring Rate—Spring rate of the actuator spring in pounds of force per inch (lbf/in), Newtons per millimeter (N/mm), or kilograms of force per millimeter (kgf/mm). Bench Set—The initial compression placed on the actuator spring with a spring adjuster to provide the necessary force to obtain the required seat load and full travel with no other forces present (i.e. frictional or process forces). Seat Load As Tested—This net contact force between the closure member and seat with stated static conditions establishes valve shut-off. This is calculated seat load in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, in the tested configuration. Service Seat Load—The net contact force between the closure member and seat with stated static conditions establishes valve shut-off. This is calculated seat load, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, under service conditions. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-55

Required Seat Load—The net contact force between the closure member and seat with stated static conditions required to obtain the desired leak class. This is calculated seat load required, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force. Packing friction is the primary source of friction in sliding stem valves. In these types of valves, the measured friction can vary significantly between valve styles and packing arrangements. Expected Packing Friction—Calculated (expected) packing friction, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force. Packing friction is determined by stem size, Expected Total Friction—Calculated (expected) total stem friction, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force.

15.3.2.3.2

Rotary Valves, Analyzed Data In selecting the most economical actuator for a rotary valve, the determining factors are the torque required to open and close the valve and the torque output of the actuator. Valve size, valve shaft diameter and the composition of the bearings is also considered. Breakout Torque and Dynamic Torque are two basic equations used to figure Average Torque, Minimum Torque, and Maximum Torque. Zero Ranged Travel at—Travel set point, in percent, that corresponds with a ranged travel of zero. ValveLink establishes a best fit line through the Dynamic Error Band data and projects this to a ranged travel of zero. ValveLink converts the X axis point where the ranged travel is zero from input percent. Full Ranged Travel at—Travel set point, in percent, that corresponds with the point where ranged travel is maximum, that is, the point where the travel no longer increases with an increase in travel set point (or decrease in set point when Zero Control Signal = Open). Average Dynamic Error—The calculated average difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel. Maximum Dynamic Error—The calculated maximum difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-56

Diagnostics

15.3.2.4

Valve Page When you first open the Total Scan window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, select Spec Sheet from the menu bar.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-57

Diagnostics

However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Total Scan test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Spec Sheet menu.) Figure 15-18 shows the Valve page of the spec sheet. The following define the fields on the Valve page. Manufacturer—Enter name of the valve manufacturer. Model—Select model of valve. Size—Select valve size, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the valve size as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Class—Select valve pressure class rating. Rated Travel—For sliding-stem valves, enter the valve rated travel, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For rotary valves, enter the valve rated travel in degrees. Actual Travel—For sliding-stem valves, enter the valve actual travel, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For rotary valves, enter the valve actual travel in degrees. Stem Diameter—Enter sliding-stem valve stem diameter in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the stem diameter as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Shaft Diameter—Enter rotary valve shaft diameter in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the shaft diameter as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Packing Type—Select type of packing used on the valve. Inlet Pressure—Enter maximum inlet pressure at shutoff in psi, bar, or kPa. July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-58

Diagnostics

Outlet Pressure—Enter outlet pressure from the valve at shutoff in psi, bar, or kPa.

15.3.2.5

Trim Page When you first open the Total Scan window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, select Spec Sheet from the menu bar. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Total Scan test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Spec Sheet menu.) Figure 15-19 shows the Trim Page of the spec sheet. The following define the fields on the Trim page. Seat Type—The area of contact between the closure member and its mating surface that establishes valve shut–off. Select material of valve seat. Leak Class—Select shutoff Leakage class of the valve. Port Diameter—The port is the flow control orifice of the control valve. Select valve port seat ring diameter in inches, millimeters, or centimeters. Port Type—For sliding-stem valves, select type of valve port. Flow Direction—For sliding-stem valves, select direction of flow through the valve port—either UP or DOWN. Push Down To—For sliding stem valves, when pushing down on the valve stem, does the valve–OPEN or CLOSE.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-59

Flow Tends To—For sliding-stem valves, select whether flow tends to OPEN or CLOSE the valve. Unbalanced Area—Results from fluid pressure at shutoff. Net pressure differential X net unbalance area. For sliding-stem valves, enter the unbalanced area in square inches, square millimeters, or square centimeters.

15.3.2.6

Actuator Page When you first open the Total Scan window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, select Spec Sheet from the menu bar. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Total Scan test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Spec Sheet menu.) Figure 15-20 shows the Actuator page of the spec sheet. The following define the fields on the Actuator page. Manufacturer—Enter name of the actuator manufacturer. Model—Select model of actuator. Size—Select the size of the actuator. Effective Area—Enter the effective area of the actuator in square inches, square millimeters, or square centimeters. Air—Select whether increasing air pressure to the actuator OPENS or CLOSES the valve.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-60

Diagnostics

Lower Bench Set–The lower pressure reading. Bench Set is the initial compression placed on the actuator spring with a spring adjuster to provide the necessary force to obtain the required seat load and full travel with no other forces present (i.e. frictional or process forces). Upper Bench Set–The upper pressure reading. Bench Set is the initial compression placed on the actuator spring with a spring adjuster to provide the necessary force to obtain the required seat load and full travel with no other forces present (i.e. frictional or process forces). Spring Rate–The force change per unit change in the length of a spring. Spring rate of the actuator spring in pounds of force per inch (lbf/in), Newtons per millimeter (N/mm), or kilograms of force per millimeter (kgf/mm). Moment Arm—For rotary valve actuators, enter the length of the connecting arm between the valve shaft and the actuator rod, in inches, millimeters, or centimeters. Actuator Style—For rotary valve actuators, select the style of actuator currently in use with the valve.

15.3.2.7

Reference Page When you first open the Total Scan window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, select Spec Sheet from the menu bar. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Total Scan test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-61

Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Spec Sheet menu.) The following define the fields on the Reference page. Trim Style 1—Enter a description of the trim or internal parts of the valve. This field is usually used to identify the trim material. Trim Style 2—Enter a description of the trim or internal parts of the valve. This field is usually used to identify the flow characteristic of the trim such as Equal Percentage, Linear, or Quick Opening. Stroking Time Open—Enter required time, in seconds, to stroke the valve open. Stroking Time Close—Enter required time, in seconds, to stroke the valve closed. Dynamic Torque—For rotary valves, enter the calculated dynamic torque of the valve in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m). Breakout Torque—For rotary valves, enter calculated breakout torque of the valve in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m).

15.3.2.8

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-62

Diagnostics

15.3.3

Running the Dynamic Error Band Test (DVC5000 Series Instruments)

Note The Dynamic Error Band test is not available with instrument levels AC and HC.

Maintenance Tip If the instrument being tested has firmware revision 4.0 or later, and you are communicating with a HART modem or an MTL multiplexer, when you save the dataset for the valve signature test a dynamic error band test dataset can also be saved. Therefore, if you plan to run a valve signature test, run it first.

The Dynamic Error Band test plots travel versus input of a digital valve controller and plots output pressure versus the input of a digital transducer. Before running any diagnostic test which moves the valve, change the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s mode to Out Of Service. When you finish running tests, change the mode back to In Service. To change from In Service to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or select Instrument Mode from the Instrument Setup menu. To run a Dynamic Error Band test: 1. Open an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-63

Diagnostics

2. After opening a tag, either a. Click the Dynamic Error Band button on the toolbar, or b. Select Diagnostics from the menu bar, then select Dynamic Scan from the Diagnostics menu. Select Dynamic Error Band from the Dynamic Scan menu. 3. On the Inputs page, enter values in the Input Start, Input End, and Scan Time fields, as necessary. 4. Click the Run Diagnostic button near the bottom of the window. A progress bar in the upper left corner indicates the progress of the test and when the test is completed. 5. To review results, click the tab of any page: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, or Notes. 6. Click the Save Dataset button to save the new data to the ValveLink database. 7. To review previously saved data, in the Datasets: box near the top of the Dynamic Error Band window, select the desired dataset. 8. To review results, click any tab on the window to display its page. 9. To run another new diagnostic test, select New in the Datasets box, then repeat steps 3 through 8. The dynamic error band window includes six pages: Inputs, Config, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, and Notes. The Inputs, Config, and Notes pages are described in subsection 15.3.1. The following subsections describe the Graph, Data Points, and Analyzed pages.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-64

15.3.3.1

Diagnostics

Graph Page Dynamic Error Band

The Graph page displays graphically the data collected from the diagnostic test. The X axis shows INPUT in percent of ranged input and the Y axis shows TRAVEL in percent of ranged travel. Figure 15-12 shows an example of a dynamic error band graph. The red and blue lines on the graph represent the two sweeps of the test. The RED line represents the first sweep of the test while the BLUE represents the second sweep The GREEN line represents the least square best fit calculation. For a description of the buttons on the graph page, see subsection 15.3.1.3

15.3.3.2

Data Points Page Dynamic Error Band The Data Points page lists data points collected from the diagnostic test. ”1st” and ”2nd” columns identify the two sweeps of the diagnostic test. The ”Input” columns identify input data in percent of ranged input; the ”Tvl” columns identify travel data in percent of ranged travel. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to view all of the data points.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-65

Diagnostics

Figure 15-12. Example Dynamic Error Band Graph Page

Click the Write to File button to save the data to a file as tab-delimited ASCII text. You can use this data with a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

15.3.3.3

Analyzed Page Dynamic Error Band On the analyzed data page the ValveLink software analyzes the data collected from the Dynamic Error Band test and calculates the average, maximum, and minimum dynamic error as well as the dynamic linearity, as percentages. Dynamic error band is the difference in travel for a given opening and closing curve stated in terms of percentage of the travel range. The following define the fields on the analyzed page. Zero Ranged Travelâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Current, in mA, that corresponds with a ranged travel of zero. ValveLink establishes a best fit line through the Dynamic Error Band data and projects this to a ranged travel of

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-66

Diagnostics

zero. ValveLink converts the X axis point where the ranged travel is zero from input percent to milliamperes. For example, Zero Ranged Travel at: 3.9 mA. Full Ranged Travel—Current, in mA, that corresponds with the point where ranged travel is maximum, that is, the point where the travel no longer increases with an increase in current (or decrease in current when Zero Control Signal = Open). For example, Full Ranged Travel at: 19.9 mA. Average Dynamic Error—The calculated average difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel. Maximum Dynamic Error—The calculated maximum difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel. Minimum Dynamic Error—The calculated minimum difference between the opening and closing curves based upon an analysis of the dynamic error curve from 5% travel to 95% travel. Dynamic Linearity—Linearity (Independent) is the maximum deviation from a straight line best fit to the opening and closing curves and a line representing the average value of those curves.

15.3.4

Running the Drive Signal Test (DVC5000 Series Instruments)

Note The Drive Signal test is not available with instrument levels AC and HC.

The Drive Signal test plots instrument DRIVE SIGNAL versus the INPUT. It is similar in display format to the dynamic error band display. VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-67

Diagnostics

Before running any diagnostic test which moves the valve, change the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s mode to Out Of Service. When you finish running tests, change the mode back to In Service. To change from In Service to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or select Instrument Mode from the Instrument Setup menu. To run a drive signal test: 1. Open or activate an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. From the menu bar, select Diagnostics, then Dynamic Scan. From the Dynamic Scan menu, select Drive Signal. 2. On the Inputs page, enter values in the Input Start, Input End, and Scan Time fields, as necessary. 3. Click the Run Diagnostic button near the bottom of the window. A bar in the upper left corner indicates the progress of the test and when the test is completed. 4. To review results, click the tab of any page: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, or Notes. 5. Click the Save Dataset button to save the new data to the ValveLink database. 6. To review previously saved data, in the Datasets box near the top of the Drive Signal window, select the desired dataset. 7. To review results, click any tab on the window to display its page. 8. To run another new diagnostic test, select New in the Datasets box, then repeat steps 4 through 9. The drive signal window includes five pages: Inputs, Config, Graph, Data Points, and Notes. The Inputs, Config, and Notes pages are described in subsection 15.3.1. The following subsections describe the Graph and Data Points pages.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-68

15.3.4.1

Diagnostics

Graph Page Drive Signal

Note For ValveLink software communicating with FIELDVUE instruments via multiplexer, gaps may occur in the diagnostic data if alert scanning while running a diagnostic test with a collection interval of less than 350 milliseconds. To avoid this problem, either stop alert scanning or select a higher collection interval.

The Graph page displays graphically the data collected from the diagnostic test. The X axis shows INPUT in percent of ranged input and the Y axis shows DRIVE SIGNAL in percent of maximum drive. Figure 15-13 shows an example of a drive signal graph. The red and blue lines on the graph represent the two sweeps of the test. The RED line represents the first sweep of the test while the BLUE represents the second sweep. For a description of the buttons on the graph page, see subsection 15.3.1.3

15.3.4.2

Data Points Page Drive Signal The Data Points page lists data points collected from the diagnostic test. ”1st” and ”2nd” columns identify the two sweeps of the diagnostic test. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to view all of the data points. The ”Input” columns identify input data in percent of ranged input; the ”Drive” columns identify drive signal data in percent of maximum drive. Click the Write to File button to save the data to a file as tab-delimited ASCII text. You can use this data with a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-69

Figure 15-13. Example Drive Signal Graph Page

15.3.5

Running the Output Signal Test (DVC5000 Series Instruments) The Output Signal test plots travel versus drive signal for a digital valve controller Before running any diagnostic test which moves the valve, change the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s mode to Out Of Service. When you finish running tests, change the mode back to In Service. To change from In Service to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or select Instrument Mode from the Instrument Setup menu. To run an output signal test: 1. Open or activate an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. From the menu bar, select Diagnostics, then Dynamic Scan. From the Dynamic Scan menu, select Output Signal.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-70

Diagnostics

2. On the Inputs page, enter values in the Input Start, Input End, and Scan Time fields, as necessary. 3. Click the Run Diagnostic button near the bottom of the window. A bar in the upper left corner indicates the progress of the test and when the test is completed. 4. To review results, click the tab of any page: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, or Notes. 5. Click the Save Dataset button to save the new data to the ValveLink database. 6. To review previously saved data, in the Datasets box near the top of the Output Signal window, select the desired dataset. 7. To review results, click any tab on the window to display its page. 8. To run another new diagnostic test, select New in the Datasets box, then repeat steps 3 through 8. The output signal window includes five pages: Inputs, Config, Graph, Data Points, and Notes. The Inputs, Config, and Notes pages are described in subsection 15.3.1. The following subsections describe the Graph and Data Points pages.

15.3.5.1

Graph Page Output Signal

VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-71

Diagnostics

Figure 15-14. Example Output Signal Graph Page

The Graph page displays graphically the data collected from the diagnostic test. The X axis shows DRIVE SIGNAL in percent of maximum drive and the Y axis shows TRAVEL in percent of ranged travel. Figure 15-14 shows an example of an output signal graph. The red and blue lines on the graph represent the two sweeps of the test. The RED line represents the first sweep of the test while the BLUE represents the second sweep. For a description of the buttons on the graph page, see subsection 15.3.1.3

15.3.5.2

Data Points Page Output Signal The Data Points page lists data points collected from the diagnostic test. ”1st” and ”2nd” columns identify the two sweeps of the diagnostic test. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to view all

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-72

Diagnostics

of the data points. The ”Drive” columns identify drive signal data in percent of maximum drive; the ”Tvl” columns identify travel data in percent of ranged travel. Click the Write to File button to save the data to a file as tab-delimited ASCII text. You can use this data with a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

15.3.6

Running the Step Response Test

Note Step response is not available with instrument levels AC and HC.

The Step Response test graphically depicts the response of an instrument and valve. The Step Response test plots TRAVEL versus the TIME it takes to move through the specified steps. For a DVC5000 Series instrument, change the instrument’s mode to Out Of Service before running any diagnostic test which moves the valve. When you finish running tests, change the mode back to In Service. To change from In Service to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or select Instrument Mode from the Instrument Setup menu. For DVC5000f Series instruments, the AO block mode must be Out of Service before running any diagnostics tests. When you finish running tests, change the mode back to Auto. To change from Auto to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or right click the instrument tag and select Block Mode from the drop-down menu. You can also select Mode from the Instrument Setup menu then select Block. To run a step response test: 1. Open instrument’s tag. 2. After opening a tag, either VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-73

Diagnostics

Click the Step Response button on the toolbar, or Select Diagnostics from the menu bar, then select Step Response from the Diagnostics menu 3. To check the valve’s current position before setting up step parameters, click the Read Inst button on the Input page. The value in the Travel box indicates the valve’s current position. 4. On the Inputs page, enter the number of steps you want to plot and input parameters for each step (refer to subsection 15.3.6.1). 5. Click the Run Diagnostic button near the bottom of the window. A bar in the upper left corner indicates the progress of the test and when the test is completed. 6. To review results, click the tab of any page: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, or Notes. 7. Click the Save Dataset button to save the new data to the ValveLink database. 8. To review previously saved data, in the Datasets box near the top of the Step Response window, select the desired dataset. 9. To review results, click any tab on the window to display its page. 10. To run another new diagnostic test, select New in the Datasets box, then repeat steps 3 through 9. The step response window includes five pages: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, and Notes. The Configuration, and Notes pages are described in subsection 15.3.1. The following subsections describe the Inputs, Graph, and Data Points pages.

15.3.6.1

Input Page Step Response This page enables you to enter the parameters for executing the diagnostic test. These include: Number of steps—Enter the number of steps you want to run. Valid entries are 1 to 30 for a DVC5000 Series instrument or 1 to 11 for a DVC5000f Series instrument. End Point %—Percent of ranged travel. For each step, enter a value in %. The starting point is the current valve travel.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-74

Diagnostics

Figure 15-15. Example Performance Step Test Graph

Ramp time—For each step, enter the time in seconds for the valve travel to reach the end point. A time of 0 seconds initiates a step change in travel. Collection time—Enter the time in seconds to collect data after each step. Performance Test—If you place a check in the checkbox for the Performance Test, the ValveLink software will execute a predefined step test. The test consists of a series of 29 increasing small steps (0.1%, 0.2%, 0.5%, 1%, 2%, 5%, and 10%).The test is a sequence of mirrored steps, that is it starts with the valve travel at 50% a step up then back and a step down then back. Figure 15-15 shows an example of a Performance Test graph. The number of steps, end point, ramp time, and collection time are automatically filled in. Use Cutoffs—This checkbox only appears on the inputs page for step response tests run on DVC5000f Series instruments. It permits you to indicate if the travel cutoffs should be used during the test. The cutoffs that are used are indicated on the Configuration VL2000 Series

July 2000

15-75

Diagnostics

page. If you wish to include travel cutoffs, place a check in the checkbox by clicking on it.

15.3.6.2

Graph Page Step Response

The Graph page displays graphically the data collected from the diagnostic test. The X axis shows TIME in seconds and the Y axis shows TRAVEL in percent of ranged travel. Figure 15-16 shows an example of a step response graph. The BLUE represents the requested change in travel or pressure. The RED line represents the actual response. For a description of the buttons on the graph page, see subsection 15.3.1.3

15.3.6.3

Data Points Page Step Response The Data Points page lists data points collected from the diagnostic test. ‘‘1st,” ‘‘2nd,” ‘‘3rd,” etc. columns identify the step. The number of columns is determined by the number of steps in the test. Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the window to view more columns. The

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-76

Diagnostics

Figure 15-16. Example Step Response Graph Page

‘‘Time” columns identify the time it takes to move through the specified steps. The ”Tvl” columns identify travel data in percent of ranged travel. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to view all of the data points. Click the Write to File button to save the data to a file as tab-delimited ASCII text. You can use this data with a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

15.3.6.4

Analyzed Page Step Response The ValveLink software analyzes the information collected from the Step Response test and displays the analyzed data on this page. The columns display the analyzed data for each step. Analyzed data consists of Dead Time, in seconds; Time63, in seconds; Time86, in seconds; Overshoot, in percent; and Gain. The number of rows de-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-77

pends on the number of steps in the test. Use the scroll bar to view the analyzed data for all of the steps. The following define the fields on the Analyzed page. Dead Time—the time, in seconds, between the initiation of the step and when the travel reaches 2% of its final steady-state value. Time63—the time, in seconds, between initiation of the step and when the travel reaches 63% of its final steady-state value. Time86—the time, in seconds, between initiation of the step and when the travel reaches 86.5% of its final steady-state value. Overshoot—the amount, in percent of steady-state response change, that the travel exceeds the final steady-state value. Error—the difference, in percent of span, between the endpoint of the requested step and the travel final steady-state value for the requested step. Gain—the ratio between the steady-state magnitude of the response change and the requested step. Max Deadband—Applicable to performance test only. The amount of change in a requested step, including reversal in direction, before the travel changes. Deadband is measured for the first set of step groups ( a step group is a step up and step down of equal magnitude) that has all included steps with a gain greater than 0.1.

15.3.7

Running the Valve Signature Test (DVC5000 Series Instruments)

Note Valve Signature is not available with instrument levels AC, HC and SD.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-78

Diagnostics

The Valve Signature test plots actuator pressure versus travel for a DVC5000 Series digital valve controller with advanced diagnostics. This test uses valve specifications from the open tag’s Valve Spec Sheet. If the instrument being tested has firmware revision 4.0 or later, and you are communicating with a HART modem or an MTL multiplexer, a dynamic error band test dataset will also be saved when you save the dataset for the valve signature test. The Actual Travel entered on the Valve page determines the scale and units of the X-axis. The actuator pressure range and the pressure units stored in the instrument determine the scale and units of the Y-axis. The actuator pressure range is determined by the supply pressure. You can change the pressure units and the supply pressure by changing the instrument’s configuration (see section 5). To run a Valve Signature test: 1. Open or activate an instrument’s tag. 2. After opening or activating a tag, either Click the Valve Signature button on the toolbar, or Select Diagnostics from the menu bar, then select Dynamic Scan. From the Dynamic Scan menu select Valve Signature. 3. On the Inputs page, enter values in the Input Start, Input End, and Scan Time fields, if necessary. 4. Click the Run Diagnostic button near the bottom of the window. A bar in the upper left corner indicates the progress of the test and when the test is completed. 5. Before you can view the graph, a Valve Spec Sheet must exist for the tag. Change the valve specification values for this test on the Valve, Trim, Actuator, and Reference pages, as necessary. When you first open the Valve Signature window, ValveLink displays the current valve specifications stored with the open tag’s Valve Spec Sheet. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on these pages affect only the current dataset of this diagnostic test. Changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database for the open tag. (Change the tag’s Valve Spec Sheet from the Configuration menu.) However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not yet been saved for this tag, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Valve SignaVL2000 Series

July 2000

15-79

Diagnostics

ture diagnostic test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change this Valve Spec Sheet later, use the Configuration menu. 6. To review results, click the tab of any page: Inputs, Configuration, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, or Notes. 7. Click the Save Dataset button to save the new data to the ValveLink database. 8. To review previously saved data, in the Datasets box near the top of the Valve Signature window, select the desired dataset. 9. To review results, click any tab on the window to display its page. 10. To run another new diagnostic test, select New in the Datasets box, then repeat steps 3 through 9. The valve signature window includes ten pages: Inputs, Config, Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, Notes, Valve, Trim, Actuator, and Reference. The Inputs, Config, and Notes pages are described in subsection 15.3.1. The following subsections describe the Graph, Data Points, Analyzed, Valve, Trim, Actuator, and Reference pages.

15.3.7.1

Graph Page Valve Signature

The Graph page displays graphically the data collected from the diagnostic test. The X axis shows TRAVEL in inches, centimeters, or July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-80

Diagnostics

Figure 15-17. Example Valve Signature Graph Page

millimeters. The Y axis shows ACTUATOR PRESSURE in psig, bar, or kPa, depending on the units stored in the instrument. Figure 15-17 shows an example of a valve signature graph. The red and blue lines on the graph represent the two sweeps of the test. The RED line represents the first sweep of the test while the BLUE represents the second sweep. The GREEN line represents the least square best fit calculation. For a description of the buttons on the graph page, see subsection 15.3.1.3

15.3.7.2

Data Points Page Valve Signature The Data Points page lists data points collected from the diagnostic test. In the first sweep the 1st column identifies travel, and the 2nd

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-81

column identifies pressure. In the second sweep, the 3rd column identifies travel, and the 4th column identifies pressure. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to view all of the data points. The Travel columns identify travel data in the units specified for the Actual Travel on the Valve page. The Actuator Pressure columns identify actuator pressure in psi, bar, or kPa, depending upon the units stored in the instrument. Click the Write to File button to save the data to a file as tab-delimited ASCII text. You can use this data with a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel.

15.3.7.3

Analyzed Page Valve Signature The ValveLink software analyzes the information collected from the Valve Signature test and displays the analyzed data on this page. For sliding-stem valves, the software calculates and displays friction, spring rate, bench set, and seat load data. For rotary valves, the ValveLink software calculates and displays torque, spring rate, and bench set data. The following define the fields on the Analyzed page. The units of measure that used in this test depend on options selected through the Preferences selection on the Customize ValveLink menu.

15.3.7.3.1

Sliding-Stem Valves, Analyzed Data Friction is a major cause of dead band in control valves. Packing friction is the primary source of friction in sliding stem valves. Rotary valves are often susceptible to friction caused by the high seat loads required to obtain shut–off. Minimum Friction—Minimum friction measured within 10% to 90% of travel, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, for the valve and actuator. Maximum Friction—Maximum friction measured within 10% to 90% of travel, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, for the valve and actuator.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-82

Diagnostics

Average Friction—Average friction measured within 10% to 90% of travel, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, for the valve and actuator. Spring Rate—Spring rate of the actuator spring in pounds of force per inch (lbf/in), Newtons per millimeter (N/mm), or kilograms of force per millimeter (kgf/mm). Bench Set—The initial compression placed on the actuator spring with a spring adjuster to provide the necessary force to obtain the required seat load and full travel with no other forces present (i.e. frictional or process forces). Seat Load As Tested—This net contact force between the closure member and seat with stated static conditions establishes valve shut–off. This is calculated seat load in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, in the tested configuration. Service Seat Load—The net contact force between the closure member and seat with stated static conditions establishes valve shut–off. This is calculated seat load, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force, under service conditions. Required Seat Load—The net contact force between the closure member and seat with stated static conditions establishes valve shut-off. This is calculated seat load required, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force. Packing friction is the primary source of friction in sliding stem valves. In these types of valves, the measured friction can vary significantly between valve styles and packing arrangements. Expected Packing Friction—Calculated (expected) packing friction, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force. Packing friction is determined by stem size. Expected Total Friction—Calculated (expected) total stem friction, in pounds of force, Newtons, or kilograms of force.

15.3.7.3.2

Rotary Valves, Analyzed Data In selecting the most economical actuator for a rotary valve, the determining factors are the torque required to open and close the valve

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-83

and the torque output of the actuator. Valve size, valve shaft diameter and the composition of the bearings is also considered. Breakout Torque and Dynamic Torque are two basic equations used to figure Average Torque, Minimum Torque, and Maximum Torque. Average Torque—Average torque of the valve and actuator in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m). Minimum Torque—Minimum torque of the valve and actuator in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m). Maximum Torque—Maximum torque of the valve and actuator in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m). Spring Rate—The force change per unit change in the length of a spring. Spring rate of the actuator spring in pounds of force per inch (lbf/in), Newtons per millimeter (N/mm), or kilograms of force per millimeter (kgf/mm). Bench Set—The initial compression placed on the actuator spring with a spring adjuster to provide the necessary force to obtain the required seat load and full travel with no other forces present (i.e. frictional or process forces).

15.3.7.4

Valve Page Valve Signature When you first open the Valve Signature window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, use the Configuration menu. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Valve Signature test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-84

Diagnostics

Figure 15-18. Example Valve Spec Sheet, Valve Page

To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Configuration menu.) Figure 15-18 shows the Valve page of the spec sheet. The following define the fields on the Valve page. Manufacturer—Enter name of the valve manufacturer. Model—Select model of valve. Size—Select valve size, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the valve size as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Class—Select valve pressure class rating. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-85

Rated Travel—For sliding-stem valves, enter the valve rated travel, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For rotary valves, enter the valve rated travel in degrees. Actual Travel—For sliding-stem valves, enter the valve actual travel, in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. For rotary valves, enter the valve actual travel in degrees. Stem Diameter—Enter sliding-stem valve stem diameter in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the stem diameter as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Shaft Diameter—Enter rotary valve shaft diameter in inches, centimeters, or millimeters. If you enter the shaft diameter as a fraction, ValveLink converts your entry to a decimal. Packing Type—Select the type of packing material used in the valve. Inlet Pressure—Enter inlet pressure to the valve at shut off in psi, bar, or kPa. Outlet Pressure—Enter outlet pressure from the valve at shut off in psi, bar, or kPa.

15.3.7.5

Trim Page Valve Signature When you first open the Valve Signature window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, use the Configuration menu. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Valve Signature test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-86

Diagnostics

Figure 15-19. Example Valve Spec Sheet, Trim Page

valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Configuration menu.) Figure 15-19 shows the Trim Page of the spec sheet. The following define the fields on the Trim page. Seat Type—Select type of material used in valve seat. Leak Class—Select shutoff Leakage class of the valve. Port Diameter—The port is the flow control orifice of the control valve. Select valve port seat ring diameter in inches, millimeters, or centimeters. Port Type—For sliding-stem valves, select type of valve port. Flow Direction—For sliding-stem valves, select direction of flow through the valve port—either UP or DOWN. VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-87

Push Down To—For sliding stem valves, when pushing down on the valve stem, does the valve–OPEN or CLOSE. Flow Tends To—For sliding-stem valves, select whether flow tends to OPEN or CLOSE the valve. Unbalanced Area—Results from fluid pressure at shutoff. Net pressure differential x net unbalanced area. For sliding-stem valves, enter the unbalanced area in square inches, square millimeters, or square centimeters.

15.3.7.6

Actuator Page Valve Signature When you first open the Valve Signature window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specification changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, use the Configuration menu. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Valve Signature test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Configuration menu.) Figure 15-20 shows the Actuator page of the spec sheet. The following define the fields on the Actuator page. Manufacturer—Enter name of the actuator manufacturer. Type—Select type of actuator. Size—Select the size of the actuator. Effective Area—Enter the effective area of the actuator in square inches, square millimeters, or square centimeters.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-88

Diagnostics

Figure 15-20. Example Valve Spec Sheet, Actuator Page

Air—Select whether increasing air pressure to the actuator OPENS or CLOSES the valve. Actuator Style—For rotary valve actuators, select the style of actuator currently in use with the valve. Moment Arm—For rotary valve actuators, enter the length of the connecting arm between the valve shaft and the actuator rod, in inches, millimeters, or centimeters.

15.3.7.7

Reference Page Valve Signature When you first open the Valve Signature window, the current valve specifications stored on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag are displayed. If a Valve Spec Sheet was previously saved, any changes you make on this page are only effective for this diagnostic test. Valve specifi-

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-89

cation changes you make here do NOT affect the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To change the Valve Spec Sheet, use the Configuration menu. However, if a Valve Spec Sheet has not been previously saved, the first set of valve specifications saved as part of a Valve Signature test become the Valve Spec Sheet stored in the database. To save changes to valve specifications with the current dataset click the Save Test Spec Sheet button. (This does NOT change the valve specifications on the Valve Spec Sheet for the open tag. Change the entries on the Valve Spec Sheet through the Configuration menu.) The following define the fields on the Reference page. Trim Style 1—Enter a description of the trim or internal parts of the valve. This field is usually used to identify the trim material. Trim Style 2—Enter a description of the trim or internal parts of the valve. This field is usually used to identify the flow characteristic of the trim such as Equal Percentage, Linear, or Quick Opening. Stroking Time Open—Enter required time, in seconds, to stroke the valve open. Stroking Time Close—Enter required time, in seconds, to stroke the valve closed. Dynamic Torque—For rotary valves, enter the calculated dynamic torque of the valve in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m). Breakout Torque—For rotary valves, enter calculated breakout torque of the valve in pounds of force x inches (lbf in), Newtons x meters (N m), or kilograms of force x meters (kgf m).

15.3.7.8

Notes Page Valve Signature This page permits you to add or edit notes associated with the spec sheet. Type your note in the Notes box. Text automatically wraps to the next line as necessary; you do not need to press the Enter key

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-90

Diagnostics

Figure 15-21. Stroke Valve Inputs Page

at the end of each line. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor and select existing text to type over or delete. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Notes box to see more text.

15.3.8

Running the Stroke Valve Test The stroke valve test allows you to change the travel independent of the control signal. The travel can be changed either by setting a target to move towards (step) or by ramping the travel up or down until you stop the ramping. Figure 15-21 shows the input page for the Stroke Valve test. You can elect to either step or ramp the input during the test. For either selection you must specify a target value. Input indicates the current input in % of ranged input. Travel provides a digital indication of the current valve position in % of the ranged travel. The bar graph provides a graphical indication of the travel. For a description of the Config page, see subsection 15.3.1.2. Before running any diagnostic test which moves the valve, change the instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s mode to Out Of Service. When you finish running

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Diagnostics

15-91

tests, change the mode back to In Service. To change from In Service to Out Of Service, or vice versa, click the Instrument Mode button on the toolbar, or select Mode& Instrument from the Instrument Setup menu. To run a stroke valve test: 1. Open or activate an instrumentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tag. 2. From the menu bar, select Diagnostics. 3. From the Diagnostics menu, select Stroke Valve. 4. On the Inputs page, click either the Step or Ramp option button and specify a target value in % of ranged input. 5. Click the Move button near the bottom of the window. Click the Cancel button to stop the test.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

15-92

Diagnostics

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

16-1

Instrument Level StepUps

16.1

Upgrading

Instruments

If you have the required hardlock, you can use the ValveLink software to StepUp the instrument level of DVC5000 Series instruments. The hardlock is encoded with the type of StepUp (for instance, from an HC to an SD, or from an HC to an AD) and the number of instruments to which the StepUp may be applied. Figure 15-22 shows the information stored in the hardlock. Each time you perform a StepUp procedure, the number available is decremented by one. To StepUp an instrument also requires that the instrument have a tag in the ValveLink database and that the instrument is connected. Perform the following procedure to StepUp the instrument level. Step 1:

Start ValveLink and log on.

Step 2:

Open the tag for the instrument you wish to StepUp. Be sure the instrument is connected. (Observe the connection symbol on the status bar.)

Step 3:

Start the StepUp utility. (From the menu bar, select Tools, then from the Tools menu, select Instrument Upgrades. From the Instrument Upgrades menu select Inst. Level StepUp.

Note If a ValveLink hardlock is installed, do not remove it until prompted to install the Instrument Level StepUp hardlock in the next step. Removing the ValveLink hardlock too soon may inhibit ValveLink from starting or being able to open a tag.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

16-2

Instrument Level StepUps

Figure 15-22. Instrument Level StepUp Dialog Box

VL2000 Series

Step 4:

The ValveLink software prompts you to install the instrument level StepUp hardlock. Install the hardlock on the parallel port of your computer. If a ValveLink hardlock is installed on the parallel port, remove it and install the Instrument Level StepUp hardlock.

Step 5:

ValveLink displays a dialog box (figure 15-22 showing the number and type of StepUps available. Check the appropriate box to select the StepUp you wish to perform.

Step 6:

Click the StepUp button at the bottom of the dialog box to start the StepUp procedure.

Step 7:

ValveLink indicates the StepUp that will be performed and warns you that the number available will be decreased. Click OK to complete the StepUp procedure. If you click Cancel the procedure is aborted, the instrument is not changed, and the number of StepUps available does not change.

Step 8:

After the StepUp procedure is complete, you can StepUp another instrument. If finished, remove the Instrument Level StepUp hardlock and, if necessary, install the ValveLink hardlock. July 2000

17-1

Solving Problems

Solving Problems1616

17.1

Getting

17.1.1

Using ValveLink Help

Started

The ValveLink help system provides step-by-step procedures for working with all of the ValveLink software features. For every ValveLink window, the help system defines edit fields, parameters, and buttons. The Glossary provides quick popup definitions.

17.1.1.1

Accessing Help To access help you can: Click the Help button on any window. Select an option from the Help menu. Press F1.

17.1.1.2

Using the Glossary When you need a quick definition of a term, an edit field, or instrument parameter, use the Glossary. 1. Access ValveLink help. 2. Click the Glossary button on the toolbar. 3. Click an alphabetic button to narrow your search. 4. Scroll through the terms listed until you find the word youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re looking for. 5. Click the term to open a popup definition. 6. Click again to close the popup definition.

17.1.1.3

Finding Help Topics For detailed information about a particular topic, you can:

July 2000

VL2000 Series

17-2

Solving Problems

Select a Topic from the Help Contents.

The Contents is similar to the table of contents in a paper manual. Find an entry that interests you then click its title. To dig deeper for more information, select another title listed under the Related Topics heading at the bottom of each topic. To return to a previous topic, use the Back and History buttons on the toolbar.

Click the Search Button.

From the Search window, type a word or scroll and select a key word, then click the Show Topics button. Select a topic from the list then click the Go To button.

17.1.1.4

Closing Help Windows Sometimes, clicking an underlined word or topic title opens a second help window on top of the first window. This allows you to quickly check for additional information without losing your place in the current help topic. To close the second help window, double-click its control box.

17.1.1.5

For More Help For more about using Windows online help systems, select Using Help on the Help menu.

17.1.2

Help! Menu Options Donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Work ValveLink does not allow you to select dimmed menu selections. You cannot select menu selections when:

The Option Does For example, when you open a tag for a digital transducer, you canNot Apply not select Valve Signature on the Diagnostics menu. The Valve Signature test applies only to digital valve controllers with Advanced Diagnostics. You Need Securi- For example, if you find all of the selections on the Setup menu are ty Authorization. dimmed, you are not authorized to make those selections. Talk to your system administrator about security authorization.

17.2

Connecting

and

Communicating

17.2.1

Help! Instrument Is Not Connected To quickly verify that an instrument is connected and communicating with the ValveLink software, open its tag and check the tag

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Solving Problems

17-3

information on the toolbar. The cable connectors on the toolbar appear connected when the instrument is connected. If the toolbar shows the tag is not connected: Check the Status Bar.

Look for MUX or MDM in the lower right corner of the status bar. If you do not see MUX or MDM, select Preferences on the Setup menu and assign a valid communications port. Exit ValveLink and restart for your changes to take effect. See Section 2, Setting Up and Getting Started.

Check the network list.

HART Modem—Select Network List & Scan on the Network menu. Note if the instrument appears on the network list. If not, click the Scan for Instruments button. If the instrument does not appear on the list, check wiring and other physical connections, then try again. If you cannot identify any problems from the Network List window, check discrepancies between the instrument and the database tag. HART Multiplexer—Select Network List & Scan on the Network menu and click the Redraw List button. If the instrument appears on the list, click the Network List Maintenance button, then click the Check List button to verify that instruments on the list are still connected. Look for ”OK” in the left-most column next to the instrument multiplexer address and loop number. If a – appears in the left-most column, check wiring and other physical connections, then try again. If the instrument does not appear on the list, click the Network List Maintenance button, then click .

Rescan the network.

HART Multiplexer—Close all open tags then select Scan for NewNetwork List & Scan on the Network menu. Click the Network List Maintenance button, then click the Rebuild List button to check multiplexers, addresses, loops and instruments and rebuild the network list. (See Section 3, Working with the Network, subsection 5.1.3.4.) If you cannot identify any problems from the Network List window, check discrepancies between the instrument and the database tag.

Check Discrepancies Between the Instrument and the Database Tag.

Select Query & Match on the Network menu and resolve any discrepancies between key data in the instrument and in its corresponding database tag. (See Section 2, subsection 2.3.4, or Section 3, subsection 5.1.3.6.)

July 2000

VL2000 Series

17-4

17.2.2

Solving Problems

Help! Items Missing From the Network List (HART Modem) The network list is the first place to check instruments. If an instrument appears to be missing from the network list:

Check the Network List

Select Network List & Scan on the Network menu. Note if the instrument appears on the network list. If not, click the Scan for Instruments button. If the instrument does not appear on the list, check wiring and other physical connections, then try again.

Check Preferences on the Setup Menu.

Check the settings listed below. If you make any changes, exit ValveLink and restart to cause your changes to take effect. Check communications port settings. Verify communications ports are set up correctly. From the Setup menu select Preferences& Communication page. (See Section 2, Setting Up and Getting Started). Check the Highest Device Address. When scanning the network, ValveLink checks for instruments up through and including the highest device address entered through Preferences on the Setup menu. This is only applicable for instruments in a multi-drop configuration. For point-to-point configurations, the highest device address should be set to 0. For a multi-drop configuration, the highest device address must correspond to the highest polling address configured in an instrument. Enter a number between 0 and 15 (See Section 2, Setting Up and Getting Started).

Check Physical Connections.

Turn off power to the equipment, check wiring, then restart.

17.2.3

Help! Items Missing From the Network List (HART Multiplexer) The network list is the first place to check for network locations, multiplexers, and instruments. If a network, multiplexer, or instrument appears to be missing from the network list:

VL2000 Series

July 2000

17-5

Solving Problems

Rescan the Network & Build a New Network List.

Close all open tags then select Network List & Scan from the Network menu. Click the Network List Maintenance button, then click the Rebuild List button to check multiplexers, addresses, loops and instruments and rebuild the network list. (See Section 3, Working with the Network, subsection 5.1.3.4.)

Check Preferences on the Setup Menu.

Check the settings listed below. If you make any changes, exit ValveLink and restart to cause your changes to take effect.

Check communications port settings. Verify communications ports are set up correctly. From the Setup menu select Preferences& Communication page. (See Section 2, Setting Up and Getting Started.) Check baud rates. Verify the communications port is set to the same baud rate as any attached multiplexers and RS232-to-RS485 converters. From the Setup menu select Preferences& Communication page. Check baud rates. (See Section 2, Setting Up and Getting Started.) Check the Highest Mux to Scan For preference. When scanning the network, ValveLink checks for multiplexers up through and including the highest multiplexer address entered through Preferences on the Setup menu. For example, if your network has three multiplexers with mux addresses 1, 5, and 13, and if 5 is entered as the Highest Mux Address to Scan For, ValveLink will not find multiplexer 13 while scanning. To change this number, select Preferences on the Setup menu, then click the Multiplexers page. Enter a number between 0 and 31 in the Highest Mux Address to Scan For edit field. (See Section 2, Setting Up and Getting Started.) Check the Polling Address

Multiplexers communicate only with instruments that have a polling address of 0. Use a Model 275 HART Communicator or ValveLink software communicating via a HART modem to change the polling address if it is not 0.

Check Physical Connections.

Turn off power to the equipment, check wiring, then restart. Always turn on power to the instruments before turning on power to the multiplexers. (See Section 3, Working with the Network.)

July 2000

VL2000 Series

17-6

Solving Problems

17.3

Configuring, Transferring

Calibrating, Data

and

17.3.1

Help! Can’t Transfer Data in Query & Match If you’re running Query & Match from the Network menu, ValveLink will not transfer data between an instrument and a database tag if the transfer arrows are dimmed rather than black. If you can’t transfer data:

Check Security Authorization.

Do you have security authorization to transfer configuration data? Ask your system administrator.

Do the instrument’s mode and protection settings match parameter Check Instrument Mode requirements? Check the Instrument Mode and Instrument Protecand Protection. tion requirements for the parameter you are trying to transfer. See Section 5 Configuring an Instrument, subsections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2.

17.3.2

Help! Can’t Upload or Download Configuration To poll an instrument for configuration parameters or to upload data, the instrument must be connected to and communicating with the ValveLink software. On the Configuration window, if the Read Inst button is dimmed or if all of the Download/Upload arrows are dimmed, the instrument is probably not connected. If you can’t poll the instrument or upload or download data:

Check Network Connection.

Check tag information on the toolbar and verify ValveLink is connected to and communicating with the instrument. If the toolbar shows the tag is not connected, see Help! Instrument is not connected, subsection 17.2.1.

Check Instrument Verify the instrument’s mode and protection settings match paramMode and Protec- eter requirements. Check the Instrument Mode and Instrument tion. Protection requirements for the parameter you are trying to transfer. See Section 5 Configuring an Instrument, subsections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2. Check Security Authorization.

VL2000 Series

Do you have security authorization to transfer configuration data? Ask your system administrator.

July 2000

17-7

Solving Problems

17.3.3

Help! Can’t Calibrate an Instrument If you can’t calibrate an instrument from the Calibration menu:

Open a Tag.

Check the tag information on the toolbar and verify the appropriate tag is open and active.

Check Network Connection.

Check Instrument Check tag information on the toolbar and verify the Instrument Mode. Mode is set to Out Of Service. Check Instrument Verify the Instrument Protection is set to Configuration or None. Protection. Check Security Authorization.

Do you have security authorization to calibrate? Ask your system administrator.

17.4

Running

17.4.1

Help! Diagnostic Tests Don’t Work

Diagnostic

Tests

If you can’t run a test from the Diagnostics menu: Open a Tag.

Check the tag information on the toolbar and verify the appropriate tag is open and active.

Check Network Connection.

Check Instrument Check tag information on the toolbar and verify the Instrument Mode. Mode is set to Out of Service. Select New in the If the Start Monitoring or Run Diagnostic button is dimmed rather Datasets Box. than black, select New in the Datasets box. Then click the button to start a new diagnostic test.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

17-8

Solving Problems

Check Instrument The instrument may not support the diagnostic test you are trying to Level run. Check instrument level and refer to table 12–21 on page 13.54. Check Security Authorization.

If Diagnostic menu options are grayed rather than black, ask your system administration for security authorization to run diagnostic tests.

17.4.2

Help! Unexpected Valve Signature Results If running the Valve Signature diagnostic test provides unexpected results:

Check Valve Specifications.

From the Configuration menu, select Valve Spec Sheet. Verify the tag’s valve specifications and modify as necessary. Run the Valve Signature diagnostic test again. (See Setting up a valve spec sheet.)

Check Units of Measure Defaults.

From the Setup menu, select Preferences& Units page. Verify defaults for units of measure and modify as necessary. (If you can’t access options on the Setup menu, talk to your system administrator for security authorization.) Run the Valve Signature diagnostic test again.

17.5

Running

17.5.1

Help! My Batch Operations Won’t Run

Batches

If you can’t run an operation using Batch Runner from the Tools menu: Create a Tag

Does the tag exist in the database?

Check Network Connection.

Check tag information on the status bar and verify ValveLink is connected to and communicating with the instrument. If the status bar shows the tag is not connected, see Help! Instrument is not connected, subsection 17.2.1.

Check Instrument Some operations require the instrument mode to be Out of SerMode. vice. Check tag information on the stutus bar and verify the Instrument Mode is set to Out of Service.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

17-9

Solving Problems

Check Instrument Verify the Instrument Protection is set to Configuration or None. Protection. Check Instrument The instrument may not support the operation you are trying to Level run.

July 2000

VL2000 Series

17-10

Solving Problems

This page intentionally left blank.

VL2000 Series

July 2000

Glossary-1

Glossary abort Request to discontinue a procedure.

active tag The open tag as displayed in the title bar. Data for the active tag appears on the status bar. To open an instrument tag, double click the instrument symbol in the explorer view.

AUTO Abbreviation: Automatic Mode

baud rate Data transmission speed

boot or boot up The process of initializing software to hardware to bring the software to a known state.

address One or more integers arranged to identify the location of an instrument or multiplexer.

alert point The values set to trigger an alert.

bus A general term for a group of signal lines to be considered together, as in a data bus or address bus.

byte A unit of binary digits (bits). Usually a byte consists of eight bits.

algorithm A set of logical steps to solve a problem or accomplish a task. A computer program contains one or more algorithms.

alphanumeric Consisting of letters and numbers.

July 2000

CONFIG Abbreviation: Configuration

configuration (CONFIG) Giving instructions and supplying operating parameters for a FIELDVUE Instrument.

VL2000 Series

Glossary-2

control loop An arrangement of physical and electronic components for process control. A product flows through one or more physical components of the loop. The electronic components of the loop continuously measure one or more aspects of the product flow, then alter those aspects as necessary to achieve a desired process condition. A simple control loop measures only one variable. More sophisticated control loops measure many variables and maintain specified relationships between those variables.

controller A device that operates automatically to regulate a controlled variable.

CPU Acronym: Central Processing Unit

database A collection of data stored in a systematic way so that searches and sorts can be rapid and that retrieval of items is simple.

dataset Data gathered from an instrument that is stored in the ValveLink database with the date and time the data was gathered. VL2000 Series

deviation Usually, the difference between set point and process variable. More generally, any departure from a desired or expected value or pattern.

device A piece of electronic hardware that performs one or more prescribed functions.

device id A unique identifier embedded in the instrument at the factory. The ValveLink software uses this identifier to ensure it is communicating with the correct instrument.

dynamic bypass With dynamic bypass enabled, the instrument dynamic response to input changes is similar to the first order lag exhibited by a Fisher Controls Type 546 electro-pneumatic transducer connected directly to a large volume spring and diaphragm actuator. This provides dampening to the final control element and can stabilize some process loops. Dynamic bypass is generally beneficial in fast process loops and improves process control. (See Fisher Controls technical monograph TM-36 for more about positioner/booster guidelines. July 2000

Glossary-3

download Sending configuration instructions and calibration information from the FIELDVUE ValveLink database to a FIELDVUE Instrument.

Long Address A unique identifier that includes the manufacturer ID, device type, and device ID embedded in the instrument at the factory. The ValveLink software uses this unique identifier to send messages to the instrument.

engineering units (EU) The units of measurement for percentage values of an analog process variable. Possible examples are gallons per hour, degrees Celsius, and pounds per square inch.

memory A computerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s storage for programs and data. Most computers and microprocessors have both internal and external memories: use of internal memories is faster, but the capacity of internal memories is more limited.

EU Acronym: Engineering Units

mode Import Bringing in tag data from an export file generated by another ValveLink program.

Instrument Society of America (ISA) A professional organization of designers, manufacturers, and users of process control instrumentation.

Two types of mode are available for a HART FIELDVUE instrument: Instrument Mode and Control Mode. The Instrument Mode can be In Service or Out Of Service. The possible control modes for a HART Instrument are: Analog (RSP), Digital, and Test.

operating system The software that controls and supervises all the internal operations of a computer.

parallel ISA Acronym: Instrument Society of America July 2000

Simultaneous: said of data transmission on two or more channels at the same time. VL2000 Series

Glossary-4

plant area The collection of equipment in a plant that has common manufacturing strategies and alarm strategies.

primary master Masters are communicating devices. A primary master is a communicating device typically permanently wired into the instrument in the field. You can establish either a communicating device in the control room or a pc running ValveLink software as the primary master for an instrument. In contrast, a hand-held communicator is a secondary master because it is not permanently wired into the instrument.

RAM Acronym: Random Access Memory

ROM Acronym: Read-Only Memory

software Microprocessor or computer programs and routines that a user can change.

tag A unique identifying mnemonic or label for a controller or point of a process control system.

tuning The adjustment of control terms or parameter values to produce a desired control effect.

random access memory (RAM) A type of semiconductor memory. A user can read from and write to a RAM, electrically, as often as desired.

read-only memory (ROM) A memory in which information is stored permanently. A user can examine ROM contents as often as desired but cannot change the contents.

VL2000 Series

upload The movement of configuration instructions from a FIELDVUE Instrument to a PC running FIELDVUE ValveLink. An upload lets the current values of parameters be incorporated into the, eliminating the need for user entry. Uploads also may be used to verify that configuration is correct.

July 2000

Index-1 Q-Q

Index 1 A Address Device (DVC5000f), 5-31, 13-45 Polling (DVC5000), 13-26 Alert Log, Viewing and Printing, 6-13 Alert Record (DVC5000) Clearing, 15-38 Enabling Alert Groups, 13-39 Viewing, 15-38 Alert Scan Setting Options, 6-14 Setting Up, 6-11 Starting, 6-12 Alerts Enabling Auxiliary Input, DVC5000, 13-25 Cycle Counter DVC5000, 13-22 DVC5000f, 13-81 Drive Signal, DVC5000, 13-25 Output Block Timeout, DVC5000f, 13-76 Temperature, DVC5000f, 13-76 Travel Accumulator DVC5000, 13-38 July 2000

DVC5000f, 13-75 Travel Deviation DVC5000, 13-24 DVC5000f, 13-73 Travel Hi and Lo DVC5000, 13-29 DVC5000f, 13-78 Travel Hi Hi and Lo Lo DVC5000, 13-29 DVC5000f, 13-79 Scanning for. See Alert Scan Analog Input (DVC5000) Calibrating, 14-7 Selecting Units, 13-20 Audit Log Filtering Applying Multiple Filters, 9-8 by Date and Time, 9-8 by Event, 9-8 by Tag, 9-7 by User, 9-7 Removing Filters, 9-8 Printing, 9-10 Sorting, 9-9 Toolbar, 9-5 Viewing, 9-3

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Automatic Startup, 3-46 Auxiliary Input (DVC5000) Enabling Alert, 13-25 Monitoring Alert, 15-13 VL2000 Series

13 14 15 16 20 19 18 17

Index-2

B 1 2 3 4 5

Block Mode (DVC5000f) for calibrating, 14-3 for initial setup, 12-5 for running diagnostics, 15-51, 15-72, 15-91 Permitted and Normal Resource Block, 13-59 Transducer Block, 13-77 Target and Actual Changing, 13-46 Monitoring, 15-20 Burst Mode (DVC5000) Command, 13-41 Enabling, 13-40

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 19 18 17

C Calibrating Analog Inputs (DVC5000), 14-7 Canceling Calibration, 14-3 Getting Started, 14-2 Low Power Warning (DVC5000), 14-4 Pressure Sensor DVC5000, 14-17 DVC5000f, 14-17 Restoring Factory Calibration, 14-6 Travel Auto, 14-8 Manual DVC5000, 14-14 DVC5000f, 14-13 Travel Sensor, 14-18 VL2000 Series

Configuration Changed Flag (DVC5000) Displaying Status, 15-13 Resetting, 13-12 Control Mode (DVC5000) Monitoring, 15-10 Selecting, 13-16 Cycle Counter Enabling Alert DVC5000, 13-22 DVC5000f, 13-81 Monitoring DVC5000, 15-13 DVC5000f, 15-19 Resetting DVC5000, 13-23 DVC5000f, 13-81

D Database Tags. See Tags Datasets Adding Notes, 13-5 Clearing Current Information, 13-6 Copying from another tag, 13-6 Creating, 13-5 Deleting, 13-6 Description, 13-5 Reviewing Data, 13-6 Transferring Data, 13-7 Working with, 13-5 Date, Instrument Calibration DVC5000, 13-26 DVC5000f, 13-61 Descriptor, DVC5000, 13-26 July 2000

Index-3 Detailed Setup DVC5000, 13-12 DVC5000f, 13-54 Device Address DVC5000. See Polling Address DVC5000f, 13-45 Device Description (DD), Installing for Windows 95/98, 3-19 for Windows NT, 3-35 Diagnostic Tests Cancelling, 15-5 Config Page, 15-43 Data Points Page, 15-50 See also Data Points Page for specific test Graph Page, 15-47 See also Graph Page for specific test Inputs Page, 15-41 See also Inputs Page for specific test Monitors, Viewing Instrument Information, 15-7 Notes Page, 15-50 Running Drive Signal, DVC5000, 15-66 Dynamic Error Band, DVC5000, 15-62 Output Signal, DVC5000, 15-69 Step Response, 15-72 Stroke Valve, 15-90 Total Scan, DVC5000f, 15-51 July 2000

Valve Signature, DVC5000, 15-77 Selecting Units of Measure, 15-6 Setting Collection Interval for Tests, 15-5 Drive Signal Enabling Alert, DVC5000, 13-25 Monitoring DVC5000, 15-9 DVC5000f, 15-19 Drive Signal Test (DVC5000) Data Points Page, 15-68 Graph Page, 15-68 Running, 15-66 Drive Signal Test (DVC5000f). See Total Scan Test (DVC5000f) Dynamic Bypass, DVC5000, 13-21 Dynamic Error Band Test (DVC5000) Analyzed Page, 15-65 Data Points Page, 15-64 Graph Page, 15-64 Running, 15-62 Dynamic Error Band Test (DVC5000f). See Total Scan Test (DVC5000f)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E Exiting ValveLink software, 3-46 Explorer View, 3-49 VL2000 Series

13 14 15 16 20 19 18 17

Index-4

Verifying instrument connections, 5-7

F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 19 18 17

Fault State (DVC5000f) Monitoring, 15-20 Setting and Clearing, 13-53 Feedback Connection DVC5000, 13-18 DVC5000f, 13-63 Free Time (DVC5000) Monitoring Self Test Status, 15-16 Monitoring Value, 15-10 Self Test Failure, enabling to cause instrument shutdown, 13-27

H Hardlock Backing Up, 11-5 For Installing ValveLink Software, 3-3 For Instrument StepUp, 16-1 For ValveLink Upgrade, 11-2 Installing, 3-4 Licenses Available, 11-2 Replacing, 11-6 Hardware Requirements, 1-3 HART Modem Selecting HART modem communication, 5-5 Specifying the highest device address, 5-6 Transferring data between instrument and database tag, 5-10 VL2000 Series

HART Multiplexers Adding instruments to, 6-8 Changing Tag and Descriptor, 6-7 Selecting HART multiplexer communication, 5-16 Setting Up a Network, 5-13 Setting up Pepperl & Fuchs, 6-7 Specifying highest multiplexer address, 5-17 Viewing Status, 6-5 HART Tag, DVC5000, 13-25

I Input Characterization DVC5000, 13-42 DVC5000f, 13-69 Input Filter Time, DVC5000, 13-21 Input Range, DVC5000, 13-20 Input Signal, Range, DVC5000, 13-20 Instrument Clock, Setting, DVC5000, 13-39 Instrument Level, Upgrading, 16-1 Instrument Mode (DVC5000) See also Block Mode (DVC5000f) Changing, 13-9 for calibrating, 14-3 for configuration, 13-9 July 2000

Index-5 for initial setup, 12-5 for monitoring alerts, 15-11 for running diagnostics, 15-4, 15-62, 15-67, 15-69, 15-72, 15-91 for transferring data, 5-11, 5-12, 5-23, 5-24, 13-7 Monitoring, 15-10 Instrument Protection (DVC5000) See also Transducer Block Protection (DVC5000f) Changing, 13-11 for calibrating, 14-3 for configuration, 13-9 for initial setup, 12-5 for transferring data, 5-11, 5-12, 5-23, 5-24, 13-7 Instrument Serial Number DVC5000, 13-26 DVC5000f, 13-61 Instrument Status DVC5000, 15-8 DVC5000f, 15-18 Internal Temperature Monitoring Sensor Status, 15-15 Monitoring Value DVC5000, 15-10 DVC5000f, 15-20 Self Test Failure, enabling to cause instrument shutdown, DVC5000, 13-28

L Logging Out, 3-46 July 2000

M Manual Conventions, 1-6 Matching Instruments to Database Tags HART modem, 5-9 HART multiplexer, 5-22 Message DVC5000, 13-26 DVC5000f, 13-61 Minimum Closing Time (DVC5000), 13-21 Minimum Opening Time (DVC5000), 13-21 Modbus Network Communicating on, 6-29 Connecting to, 6-21 Packed Data, 6-17, 6-20, 6-28 Scaling Function Code 4 Integers, 6-29 Setting Up ValveLink to Communicate, 6-22 Verifying Communication, 6-30 Modbus Protocol Support, 6-15 Mouse, Operating, 1-8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

N Network List, Checking, 5-19 NIâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;FBUS Configuring for Windows 95/98, 3-18 for Windows NT, 3-31 Connecting to, 5-25 Installing for Windows 95/98 Drive Software, 3-12 VL2000 Series

11 12 13 14 15 16 20 19 18 17

Index-6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PCMCIA Card, 3-17 for Windows NT Driver Software, 3-24 PCMCIA Card, 3-30

Requirements Hardware, 1-3 Software, 1-5

Restart Control Mode, DVC5000, 13-16

Online Help, 3-54

Restarting After Power Outage, 3-46

Output Pressure Monitoring Sensor Status DVC5000, 15-15 DVC5000f, 15-25 Monitoring Value DVC5000, 15-9 DVC5000f, 15-21 Output Signal Test (DVC5000) Data Points Page, 15-71 Graph Page, 15-70 Running, 15-69 Output Signal Test (DVC5000f). See Total Scan Test (DVC5000f)

Performance Tuner, 12-16 Polling Address See also Device Address DVC5000, 13-26

Pressure Units DVC5000, 13-34 DVC5000f, 13-66

Primary Master, 5-3

15 16 20 19 18 17